ED-A220NMEF - Projector HITACHI - Free user manual and instructions

USER MANUAL ED-A220NMEF HITACHI

(Type no. ED-A220NM)

User's Manual (detailed) Operating Guide

Line drawing of a portable electronic device with ventilation slots and buttons (no text or symbols)

Thank you for purchasing this projector.

⚠ WARNING ▶ Before using this product, please read all manuals for this product. Be sure to read “Safety Guide” first. After reading them, store them in a safe place for future reference.

About this manual

Various symbols are used in this manual. The meanings of these symbols are described below.

⚠ WARNING This symbol indicates information that, if ignored, could possibly result in personal injury or even death due to incorrect handling.

CAUTION This symbol indicates information that, if ignored, could possibly result in personal injury or physical damage due to incorrect handling.

NOTICE This entry notices of fear of causing trouble.

Please refer to the pages written following this symbol.

NOTE • The information in this manual is subject to change without notice.

• The manufacturer assumes no responsibility for any errors that may appear in this manual.
• The reproduction, transfer or copy of all or any part of this document is not permitted without express written consent.

Trademark acknowledgment

• Mac ^ is a registered trademark of Apple Inc.
• Windows ^ , DirectDraw ^ and Direct3D ^ are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S. and/or other countries.
  • VESA and DDC are trademarks of the Video Electronics Standard Association.
• HDMI, the HDMI logo, and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC in the United States and other countries.
  • Trademark PJLink is a trademark applied for trademark rights in Japan, the United States of America and other countries and areas.

- Blu-ray Disc ^TM and Blu-ray ^TM are trademarks of Blu-ray Disc Association.

All other trademarks are the properties of their respective owners.

Projector

User's Manual - Safety Guide

Thank you for purchasing this projector.

WARNING • Before using, read these user's manuals of this projector to ensure correct usage through understanding. After reading, store them in a safe place for re reference. Incorrect handling of this product could possibly result in personal injury physical damage. The manufacturer assumes no responsibility for any damage caused mishandling that is beyond normal usage defined in these manuals of this projector.

NOTE • The information in this manual is subject to change without notice.

• The manufacturer assumes no responsibility for any errors that may appear in this manual.
• The reproduction, transmission or use of this document or contents is not permitted without express written authority.

About The Symbols

Various symbols are used in this manual, the user's manual and on the product itself to ensure correct usage, to prevent danger to the user and others, and to prevent property damage. The meanings of these symbols are described below. It is important that you read these descriptions thoroughly and fully understand the contents.

	WARNING	This symbol indicates information that, if ignored, could possibly result in personal injury or even death due to incorrect handling.
	CAUTION	This symbol indicates information that, if ignored, could result possibly in personal injury or physical damage due to incorrect handling.

Typical Symbols

This symbol indicates an additional warning (including cautions). An illustration is provided to clarify the contents.

This symbol indicates a prohibited action. The contents will be clearly indicated in an illustration or nearby (the symbol to the left indicates that disassembly is prohibited).

This symbol indicates a compulsory action. The contents will be clearly indicated in an illustration or nearby (the symbol to the left indicates that the power plug should be disconnected from the power outlet).

Safety Precautions

WARNING

Never use the projector if a problem should occur.

Abnormal operations such as smoke, strange odor, no image, no sound, excessive sound, damaged casing or elements or cables, penetration of liquids or foreign matter, etc. can cause a fire or electrical shock.

In such case, immediately turn off the power switch and then disconnect the power plug from the power outlet. After making sure that the smoke or odor has stopped, contact your dealer. Never attempt to make repairs yourself because this could be dangerous.

- The power outlet should be close to the projector and easily accessible.

Use special caution for children and pets.

Incorrect handling could result in fire, electrical shock, injury, burn or vision problem.

Use special caution in households where children and pets are present.

Do not insert liquids or foreign object.

Penetration of liquids or foreign objects could result in fire or electrical shock. Use special caution in households where children are present.

If liquids or foreign object should enter the projector, immediately turn off the power switch, disconnect the power plug from the power outlet and contact your dealer.

• Do not place the projector near water (ex. a bathroom, a beach, etc.).
• Do not expose the projector to rain or moisture. Do not place the projector outdoors.
• Do not place flower vases, pots, cups, cosmetics, liquids such as water, etc on or around the projector.
• Do not place metals, combustibles, etc on or around the projector.
• To avoid penetration of foreign objects, do not put the projector into a case or bag together with any thing except the accessories of the projector, signal cables and connectors.

Never disassemble and modify.

The projector contains high voltage components. Modification and/or disassembly of the projector or accessories could result in fire or electrical shock.

• Never open the cabinet.
• Ask your dealer to repair and clean insider.

Do not give the projector any shock or impact.

If the projector should be shocked and/or broken, it could result in an injury, and continued use could result in fire or electrical shock.

If the projector is shocked, immediately turn off the power switch, disconnect the power plug from the power outlet and contact your dealer.

Do not place the projector on an unstable surface.

If the projector should be dropped and/or broken, it could result in an injury, and continued use could result in fire or electrical shock.

- Do not place the projector on an unstable, slant or vibrant surface such as a wobbly or inclined stand.

- Use the caster brakes placing the projector on a stand with casters.

- Do not place the projector in the side up position, the lens up position or the lens down position.

- In the case of a ceiling installation or the like, contact your dealer before installation.

Disconnect the plug from the power outlet.

Do not disassemble.

Safety Precautions (continued)

WARNING

Be cautious of High temperatures of the projector.

High temperatures are generated when the lamp is lit. It could result in fire or burn. Use special caution in households where children are present.

Do not touch about the lens, air fans and ventilation openings during use or immediately after use, to prevent a burn. Take care of ventilation.

• Keep a space of 30~cm or more between the sides and other objects such as walls.
• Do not place the projector on a metallic table or anything weak in heat.
• Do not place anything about the lens, air fans and ventilation openings of the projector.
• Never block the air fan and ventilation openings.
• Do not cover the projector with a tablecloth, etc.
• Do not place the projector on a carpet or bedding.

Never look through the lens or openings when the lamp is on.

The powerful light could adversely affect vision.

Use special caution in households where children are present.

Use only the correct power cord and the correct power outlet.

Incorrect power supply could result in fire or electrical shock.

- Use only the correct power outlet depending on the indication on the projector and the safety standard.

- The enclosed power cord must be used depending on the power outlet to be used.

Be cautious of the power cord connection.

Incorrect connection of the power cord could result in fire or electrical shock.

• Do not touch the power cord with a wet hand.
• Check that the connecting portion of the power cord is clean (with no dust), before using. Use a soft and dry cloth to clean the power plug.
• Insert the power plug into a power outlet firmly. Avoid using a loose, unsound outlet or contact failure.

Be sure to connect with ground wire.

Connect the ground terminal of AC inlet of this unit with the ground terminal provided at the building using the correct power cord; otherwise, fire or electric shock can result.

- Don't take the core of power cord away.

Surely connect the ground wire.

Safety Precautions (continued)

WARNING

Be careful in handling the light source lamp.

The projector uses a high-pressure mercury glass lamp made of glass. The lamp can break with a loud bang, or burn out. When the bulb bursts, it is possible for shards of glass to fly into the lamp housing, and for gas containing mercury to escape from the projector's vent holes.

Please carefully read the section "Lamp".

Be careful in handling the power cord and external connection cables.

If you keep using a damaged the power cord or cables, it can cause a fire or electrical shock. Do not apply too much heat, pressure or tension to the power cord and cables.

If the power cord or cables is damaged (exposed or broken core wires, etc.), contact your dealer.

• Do not place the projector or heavy objects on the power cord and cables. Also, do not place a spread, cover, etc, over them because this could result in the inadvertent placing of heavy objects on the concealed power cord or cables.
• Do not pull the power cord and cables. When connecting and disconnecting the power cord or cables, do it with your hand holding the plug or connector.
• Do not place the cord near the heater.
• Avoid bending the power cord sharply.
• Do not attempt to work on the power cord.

Be careful in handling the battery of the remote control.

Incorrect handling of the battery could result in fire or personal injury. The battery may explode if not handled properly.

• Keep the battery away from children and pets. If swallowed consult a physician immediately for emergency treatment.
• Do not allow the battery in a fire or water.
• Avoid fire or high-temperature environment.
• Do not hold the battery with the metallic tweezers.
• Keep the battery in a dark, cool and dry play.
• Do not short circuit the battery.
• Do not recharge, disassemble or solder the battery.
• Do not give the battery a physical impact.
• Use only the battery specified in the other manual of this projector.
• Make sure the plus and minus terminals are correctly aligned when loading the battery.
• If you observe a leakage of the battery, wipe out the flower and then replace the battery. If the flower adheres your body or clothes, rinse well with water.
• Obey the local laws on disposing the battery.

Safety Precautions (continued)

CAUTION

Be careful in moving the projector.

Neglect could result in an injury or damage.

• Do not move the projector during use. Before moving, disconnect the power cord and all external connections, and close the slide lens door or attach the lens cap.
• Avoid any impact or shock to the projector.
• Do not drag the projector.
• For moving the projector, use the enclosed case or bag if provided.

Do not put anything on top of the projector.

Placing anything on the projector could result in loss of balance or falling, and cause an injury or damage. Use special caution in households where children are present.

Do not attach anything other than specified things to the projector.

Neglect could result in an injury or damage.

- Some projector has a screw thread in a lens part. Do not attach anything other than specified options (such as conversion lens) to the screw thread.

Avoid a smoky, humid or dusty place.

Placing the projector in a smoke, a highly humid, dusty place, oily soot or corrosive gas could result in fire or electrical shock.

• Do not place the projector near a smoky, humid or dusty place (ex. a smoking space, a kitchen, a beach, etc.). Do not place the projector outdoors.
• Do not use a humidifier near the projector.

Take care of the air filter to normal ventilate.

The air filter should be cleaned periodically. If the air filter becomes clogged by dust or the like, internal temperature rises and could cause malfunction. The projector may display the message such as “CHECK THE AIR FLOW” or turn off the projector, to prevent the internal heat level rising.

• When the indicators or a message prompts you to clean the air filter, clean the air filter as soon as possible.
• If the soiling will not come off the air filter, or it becomes damaged, replace the air filter.
• Use the air filter of the specified type only. Please order the air filter specified in the other manual of this projector to your dealer.
• When you replace the lamp, replace also the air filter. The air filter may be attached when you buy a replacement lamp for this projector.
• Do not turn on the projector without air filter.

Avoid a high temperature environment.

The heat could have adverse influence on the cabinet of the projector and other parts. Do not place the projector, the remote control and other parts in direct sunlight or near a hot object such as heater, etc.

Avoid Magnetism.

Manufacture strongly recommends to avoid any magnetic contact that is not shielded or protected on or near the projector itself. (ie., Magnetic Security Devices, or other projector accessory that contains magnetic material that has not been provided by the manufacture etc.) Magnetic objects may cause interruption of the projector's internal mechanical performance which may interfere with cooling fans speed or stopping, and may cause the projector to completely shut down.

Safety Precautions (continued)

CAUTION

Remove the power cord for complete separation.

• For safety purposes, disconnect the power cord if the projector is not to be used for prolonged periods of time.
• Before cleaning, turn off and unplug the projector. Neglect could result in fire or electrical shock.

Ask your dealer to cleaning inside of the projector about every year.

Accumulations of dust inside the projector cause result in fire or malfunction. Cleaning inside is more effective if performed before every humid periods such as rainy season.

- Do not clean inside yourself because it is dangerous.

Disconnect the plug from the power outlet.

NOTE

Do not give the remote control any physical impact.

A physical impact could cause damage or malfunction of the remote control.

• Take care not to drop the remote control.
- Do not place the projector or heavy objects on the remote control.

Take care of the lens.

• Close the slide lens door or attach the lens cap to prevent the lens surface being scratched when the projector is not used.
• Do not touch the lens to prevent fog or dirt of the lens that cause deterioration of display quality.
• Use commercially available lens tissue to clean the lens (used to clean cameras, eyeglasses, etc.). Be careful not to scratch the lens with hard objects.

Take care of the cabinet and the remote control.

Incorrect care could have adverse influence such as discoloration, peeling paint, etc.

• Use a soft cloth to clean the cabinet and control panel of the projector and the remote control. When excessively soiled dilute a neutral detergent in water, wet and wring out the soft cloth and afterward wipe with a dry soft cloth. Do not use undiluted detergent directly.
• Do not use an aerosol sprays, solvents, volatile substances or abrasive cleaner.
• Before using chemical wipes, be sure to read and observe the instructions.
• Do not allow long-term close contact with rubber or vinyl.

About bright spots or dark spots.

Although bright spots or dark spots may appear on the screen, this is a unique characteristic of liquid crystal displays, and such do not constitute or imply a machine defect.

Be careful of printing of the LCD panel.

If the projector continues projecting a still image, inactive images or 16:9 aspect images in case of 4:3 panel, etc., for long time, the LCD panel might possibly be printed.

Safety Precautions (continued)

NOTE

About consumables.

Lamp, LCD panels, polarizers and other optical components, and air filter and cooling fans have a different lifetime in each. These parts may need to be replaced after a long usage time.

• This product isn't designed for continuous use of long time. In the case of continuous use for 6 hours or more, or use for 6 hours or more every day (even if it isn't continuous), or repetitious use, the lifetime may be shortened, and these parts may need to be replaced even if one year has not passed since the beginning of using.
• Any inclining use beyond the adjustment range explained in these user's manuals may shorten the lifetimes of the consumables.

Before turning on the power, make the projector cool down adequately.

After turning the projector off, pushing the restart switch or interrupting of the power supply, make the projector cool down adequately. Operation in a high temperature state of the projector causes a damage of the electrode and un-lighting of the lamp.

Avoid strong rays.

Any strong ray (such as direct rays of the sun or room lighting) onto the remote control sensors could invalidate the remote control.

Avoid radio interference.

Any interfering radiation could cause disordered image or noises.

- Avoid radio generator such as a mobile telephone, transceiver, etc. around the projector.

About displaying characteristic.

The display condition of the projector (such as color, contrast, etc.) depends on characteristic of the screen, because the projector uses a liquid crystal display panel. The display condition can differ from the display of CRT.

- Do not use a polarized screen. It can cause red image.

Turn the power on/off in right order.

To prevent any trouble, turn on/off the projector in right order mentioned below unless specifying.

• Power on the projector before the computer or video tape recorder.
• Power off the projector after the computer or video tape recorder.

Take care not to fatigue your eyes.

Rest the eyes periodically.

Set the sound volume at a suitable level to avoid bothering other people.

- It is better to keep the volume level low and close the windows at night to protect the neighborhood environment.

Connecting with notebook computer

When connecting with notebook computer, set to valid the RGB external image output (setting CRT display or simultaneous display of LCD and CRT).

Please read instruction manual of the notebook for more information.

Lamp

WARNING

HIGH VOLTAGE

HIGH TEMPERATURE

HIGH PRESSURE

The projector uses a high-pressure mercury glass lamp. The lamp can break with a loud bang, or burn out, if jolted or scratched, handled while hot, or worn over time. Note that each lamp has a different lifetime, and some may burst or burn out soon after you start using them. In addition, when the bulb bursts, it is possible for shards of glass to fly into the lamp housing, and for gas containing mercury to escape from the projector's vent holes.

About disposal of a lamp • This product contains a mercury lamp; do not put in trash. Dispose of in accord with environmental laws.

For lamp recycling, go to www.lamprecycle.org. (in USA)

For product disposal, contact your local government agency or www.eiae.org (in the US) or www.epsc.ca (in Canada).

For more information, call your dealer.

Disconnect the plug from the power outlet

- If the lamp should break (it will make a loud bang when it does), unplug the power cord from the outlet, and make sure to request a replacement lamp from your local dealer. Note that shards of glass could damage the projector's internals, or cause injury during handling, so please do not try to clean the projector or replace the lamp yourself.

- If the lamp should break (it will make a loud bang when it does), ventilate the room well, and make sure not to breathe the gas that comes out of the projector vents, or get it in your eyes or mouth.

- Before replacing the lamp, make sure the power switch is off and the power cable is not plugged in, then wait at least 45 minutes for the lamp to cool sufficiently. Handling the lamp while hot can cause burns, as well as damaging the lamp.

- Do not open the lamp cover while the projector is suspended from above. This is dangerous, since if the lamp's bulb has broken, the shards will fall out when the cover is opened. In addition, working in high places is dangerous, so ask your local dealer to have the lamp replaced even if the bulb is not broken.

- Do not use the projector with the lamp cover removed. At the lamp replacing, make sure that the screws are screwed in firmly. Loose screws could result in damage or injury.

- Use the lamp of the specified type only. - If the lamp breaks soon after the first time it is used, it is possible that there are electrical problems elsewhere besides the lamp. If this happens, contact your local dealer or a service representative.

- Handle with care: jolting or scratching could cause the lamp bulb to burst during use.

• Using the lamp for long periods of time, could cause it dark, not to light up or to burst. When the pictures appear dark, or when the color tone is poor, please replace the lamp as soon as possible. Do not use old (used) lamps; this is a cause of breakage.

Regulatory Notices

FCC Statement Warning

This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

WARNING: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.

INSTRUCTIONS TO USERS: This equipment complies with the requirements of FCC (Federal Communication Commission) equipment provided that the following conditions are met. Some cables have to be used with the core set. Use the accessory cable or a designated-type cable for the connection. For cables that have a core only at one end, connect the core to the projector.

CAUTION: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

For the Customers in CANADA

NOTICE: This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.

Warranty And After-Service

Unless seen any abnormal operations (mentioned with the first paragraph of WARNING in this manual), when a problem occurs with the equipment, first refer to the "Troubleshooting" section of the "Operating Guide", and run through the suggested checks. If this does not resolve the problem contact your dealer or service company. They will tell you what warranty condition is applied.

Contents

Introduction 3

SETUP menu 42

Features ....

Checking the contents of package...3

Part names ....

BZOOM, D-SHIFT, PICTURE POSITION,

☐ KEYSTONE, ☐ KEYSTONE, PERFECT FIT,

A4TO ECO MODE, ECO MODE, MIRROR,

STANDBY MODE, MONITOR OUT

Setting up 7

Arrangement .... 7

Connecting with your devices ..... 9

Connecting to a power supply.....1 4

Using the security bar and slot . . . . 14

Using the cable cover ..... 1 5

Remote control ..... 1 6

Installing the batteries ..... 1 6

About the remote control signal ... 16

Changing the frequency of remote control signal . . 1 7

Using as a simple PC mouse & keyboard . . 1 7

Power on/off 18

Turning on the power 18

Turning off the power ..... 1 9

Operating 20

Adjusting the volume .....2 0

Temporarily muting the sound ..... 2 0

Selecting an input signal ..... 2 0

Searching an input signal ..... 2 2

Selecting an aspect ratio ..... 2 2

Adjusting the projector's elevator . . 23

Adjusting the zoom and focus ..... 2 3

Using the automatic adjustment feature. . . 2 4

Adjusting the position ..... 2 5

Correcting the keystone distortions. . 2 5

Using the magnify feature ..... 2 6

Temporarily freezing the screen . . . 27

Temporarily blanking the screen .. 27

Using the menu function .....28

EASY MENU....30

ASPECT, D-ZOOM, KEYSTONE, KEYSTONE,

PERFECT FIT, PICTURE MODE, ECO MODE,

MIRROR, RESET, FILTER TIME, LANGUAGE,

ADVANCED MENU, EXIT

PICTURE menu ..... 32

BRIGHTNESS, CONTRAST, GAMMA, COLOR TEMP,

COLOR, TINT, SHARPNESS, ACTIVE IRIS, MY MEMORY

IMAGE menu ....35

ASPECT, OVER SCAN, V POSITION, H POSITION,

H PHASE, H SIZE, AUTO ADJUST EXECUTE

INPUT menu 38

PROGRESSIVE, VIDEO NR, COLOR SPACE,

VIDEO FORMAT, HDMI FORMAT, HDMI RANGE,

COMPUTER IN, FRAME LOCK, RESOLUTION

AUDIO menu 45

AUDIO menu 45

VOLUME, SPEAKER, AUDIO SOURCE,

HDMI AUDIO, MIC LEVEL, MIC VOLUME

SCREEN menu....47

LANGUAGE, MENU POSITION, BLANK,

STARTUP, MyScreen, MyScreen Lock,

MESSAGE, SOURCE NAME, TEMPLATE, C.C.

OPTION menu ....53

AUTO SEARCH, DIRECT POWER ON,

AUTO POWER OFF, USB TYPE B, LAMP TIME,

FILTER TIME, MY BUTTON, MY SOURCE,

SERVICE

NETWORK menu 64

SETUP, PROJECTOR NAME, MY IMAGE,

AMX D.D., PRESENTATION, INFORMATION,

SERVICE

SECURITY menu....71

SECURITY PASSWORD CHANGE,

MyScreen PASSWORD, PIN LOCK,

TRANSITION DETECTOR, MY TEXT PASSWORD,

MY TEXT DISPLAY, MY TEXT WRITING

Presentation tools ..... 7 7

PC-LESS Presentation ..... 77

Thumbnail Mode, Full Screen Mode,

Slideshow mode, Playlist

USB Display 86

Right-Click menu, Floating menu,

Options window

Maintenance 89

Replacing the lamp 89

Cleaning and replacing the air filter . . 91

Replacing the internal clock battery .. 9 3

Caring for the mirror and lens. . . . . . . 9 4

Other care 95

Troubleshooting ..... 9 6

Related messages 96

Regarding the indicator lamps .... 98

Resetting all settings ..... 1 0 0

Phenomena that may be easy

to be mistaken for machine defects .100

Specifications ..... 10 4

Introduction

Features

The projector provides you with the broad use by the following features.

√ The unique lens and mirror system realizes ultra short distance projection, which gives you more various way of use.
√ The motorized lens door offers you very simple use of the projector.
√ The double layer filter system is expected to function longer and offers you less maintenance frequency.
√ The HDMI port can support various image equipment which have digital interface to get clearer pictures on a screen.
√ This projector can be controlled and monitored via LAN connection.
√ This projector's network supports the PJLink™ standard.
√ PJLink ^TM is a unified standard for operating and controlling data projectors.

PJLink™ enables central control of projectors manufactured by different vendors and projectors can be operated by a controller. PJLink™ compliant equipment can be managed and controlled at any time and in any place, regardless of manufacturer.

For the command of PJLink™, see "Technical".

For specifications of PJLink™, see the web site of the Japan Business Machine and Information System Industries Association.

URL: http://pjlink.jbmia.or.jp (as of Dec. 2009)

Checking the contents of package

Please see the Contents of package section in the User's Manual (concise) which is a book. Your projector should come with the items shown there. Require of your dealer immediately if any items are missing.

NOTE • Keep the original packing materials, for future reshipment. Be sure to use the original packing materials when moving the projector. Use special caution for the lens.

Part names

Projector

(1) Lamp cover (89) The lamp unit is inside.
(2) Control panel (5)
(3) Elevator feet (x 2) (23)
(4) Remote sensor (16)
(5) Lens (94)
(6) Intake vents
(7) Filter cover (91) The air filter and intake vent are inside.
(8) Battery cover The internal clock battery is inside.
(9) Speaker (12, 20, 45)
(10) Exhaust vent
(11) AC IN (AC inlet) (14)
(12) Ports (5)
(13) Security bar (14)
(14) Security slot (14)
(15) Lens door (94)
(16) Mirror (94)
(17) Spacer (Small) (23)
(18) Spacer (Large) (23)

(1) HOT! (2) (4) (12) (14) (11) (13) (7)(6) (8) (10) HOT! (17) Small (3) (18) (9) Large (5) (15) (16) (15)

⚠ WARNING ▶HOT! : Do not touch around the lamp cover and the exhaust vents during use or just after use, since it is too hot.

▶ Be careful not to pinch your finger with the lens door, to prevent an injury.
▶ Never look into the projection lens or mirror while the projection lamp lights, since the projection lamp ray may cause a trouble on your eyes.
▶ Do not use the security bar and slot to prevent the projector from falling down, since it is not designed for it.

⚠️ CAUTION ▶ Maintain normal ventilation to prevent the projector from heating up. Do not cover, block or plug up the vents. Do not place anything that can stick or be sucked to the vents, around the intake vents. Clean the air filter periodically.

Control panel

(1) STANDBY/ON button (18)
(2) INPUT button (20)
(3) POWER indicator (18, 98, 99)
(4) TEMP indicator (98, 99)
(5) LAMP indicator (98, 99)

Buttons ◀/▶/▲/▼

(6) FOCUS +/- buttons

when no menu is displayed (24),

or Cursor ◀/▶ buttons when a menu is displayed (28). FOCUS +/- function is invalid when the USB TYPE A port is selected as the input source.

(7) MENU buttons

when no menu is displayed (28), or Cursor ▲/▼ buttons when a menu is displayed (28).

The ◀/▶/▲/▼ buttons on the projector work only as the cursor buttons while the template is displayed (51).

(3) (4) POWER TEMP LAMP (5) MENU (6) INPUT FOCU8 (7) (2) STANDBY/ON (1)

Ports (9\~13)

(1) USB TYPE A port
(2) LAN port
(3) HDMI port
(4) USB TYPE B port
(5) MIC port
(6) AUDIO IN1 port
(7) AUDIO IN2 port
(8) AUDIO IN3(L,R) ports

(9) AUDIO OUT (L,R) ports
(10) COMPUTER IN1 port
(11) COMPUTER IN2 port
(12) MONITOR OUT port
(13) CONTROL port
(14) VIDEO port
(15) S-VIDEO port

(1) (4) (3) (11) USB TYPE B HDMI (10) COMPUTER IN1COMPUTER IN2 USB TYPE A DC5V 0.5A (2) CONTROL MONITOR OUT MIC AUDIO IN3AUDIO OUT S-VIDEO AUDIO IN2 VIDEO (13) (5) (7) (6)(12) (9) (14)(15)

Remote control

(1) VIDEO button (21)
(2) COMPUTER button (21)
(3) SEARCH button (22)
(4) STANDBY/ON button (18)
(5) ASPECT button (22)
(6) AUTO button (24)
(7) BLANK button (27)
(8) MAGNIFY - ON button (26)
(9) MAGNIFY - OFF button (26)
(10) MY SOURCE/DOC.CAMERA button (21, 57)
(11) VOLUME - button (20)
(12) PAGE UP button (17)
(13) PAGE DOWN button (17)
(14) VOLUME + button (20)
(15) MUTE button (20)
(16) FREEZE button (27)
(17) MY BUTTON - 1 button (56)
(18) MY BUTTON - 2 button (56)
(19) KEYSTONE button (25)
(20) FOCUS - button (24)
(21) FOCUS + button (24)
(22) D-ZOOM - button (23)
(23) D-ZOOM + button (23)
(24) POSITION button (25, 29)
(25) MENU button (28, 29)
(26) ▲/▼/◄/► cursor buttons (28)
(27) ENTER button (28, 29)
(28) ESC button (28)
(29) RESET button (28)
(30) Battery cover (16)

Back of the remote control

Setting up

Install the projector according to the environment and manner the projector will be used in.

Arrangement

Refer to the illustrations and tables below to determine screen size and projection distance.

The values shown in the table are calculated for a full size screen: 1024 x 768

① Screen size (diagonal)

(b) Projection distance (±8%)

c1, c2 Screen height (±8%)

- On a horizontal surface

a c2 c1 b

- Mounted on the wall or ceiling

a c1 b c2

aScreen size(diagonal)			bProjection distance			c1Screen height			c2Screen height
type(inch)		m m	inch	m inch	m inch
60	1.5	0	096	3.8	0.2	81	11.1	1.1	96	47.1
70	1.8	0	161	6.3	0.3	17	12.5	1.3	84	54.5
80	2.0	0	225	8.9	0.3	52	13.9	1.5	71	61.9
90	2.3	0	289	11.4	0	387	15.2	1.7	759	69.2
100	2.5	0	0.353	13.9	0.423		16.6	1.9	47	76.6

- If the projector is used at an altitude of about 1600 m or higher, set FAN SPEED of the SERVICE item in the OPTION menu to HIGH (58). Otherwise, set it to NORMAL. If the projector is used with a wrong setting, it may cause damage to the projector itself or the parts inside.

- For the case of installation in special conditions such as on the wall or ceiling, the specified mounting accessories and service may be required. Before installing the projector, consult your dealer about your installation.

- The screen position may shift after installation if the projector is mounted on locations such as the wall or ceiling, due to the flexibility of the plastic projector body. If readjustment is necessary, consult with your dealer or service personnel.

- The projected image position and/or focus may change during warm-up (approx. 30 minutes after the lamp is turned on) or when the ambient conditions change. Readjust the image position and/or focus as necessary.

- Since the projector features an ultra short throw, be aware that it is required to select a screen carefully to have better performance.

- A soft screen such as a pull-down screen may cause serious distortion of a projected image. A hard screen such as a board screen is recommended for use with this projector.

- A high-gain screen such as a bead screen that has narrow viewing angle is not suitable for this projector. A low-gain screen (around 1.0) such as a matte screen that has wide viewing angle is recommended for use with this projector.

- A screen with a weave pattern may cause moiré on the projected image, which is not a failure of the projector. A screen that has less moiré effects is recommended for use with this projector.

(continued on next page)

Arrangement (continued)

WARNING

▶ Place the projector in a stable horizontal position. If the is knocked over, it could cause injury and/or damage to the a damaged projector could then result in fire and/or electric shock.

- Do not place the projector on an unstable, slanted or vibrational surface such as a wobbly or inclined stand.

- Do not place the projector on its side, front or rear position.

- Consult with your dealer before a special installation such as on the wall or ceiling.

▶ Place the projector in a cool place, and ensure that there is sufficient ventilation. The high temperature of the projector could cause fire, burns and/or malfunction of the projector.

- Do not stop-up, block or otherwise cover the projector's vents.

- Keep a space of 30 cm or more between the sides of the projector and other objects such as walls.

- Do not place or attach anything that would block the lens or vent holes.

- Do not place the projector on metallic thing or anything weak in heat.

- Do not place the projector on carpet, cushions or bedding.

- Do not place the projector in direct sunlight or near hot objects such as heaters. Do not place the projector where the air from an air conditioner or similar unit will blow on it directly.

- Do not place anything near the projector lens or vents, or on top of the projector.

- Do not place anything that may be sucked into or stick to the vents on the bottom of the projector. This projector has some intake vents also on the bottom.

▶ Do not place the projector anyplace where it may get wet. Getting the projector wet or inserting liquid into the projector could cause fire, electric shock and/or malfunction of the projector.

- Do not place the projector in a bathroom or the outdoors.

- Do not place anything containing liquid near the projector.

- Do not place the projector where any oils, such as cooking or machine oil, are used.

▶ Use only the mounting accessories the manufacturer specified, and leave installing and removing the projector with the mounting accessories to the service personnel.

- Read and keep the user's manual of the mounting accessories used.

CAUTION

▶ Avoid placing the projector in smoky, humid or dusty place.

Placing the projector in such places could cause fire, electric shock and/or malfunction of the projector.

- Do not place the projector near humidifiers, smoking spaces or a kitchen. Also do not use an ultrasonic humidifier near the projector. Otherwise chlorine and minerals contained in tap water are atomized and could be deposited in the projector causing image degradation or other problems.

▶ Position the projector to prevent light from directly hitting the projector's remote sensor.

▶ Do not place the product in a place where radio interference may be caused.

▶ Do not place this product in a magnetic field.

Arrangement (continued)

NOTE • The projector may make a rattling sound when tilted, moved or shaken, since a flap to control the air flow inside of the projector has moved. Be aware that this is not a failure or malfunction.

Connecting with your devices

Before connecting the projector to a device, consult the manual of the device to confirm that the device is suitable for connecting with this projector and prepare the required accessories, such as a cable in accord with the signal of the device. Consult your dealer when the required accessory did not come with the product or the accessory is damaged.

After making sure that the device and projector are turned off, connect them following the instructions below.

⚠ WARNING ▶ Use only the appropriate accessories. Otherwise it could cause a fire or damage to the device and the projector.

• Use only the accessories specified or recommended by the projector's manufacturer. Consult your dealer when the required accessory did not come with the product or the accessory is damaged. It may be regulated under some standard.
• For a cable with a core at only one end, connect the end with the core to the projector. That may be required by EMI regulations.
• Neither disassemble nor modify the projector and the accessories.
• Do not use the damaged accessory. Be careful not to damage the accessories. Route a cable so that it is neither stepped on nor pinched out.

⚠️ CAUTION ▶ Do not turn on or off the projector while connected to a device in operation, unless that is directed in the manual of the device. Otherwise it may cause malfunction in the device or projector.

▶ Be careful not to mistakenly connect a connector to a wrong port. Otherwise it may cause malfunction in the device or projector.

- When connecting a connector to a port, make sure that the shape of the connector fits the port.

- Tighten the screws to connect a connector equipped with screws to a port.

- Use the cables with straight plugs, not L-shaped ones, as the input ports of the projector are recessed.

(continued on next page)

Connecting with your devices (continued)

About Plug-and-Play capability

• Plug-and-Play is a system composed of a computer, its operating system and peripheral equipment (i.e. display devices). This projector is VESA DDC 2B compatible. Plug-and-Play can be used by connecting this projector to a computer that is VESA DDC (display data channel) compatible.
• Take advantage of this feature by connecting a computer cable to the COMPUTER IN1 port (DDC 2B compatible). Plug-and-Play may not work properly if any other type of connection is attempted.

• Please use the standard drivers in your computer as this projector is a Plug-and-Play monitor.

• When AUTO is selected for the COMPUTER IN1 or COMPUTER IN2 port in COMPUTER IN of the INPUT menu, that port will accept component video signals (40).

• When the USB TYPE B port and the computer's type A USB port are connected, you can use the USB TYPE B port as a picture input port from the computer, or use the remote control as a simple mouse and keyboard of the computer. (17, 54).

graph TD
    A["VCR/DVD/Blu-ray Disc player"] --> B["COMPONENT"]
    A --> C["VIDEO OUT"]
    A --> D["VIDEO OUT"]
    A --> E["S-VIDEO OUT"]
    A --> F["COMPONENT"]
    A --> G["VIDEO OUT"]
    A --> H["VIDEO OUT"]
    A --> I["COMPONENT"]
    A --> J["VIDEO OUT"]
    A --> K["COMPONENT"]
    A --> L["COMPONENT"]
    A --> M["COMPONENT"]
    A --> N["COMPONENT"]
    A --> O["COMPONENT"]
    A --> P["COMPONENT"]
    A --> Q["COMPONENT"]
    A --> R["COMPONENT"]
    A --> S["COMPONENT"]
    A --> T["COMPONENT"]
    A --> U["COMPONENT"]
    A --> V["COMPONENT"]
    A --> W["COMPONENT"]
    A --> X["COMPONENT"]
    A --> Y["COMPONENT"]
    A --> Z["COMPONENT"]
    A --> AA["COMPONENT"]
    A --> AB["COMPONENT"]
    A --> AC["COMPONENT"]
    A --> AD["COMPONENT"]
    A --> AE["COMPONENT"]
    A --> AF["COMPONENT"]
    A --> AG["COMPONENT"]
    A --> AH["COMPONENT"]
    A --> AI["COMPONENT"]
    A --> AJ["COMPONENT"]
    A --> AK["COMPONENT"]
    A --> AL["COMPONENT"]
    A --> AM["COMPONENT"]
    A --> AN["COMPONENT"]
    A --> AO["COMPONENT"]
    A --> AP["COMPONENT"]
    A --> AQ["COMPONENT"]
    A --> AR["COMPONENT"]
    A --> AS["COMPONENT"]
    A --> AT["COMPONENT"]
    A --> AU["COMPONENT"]
    A --> AV["COMPONENT"]
    A --> AW["COMPONENT"]
    A --> AX["COMPONENT"]
    A --> AY["COMPONENT"]
    A --> AZ["COMPONENT"]
    A --> BA["COMPONENT"]
    A --> BB["COMPONENT"]
    A --> BC["COMPONENT"]
    A --> BD["COMPONENT"]
    A --> BE["COMPONENT"]
    A --> BF["COMPONENT"]
    A --> BG["COMPONENT"]
    A --> BH["COMPONENT"]
    A --> BI["COMPONENT"]
    A --> BJ["COMPONENT"]
    A --> BK["COMPONENT"]
    A --> BL["COMPONENT"]
    A --> BM["COMPONENT"]
    A --> BN["COMPONENT"]
    A --> BO["COMPONENT"]
    A --> BP["COMPONENT"]
    A --> BQ["COMPONENT"]
    A --> BR["COMPONENT"]
    A --> BS["COMPONENT"]
    A --> BT["COMPONENT"]
    A --> BU["COMPONENT"]
    A --> BV["COMPONENT"]
    A --> BW["COMPONENT"]
    A --> BX["COMPONENT"]
    A --> BY["COMPONENT"]
    A --> BZ["COMPONENT"]
    A --> CA["COMPONENT"]
    A --> CB["COMPONENT"]
    A --> CC["COMPONENT"]
    A --> CD["COMPONENT"]
    A --> CE["COMPONENT"]
    A --> CF["COMPONENT"]
    A --> CG["COMPONENT"]
    A --> CH["COMPONENT"]
    A --> CI["COMPONENT"]
    A --> CJ["COMPONENT"]
    A --> CK["COMPONENT"]
    A --> CL["COMPONENT"]
    A --> CM["COMPONENT"]
    A --> CN["COMPONENT"]
    A --> CO["COMPONENT"]
    A --> CP["COMPONENT"]
    A --> CQ["COMPONENT"]
    A --> CR["COMPONENT"]
    A --> CS["COMPONENT"]
    A --> CT["COMPONENT"]
    A --> CU["COMPONENT"]
    A --> CV["COMPONENT"]
    A --> CW["COMPONENT"]
    A --> CX["COMPONENT"]
    A --> CY["COMPONENT"]
    A --> CZ["COMPONENT"]
    A --> DA["COMPONENT"]
    A --> DB["COMPONENT"]
    A --> DC["COMPONENT"]
    A --> DD["COMPONENT"]
    A --> DE["COMPONENT"]
    A --> DF["COMPONENT"]
    A --> DG["COMPONENT"]
    A --> DH["COMPONENT"]
    A --> DI["COMPONENT"]
    A --> DJ["COMPONENT"]
    A --> DK["COMPONENT"]
    A --> DL["COMPONENT"]
    A --> DV["DVD/Blu-ray Disc player"]

(continued on next page)

Connecting with your devices (continued)

NOTE • Before connecting the projector to a computer, consult the computer's manual and check the compatibility of the signal level, the synchronization methods and the display resolution output to the projector.

• Some signal may need an adapter to input this projector.
• Some computers have multiple screen display modes that may include some signals which are not supported by this projector.
• Although the projector can display signals with resolution up to UXGA (1600X1200), the signal will be converted to the projector's panel resolution before being displayed. The best display performance will be achieved if the resolutions of the input signal and the projector panel are identical.
• If you connect this projector and a notebook computer, you need output the display to an external monitor, or output simultaneously to the internal display and an external monitor. Consult the computer's manual for the setting.
• Depending on the input signal, the automatic adjustment function of this projector may take some time and not function correctly.
• Note that a composite sync signal or sync-on-green signal may confuse the automatic adjustment function of this projector (40).
• If the automatic adjustment function does not work correctly, you may not see the dialog to set the display resolution. In such a case, use an external display device. You may be able to see the dialog and set an appropriate display resolution.

(continued on next page)

Connecting with your devices (continued)

- If you insert a USB storage device, such as a USB memory, into the USB TYPE A port and select the port as the input source, you can view images stored in the device (77).

- You can connect a dynamic microphone to the MIC port with a 3.5 mm mini-plug. In that case, the built-in speaker outputs the sound from the microphone, even while the sound from the projector is output. You can input line level signal to the MIC port from equipment such as wireless microphone. Select HIGH in the MIC LEVEL item of the AUDIO menu when you input line level audio signal to the MIC port. In the normal mode, the volume of the microphone can be adjusted separately from the volume of the projector using the menu. (46)

In the standby mode, the volume of the microphone is adjustable with the VOLUME +/- buttons on the remote control, in synchronization with the volume of the projector. (20)

Even when the sound of projector is set to mute mode by the AUDIO SOURCE function (45), the volume of the microphone is adjustable.

In both modes (standby or normal), the MUTE button on the remote control works on the sounds of the microphone and the projector. (20)

Monitor RGB IN Microphone system Speakers (with an amplifier) USB storage device USB TYPE B HDMI COMPUTER IN1 COMPUTER IN2 USB TYPE A DC5V 0.5A CONTROL MO UT MIC AUDIO IN3A AUDIO RUS S-VIDEO AUDIO IN2 VIDEO

⚠️ CAUTION ▶ Before removing the USB storage device from the port of the projector, be sure to use the REMOVE USB function on the thumbnail screen to secure your data (80).

NOTE • If a loud feedback noise is produced from the speaker, move the microphone away from the speaker.

- This projector doesn't support plug-in power for the microphone.

Connecting with your devices (continued)

To use network functions of the projector, connect the LAN port with the computer's LAN port, or with an access point that is connected to the computer with wireless LAN, using a LAN cable. To use NETWORK BRIDGE function, also connect the CONTROL port and an RS-232C port of the external device to communicate as a network terminal. See the User's Manual - Network Guide for details of the network functions.

Access point Computer LAN RS-232C USB TYPE B HDMI COMPUTER IN1COMPUTER IN2 USB TYPE A DC5V 0.5A CONTROL MONITOR OUT MIC AUDIO IN3AUDIO IN2 S-VIDEO AUDIO IN2 VIDEO

⚠️ CAUTION ▶ Before connecting the projector to a network system be sure to obtain the consent of the administrator of the network (📖64).
▶ Do not connect the LAN port to any network that might have the excessive voltage.

NOTE • If an oversized USB storage device blocks the LAN port, use a USB extension cable to connect the USB storage device.

Connecting to a power supply

1. Put the connector of the power cord into the AC IN (AC inlet) of the projector.
2. Firmly plug the power cord's plug into the outlet. In a couple of seconds after the power supply connection, the POWER indicator will light up in steady orange.

Please remember that when the DIRECT POWER ON function activated (53), the connection of the power supply make the projector turn on.

AC IN Power cord

⚠ WARNING ▶ Please use extra caution when connecting the power cord, as incorrect or faulty connections may result in fire and/or electrical shock.

• Only use the power cord that came with the projector. If it is damaged, consult your dealer to get a new one.
• Only plug the power cord into an outlet whose voltage is matched to the power cord. The power outlet should be close to the projector and easily accessible.
  Remove the power cord for complete separation.
• Never modify the power cord.

Using the security bar and slot

A commercial anti-theft chain or wire up to 10 mm in diameter can be attached to the security bar on the projector.

Also this product has the security slot for the Kensington lock.

For details, see the manual of the security tool.

Security slot Security bar re

Anti-theft chain or wire

⚠ WARNING ▶ Do not use the security bar and slot to prevent the projector from falling down, since it is not designed for it.
⚠ CAUTION ▶ Do not place anti-theft chain or wire near the exhaust vents. It may become too hot.

NOTE • The security bar and slot is not comprehensive theft prevention measures. It is intended to be used as supplemental theft prevention measure.

Using the cable cover

Utilize the cable cover as the guard and blind for the connecting parts.

1. Connect the signal cables and the power cord to the projector first.

2. Combine parts as shown in figure, and assemble the cable cover.

Technical diagram showing exploded view of a vehicle chassis with labeled components and structural details

1. Insert the three knobs on the cable cover into the three holes on the projector as shown in the figure. Pass the cables through the holes on the bottom of the cable cover.

1 2 3 knobs 1 3 2

⚠️ CAUTION ▶ Be careful not to pinch the cables in the cable cover, to prevent damage to the cables. ▶ Use the cable cover that is supplied with the projector. Do not attempt any modifications to the cable cover.

Remote control

Installing the batteries

Please insert the batteries into the remote control before using it. If the remote control starts to malfunction, try to replace the batteries. If you will not use the remote control for long period, remove the batteries from the remote control and store them in a safe place.

1. Holding the hook part of the battery cover, remove it.
2. Align and insert the two AA batteries (HITACHI MAXELL, Part No.LR6 or R6P) according to their plus and minus terminals as indicated in the remote control.
3. Replace the battery cover in the direction of the arrow and snap it back into place.

Diagram showing three-step instructions for assembling a device, labeled 1, 2, and 3.

⚠ WARNING ▶ Always handle the batteries with care and use them only as directed. Improper use may result in battery explosion, cracking or leakage, which could result in fire, injury and/or pollution of the surrounding environment.

• Be sure to use only the batteries specified. Do not use batteries of different types at the same time. Do not mix a new battery with used one.
• Make sure the plus and minus terminals are correctly aligned when loading a battery.
• Keep a battery away from children and pets.
• Do not recharge, short circuit, solder or disassemble a battery.
• Do not place a battery in a fire or water. Keep batteries in a dark, cool and dry place.
• If you observe battery leakage, wipe out the leakage and then replace a battery. If the leakage adheres to your body or clothes, rinse well with water immediately.
• Obey the local laws on disposing the battery.

About the remote control signal

The remote control works with the projector's remote sensor. This projector has a remote sensor on the front. The sensor senses the signal within the following range when the sensor is active:

60 degrees (30 degrees to the left and right of the sensor) within 3 meters about.

Remote sensor or) 30° 30° Approx 3 m

NOTE • The remote control signal reflected in the screen or the like may be available. If it is difficult to send the signal to the sensor directly, attempt to make the signal reflect.

• The remote control uses infrared light to send signals to the projector (Class 1 LED), so be sure to use the remote control in an area free from obstacles that could block the remote control's signal to the projector.
• The remote control may not work correctly if strong light (such as direct sun light) or light from an extremely close range (such as from an inverter fluorescent lamp) shines on the remote sensor of the projector. Adjust the position of projector avoiding those lights.

Changing the frequency of remote control signal

The accessory remote control has the two choices on signal frequency Mode 1:NORMAL and Mode 2:HIGH. If the remote control does not function properly, attempt to change the signal frequency. In order to set the Mode, please keep pressing the combination of two buttons listed below simultaneously for about 3 seconds.

(1) Set to Mode 1: NORMAL... VOLUME - and RESET buttons
(2) Set to Mode 2:HIGH... MAGNIFY OFF and ESC buttons

Please remember that the REMOTE FREQ. in the SERVICE item of the OPTION menu (60) of the projector to be controlled should be set to the same mode as the remote control.

(2) (1)

Using as a simple PC mouse & keyboard

The accessory remote control works as a simple mouse and keyboard of the computer, when the projector's USB TYPE B port and the computer's type A USB port are connected and MOUSE is selected for the USB TYPE B item in the OPTION menu (54).

(1) PAGE UP key: Press PAGE UP button.
(2) PAGE DOWN key: Press PAGE DOWN button.
(3) Mouse left button: Press ENTER button.
(4) Move pointer: Use the cursor buttons ▲, ▼, ◀ and ▶.
(5) ESC key: Press ESC button.
(6) Mouse right button: Press RESET button.

⚠ NOTICE ▶ Improper use of the simple mouse & keyboard function could damage your equipment. While using this function, please connect this product only to a computer. Be sure to check your computer's manuals before connecting this product to the computer.

USB TYPE B

USB TYPE B port

E B (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)

NOTE When the simple mouse & keyboard function of this product does not work correctly, please check the following.

• When a USB cable connects this projector with a computer having a built-in pointing device (e.g. track ball) like a laptop PC, open BIOS setup menu, then select the external mouse and disable the built-in pointing device, because the built-in pointing device may have priority to this function.
• Windows 95 OSR 2.1 or higher is required for this function. And also this function may not work depending on the computer's configurations and mouse drivers. This function can work with the computer which can operate general USB mouse or keyboard.
• You cannot do things like press two buttons at once (for instance, pressing two buttons at the same time to move the mouse pointer diagonally).
• This function is activated only when the projector is working properly. This function is not available in any of the following cases:
• While the lamp is warming up. (The POWER indicator blinks in green.)
• When either USB TYPE A or USB TYPE B port is selected.
• While displaying BLANK (27), TEMPLATE (51) or MY IMAGE (67) screen.
• When any menu is displayed on the screen.
• While using the cursor buttons to operate the sound or screen functions such as adjusting the sound volume, correcting the keystone, correcting the picture position and magnifying the screen.

Power on/off

Turning on the power

1. Make sure that the power cord is firmly and correctly connected to the projector and the outlet.
2. Make sure that the POWER indicator is steady orange (98).
3. Confirm that there is nothing that the lens door hits while opening. Press STANDBY/ON button on the projector or the remote control. The lens door opens, the projection lamp lights up, and the POWER indicator begins to blink green. When the power is completely on, the indicator will stop blinking and light in steady green (98).

STANDBY/ON button POWER indicator MENU INPUT STANDBY/ON POWER TEMP LAMP ROUB ROUB ROUB

⚠ WARNING ▶ Never look into the projection lens or mirror while the projection lamp lights, since the projection lamp ray may cause a trouble on your eyes.

▶ Be careful not to pinch your finger with the lens door, to prevent an injury.
▶ Do not place the projector vertically with the lens door open as shown in the figure on the right. It could cause malfunction or injury.
▶ Do not stand under the projector mounted on the wall or ceiling, when its lens door is opening or closing. Moreover, do not look at the mirror when the lens door is opening or closing.
▶ Never touch a lens door or mirror. If the mirror is broken, the projected image will be distorted. Close the lens door, and contact your dealer.

Technical line drawing of a device with no visible text or symbols

Turning off the power

1. Press the STANDBY/ON button on the projector or the remote control. The message "Power off?" will appear on the screen for about 5 seconds.
2. Confirm that there is nothing that the lens door hits while closing. Press the STANDBY/ON button again while the message appears.

The projector lamp will go off, and the POWER indicator will begin blinking in orange. The lens door will close right after the lamp goes off.

However, to maintain better picture quality, the lens door will close after the lamp has been cooled down when the projector is installed upside down such as in ceiling mount installation. Then POWER indicator will stop blinking and light in steady orange when the lamp cooling is complete (98).

Do not turn the projector on for about 10 minutes or more after turning it off. Also, do not turn the projector off shortly after turning it on. Such operations might cause the lamp to malfunction or shorten the lifetime of some parts including the lamp.

⚠ WARNING ▶ Be careful not to pinch your finger with the lens door, to prevent an injury.

▶ Do not touch around the lamp cover and the exhaust vents during use or just after use, since it is too hot.
▶ Remove the power cord for complete separation. The power outlet should be close to the projector and easily accessible.

NOTE • Turn the power on/off in right order. Please power on the projector prior to the connected devices.

- This projector has the function that can make the projector automatically turn on/off. Please refer to the DIRECT POWER ON (53) and AUTO POWER OFF (54) items of the OPTION menu.

Operating

VOLUME +/- button

Adjusting the volume

VIDEO COMPUTER keyboard ASPOST SEABTS BLANK + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + -

1. Use the VOLUME +/VOLUME - buttons to adjust the volume. A dialog will appear on the screen to aid you in adjusting the volume. If you do not do anything, the dialog will automatically disappear after a few seconds.

- When is selected for current picture input port, the volume adjustment is disabled. Please see AUDIO SOURCE item of AUDIO menu (45). - Even if the projector is in the standby mode, the volume is adjustable when both of the following conditions are true:

- An option other than ✗ is selected for STANDBY in the AUDIO SOURCE item of the AUDIO menu (45).

- NORMAL is selected in the STANDBY MODE item of the SETUP menu (44).

- In the standby mode, the volume of the microphone is adjustable with the VOLUME +/- buttons on the remote control, in synchronization with the volume of the projector (12).

Temporarily muting the sound

MUTE button

1 Press MUTE button on the remote control.

A dialog will appear on the screen indicating that you have muted the sound.

To restore the sound, press the MUTE, VOLUME + or VOLUME - button. Even if you do not do anything, the dialog will automatically disappear after a few seconds.

MOBUST VIDEO COMPUTER SEGUAVA ORPECT SEAUTO BLANK ONION ONION DOWN DOWN RESTART ON BUTTON WHITE

- When ✗ is selected for current picture input port, the sound is always muted. Please see AUDIO SOURCE item of AUDIO menu (45).

- C.C. (Closed Caption) is automatically activated when sound is muted and an input signal containing C.C. is received. This function is available only when the signal is NTSC for VIDEO or S-VIDEO, or 480i@60 for COMPUTER IN1 or COMPUTER IN2, and when AUTO is selected for DISPLAY in the C.C. menu under the SCREEN menu (52).

Selecting an input signal

1 Press INPUT button on the projector.

Each time you press the button, the projector switches its input port from the current port as below.

graph TD
    A["COMPUTER IN1"] --> B["COMPUTER IN2"]
    B --> C["LAN"]
    C --> D["USB TYPE A"]
    D --> E["USB TYPE B"]
    E --> F["HDMI"]
    F --> G["S-VIDEO"]
    G --> H["VIDEO"]
    H --> A

INPUT button MENU INPUT STANDBY/ON

- While ON is selected for AUTO SEARCH item in OPTION menu (53), the projector will keep checking the ports in above order repeatedly till an input signal is detected.

- It may take several seconds to project the images from the USB TYPE B port.

Selecting an input signal (continued)

1 Press COMPUTER button on the remote control.

Each time you press the button, the projector switches its input port from the current port as below.

graph LR
    A["COMPUTER IN1"] --> B["COMPUTER IN2"] --> C["LAN"]
    D["USB TYPE B"] <--_E["USB TYPE A"] <--_F["<--"]

• While ON is selected for AUTO SEARCH item in OPTION menu, the projector will keep checking every port sequentially till an input signal is detected (53). If COMPUTER button is pressed when VIDEO, S-VIDEO or HDMI port is selected, the projector will check COMPUTER IN1 port first.
• It may take several seconds to project the images from the USB TYPE B port.

1 Press VIDEO button on the remote control.

Each time you press the button, the projector switches its input port from the current port as below.

- While ON is selected for AUTO SEARCH item in OPTION menu, the projector will keep checking every port sequentially till an input signal is detected (53). If VIDEO button is pressed when COMPUTER IN1, COMPUTER IN2, LAN, USB TYPE A or USB TYPE B port is selected, the projector will check HDMI port first.

1. Press the MY SOURCE / DOC. CAMERA button on the remote control. The input signal will be changed into the signal you set as MY SOURCE (57).

- This function also can use for document camera. Select the input port that connected the document camera.

COMPUTER button

VIDEO COMPUTER PC-CNC ASPECT SEAKETO BLACK MACS 175 180 185 ON ON DOWN KEYSTONE VY BUTTON MFB

VIDEO button

VIDEO ORDER EXTERIOR BLANK ASPECT SEATED OFF ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON On On On On On On On On On On On On On On On On On On On On On On On On On On On On On On On On

MY SOURCE /
DOC. CAMERA button

VIDEO AVOCADO VIDEO ASPECT SEARCH BLANK 100% FROZEN INAGN 200% 100% KEYSTONE MY SWITCH MUTE

Searching an input signal

SEARCH button

1 Press SEARCH button on the remote control.

The projector will start to check its input ports as below in order to find any input signals.

When an input is found, the projector will stop searching and display the image. If no signal is found, the projector will return to the state selected before the operation.

VIDEO COMPUTER METER ARRECT SEANATO BLANK 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100

graph TD
    A["COMPUTER IN1"] --> B["COMPUTER IN2"]
    B --> C["LAN"]
    C --> D["USB TYPE A"]
    D --> E["USB TYPE B"]
    E --> F["HDMI"]
    F --> G["S-VIDEO"]
    G --> H["VIDEO"]
    H --> A

• While ON is selected for AUTO SEARCH item in OPTION menu (53), the projector will keep checking the ports in above order repeatedly till an input signal is detected.
• It may take several seconds to project the images from the USB TYPE B port.

Selecting an aspect ratio

1 Press ASPECT button on the remote control.

Each time you press the button, the projector switches the mode for aspect ratio in turn.

ASPECT button

○ For a computer signal

NORMAL → 4:3 → 16:9 → 16:10 → NATIVE

VEGET BEATTLE BEETLE ASPECT BEATED Blank WHIP-FREESE PANE XLINE DOWN NO-SINK MOBUTTER METH

For an HDMI signal

NORMAL → 4:3 → 16:9 → 16:10 → 14:9 → NATIVE

For a video signal, s-video signal or component video signal

4:3 → 16:9 → 16:10 → 14:9 → NATIVE ↑

For an input signal from the LAN, USB TYPE A or USB TYPE B port, or if there is no signal

4:3 (fixed)

• ASPECT button does not work when no proper signal is inputted.
• NORMAL mode keeps the original aspect ratio setting.
• The on-screen menu might be displayed outside of the image display area depending on the adjustment value of the ASPECT, D-ZOOM, KEYSTONE and KEYSTONE. Changing the values of ASPECT, D-ZOOM,

☐ KEYSTONE and ☑ KEYSTONE may fix the symptom.

Adjusting the projector's elevator

The projector has Front foot for inclinations and Rear foot for horizontals. Spacers on the each elevator foot are installed at the time of shipment, and projector is in a condition to be able to just project. If necessary, detach the spacer, and the elevator feet can be manually twisted to make more precise adjustments.

Front foot Rear foot

2.3~4.3° Front foot Spacer (Large)

Spacer

03-06-07-08-09 Rear foot Spacer (Small) -1~1°

⚠ WARNING ▶ Keep the spacers away from children and pets. Be careful not to let them swallow the spacers. If swallowed consult a physician immediately for emergency treatment.

NOTE • The adjustment angle can be adjusted up to plus or minus 1^ each of FRONT and REAR foot.

• After the foot is adjusted, it is possible to return it to the state of the shipment with a spacer. Install Large on the Front foot and Small on the Rear foot of the spacer. If change the setting place of the projector, it will recommend keep and reuse the spacers.

Adjusting the zoom and focus

Press the D-ZOOM + or D-ZOOM – button on the remote control to display D-ZOOM dialog on screen.

Use the D-ZOOM + and D-ZOOM – buttons to adjust the picture size.

To finish the operation, do not touch these buttons for a few seconds until the dialog is disappeared.

- If you want to expand a part of the image, use the magnify function (26).

D-ZOOM - button VIDEO COMPUTER DECISION ASPECT SLCINFO OFF ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON On On On On On On On On On On On On On On On On On On On On On On On On On On On On On On On On On On On On On On On On On On On On On On On On On On ON

Press the FOCUS + or FOCUS – button on the remote control, or FOCUS + or FOCUS – button on the projector (5) while no menu is on screen, to display the FOCUS box on screen. Use the FOCUS + and FOCUS – buttons to adjust the screen focus. After the focus adjustment, wait for a while until the FOCUS box is disappeared, if you want to display any other menu on screen by pushing the MENU button on the projector.

• The ◀/▶/▲/▼ buttons on the projector work only as the cursor buttons while the template is displayed (51).
• FOCUS +/- button on the projector is invalid when the USB TYPE A port is selected as the input source.

FOCUS - button

VIDEO COMPUTER DC DUSSEL AV EXERCISE ASPECT BEARING BLANK MOUNT FREESE POES SOLVE DOWN POSITION MY SLIKIN MELI COOL COLD POSITION MENT

FOCUS + button

Using the automatic adjustment feature

1. Press AUTO button on the remote control. Pressing this button performs the following.

○ For a computer signal

The vertical position, the horizontal position and the horizontal phase will be automatically adjusted.

Make sure that the application window is set to its maximum size prior to attempting to use this feature. A dark picture may still be incorrectly adjusted. Use a bright picture when adjusting.

AUTO button

VIDEO AMOUNT SHARED WING RED COLDER BLACK FROCKY FULLY INJ2 AUTO ON DOCK 1 2 KEYSTONE - MY BUTTON - MUTE

○ For a video signal and s-video signal

The video format best suited for the respective input signal will be selected automatically. This function is available only when the AUTO is selected for the VIDEO FORMAT item in the INPUT menu (39). The vertical position and horizontal position will be automatically set to the default.

○ For a component video signal

The vertical position and horizontal position will be automatically set to the default. The horizontal phase will be automatically adjusted.

• The automatic adjustment operation requires approx. 10 seconds. Also please note that it may not function correctly with some input.
• When this function is performed for a video signal, a certain extra such as a line may appear outside a picture.
• When this function is performed for a computer signal, a black frame may be displayed on the edge of the screen, depending on the PC model.
• The items adjusted by this function may vary when the FINE or DISABLE is selected for the AUTO ADJUST item of the SERVICE item in the OPTION menu (58).

Adjusting the position

1. Press the POSITION button on the remote control while no menu is on screen, to display the D-SHIFT (42) dialog on screen.

2. Use the ▲, ▼, ◀ and ▶ buttons to adjust the picture position. Press the POSITION button again to finish this operation.

POSTON MENU ENTER ESC RESET

POSITION button

• This is a function to shift the position of the shrunken picture by the D-ZOOM(42) function.
• When an OSD (On Screen Display) menu is displayed, this operation moves the position of the OSD menu, but the picture position is not (29).
• The D-SHIFT adjustment values are not valid when the D-ZOOM is set to 256 (full screen).

Correcting the keystone distortions

1. Press KEYSTONE button on the remote control. A dialog will appear on the screen to aid you in correcting the distortion.
2. Use the ▲/▼ cursor buttons to select MANUAL or PERFECT FIT operation, and press the ▶ button to perform the following.

(1) MANUAL displays a dialog for keystone correction. Use the ▲/▼ buttons to select ☐ KEYSTONE / ☑ KEYSTONE, then use the ◀/▶ buttons for adjustment.

(2) PERFECT FIT displays a dialog for adjusting the shape of the projected image in each of the corners and sides.

To close the dialog and complete this operation, press KEYSTONE button again. Even if you do not do anything, the dialog will automatically disappear after a few seconds.

KEYSTONE button

KYESTONE RETURN EXIT

• The adjustable range of this function will vary among inputs. For some input, this function may not work well.
• This function will be unavailable when Transition Detector is on(74).

Using the magnify feature

1 Press the MAGNIFY ON button on the remote control.

The picture will be magnified, and the MAGNIFY dialog will appear on the screen. When the MAGNIFY ON button is pressed for the first time after the projector is turned on, the picture will be zoomed by 1.5 times. On the dialog, triangle marks to show each direction will be displayed.

2. The display magnification of the projector switches in order with every press of the MAGNIFY button.

MAGNIFY ON/OFF button

VOLD MINIMUM EXCAUSE MINIMUM ASPECTED BLADE DOCKING DOCKING DOCKING DOCKING

For computer signals, HDMI (RGB) signals, input signals from the LAN or USB TYPE B port

1.5 times → 2 times → 3 times → 4 times → 1 time

○ For video signals, s-video signals, component video signals or HDMI™ (Component) signals

1.5 times 2 times 1 time

3. While the triangles are displayed on the dialog, use the ▲/▼/◄/► cursor buttons to shift the magnifying area.

4. Press the MAGNIFY OFF button on the remote control to exit magnification.

• The MAGNIFY dialog will automatically disappear in several seconds with no operation. The dialog will appear again if the MAGNIFY ON button is pressed when the dialog has automatically disappeared.
• The magnification is automatically disabled when the displaying signal or its display condition is changed.
• While the magnification is active, the keystone distortion condition may vary. It will be restored when the magnification is disabled.
• Some horizontal stripes might be visible on the image while magnification is active.

• This function is not available in the following cases:

• The USB TYPE A port is selected as the input source.

• A sync signal in the range not supported is input.
• There is no input signal.

Temporarily freezing the screen

1 Press the FREEZE button on the remote control.

The “FREEZE” indication will appear on the screen (however, the indication will not appear when the OFF is selected for the MESSAGE item in the SCREEN menu (49)), and the projector will go into the FREEZE mode, which the picture is frozen.

To exit the FREEZE mode and restore the screen to normal, press the FREEZE button again.

FREEZE button

VDDQ CAPSBER ASPECT BEARLED BLANK MINTU STRIKE PENSUS VOLK 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90

- The projector automatically exits from the FREEZE mode when some control buttons are pressed.

- If the projector continues projecting a still image for a long time, the LCD panel might possibly be burned in. Do not leave the projector in the FREEZE mode for too long.

- Images might appear degraded when this function is operated, but it is not a malfunction.

Temporarily blanking the screen

1 Press BLANK button on the remote control.

The BLANK screen will be displayed instead of the screen of input signal. Please refer to BLANK item in SCREEN menu (47).

To exit from the BLANK screen and return to the input signal screen, press BLANK button again.

- The projector automatically exits from the BLANK mode when some control buttons are pressed.

BLANK button

VIDEO COMPUTER COMPUTER OFF BEFFECT SEARCH BLANK NOK FA FREEZE PANEER VOLUME OFF DOCK 1 KEystone ON BUTTON MUTE 1 2

⚠️ CAUTION ▶ If you wish to have a blank screen while the projector’s lamp is on, use the BLANK function above.

Taking any other action may cause the damage on the projector.

NOTE • The sound is not connected with the BLANK screen function. If necessary, set the volume or mute first. To display the BLANK screen and mute the sound at one time, use AV MUTE function (57).

Using the menu function

This projector has the following menus:

PICTURE, IMAGE, INPUT, SETUP, AUDIO, SCREEN, OPTION, NETWORK, SECURITY and EASY MENU.

EASY MENU consists of functions often used, and the other menus are classified into each purpose and brought together as the ADVANCED MENU.

Each of these menus is operated using the same methods. While the projector is displaying any menu, the MENU button on the projector works as the cursor buttons. The basic operations of these menus are as follows.

MENU INPUT STANDBY/ON POWER ○ POWER ○ TEMP ○ LAMP ○ MENU button (Cursor buttons)

ENTER button MENU button Cursor buttons POSITION MENU ENTER ESC RESET ESC button RESET button

1. To start the MENU, press the MENU button. The MENU you last used (EASY or ADVANCED) will appear. EASY MENU has priority to appear just after powered on.

2. In the EASY MENU

(1) Use the ▲/▼ cursor buttons to select an item to operate. If you want to change it to the ADVANCED MENU, select the ADVANCED MENU.
(2) Use the ◀/▶ cursor buttons to operate the item.

In the ADVANCED MENU

(1) Use the ▲/▼ cursor buttons to select a menu. If you want to change it to the EASY MENU, select the EASY MENU.

The items in the menu appear on the right side.

(2) Press the ▶ cursor button or ENTER button to move the cursor to the right side. Then use the

▲/▼ cursor buttons to select an item to operate and press the ▶ cursor button or ENTER button to progress. The operation menu or dialog of the selected item will appear.

(3) Use the buttons as instructed in the OSD to operate the item.

EASY MENU ASPECT D-ZOOM KEYSTONE KEYSTONE PERFECT FIT PICTURE MODE ECO MODE MIRROR RESET FILTER TIME LANGUAGE ADVANCED MENU EXIT +NORMAL 25% (100%) +0 +0 EXECUTE NORMAL NORMAL NORMAL EXECUTE ON ENGLISH COMPUTER IN 1 1224 x 768 86Hz

ADANCED MENU PHICTURE MODE INPUT SETUP AUDIO SCREEN OPTION NETWORK SECURITY EASY MENU EXIT BRIGHTNESS CONTRAST CAMMA COLOR TEMP COLOR TNT SHARPNESS ACTIVE IRIS MY MEMORY SELECT +0 +0 DEFAULT 1 HID +0 +0 4 PRESENTATION COMPUTER N 1 1224 x 764 @5GHz

(continued on next page)

Using the menu function (continued)

1. To close the MENU, press the MENU button again or select EXIT and press the ▶ cursor button or ENTER button. Even if you do not do anything, the dialog will automatically disappear after about 30 seconds.

2. If you want to move the menu position, use the cursor buttons after pressing the POSITION button.

3. Some functions cannot be performed when a certain input port is selected, or when a certain input signal is displayed.
4. When you want to reset the operation, press RESET button on the remote control during the operation. Note that some items (ex. LANGUAGE, VOLUME) cannot be reset.
5. In the ADVANCED MENU, when you want to return to the previous display, press the ◀ cursor button or ESC button on the remote control.

Indication in OSD (On Screen Display)

BRIGHTNESS RETURN +0 EXIT

FILTER TIME RESET 1234h CANCEL OK

4 MY MEMORY_LOAD-4 TEMPORARY CONDITION ARE YOU SURE YOU WISH TO LOAD? NO YES

The meanings of the general words on the OSD are as follows.

Indication Meaning
EXIT	Selecting this word finishes the OSD menu. It's the same as pressing the MENU button.
RETURN Selecting this word returns the menu to the previous menu.
CANCEL or NO	Selecting this word cancels the operation in the present menu and returns to the previous menu.
OK or YES	Selecting this word executes the prepared function or shifts the menu to the next menu.

EASY MENU

From the EASY MENU, items shown in the table below can be performed.

Select an item using the ▲/▼ cursor buttons. Then perform it according to the following table.

EASY MENU ASPECT NORMAL D-ZOOM 256 (100%) KEYSTONE +0 KEYSTONE +0 PERFECT FIT EXECUTE PICTURE MODE NORMAL ECO MODE NORMAL MIRROR NORMAL RESET EXECUTE FILTER TIME 0h LANGUAGE ENGLISH ADVANCED MENU COMPUTER IN 1 1024 x 768 @60Hz EXIT

Item Description
ASPECT	Using the ◀/► buttons switches the mode for aspect ratio.See the ASPECT item in IMAGE menu (35).
D-ZOOM	Using the ◀/► cursor buttons adjusts the magnification ratio.Small ⇔ LargeSee the D-ZOOM item in the SETUP menu (42).• The on-screen menu might be displayed outside of the image display area depending on the adjustment value of the ASPECT, D-ZOOM, KEYSTONE and KEYSTONE. Changing the values of ASPECT, D-ZOOM, KEYSTONE and KEYSTONE may fix the symptom.
KEYSTONE	Using the ◀/► buttons corrects the vertical keystone distortion.See the KEYSTONE item in SETUP menu (42).
KEYSTONE	Using the ◀/► buttons corrects the horizontal keystone distortion.See the KEYSTONE item in SETUP Menu (43).
PERFECT FIT	Pressing the ► button displays the dialog for adjusting the shape of the projected image in each of the corners and sides. See the PERFECT FIT item in SETUP menu (43).

(continued on next page)

Item Description
PICTURE MODE	Using the ◀/► buttons switches the picture mode.The picture modes are combinations of GAMMA and COLOR TEMP settings. Choose a suitable mode according to the projected source.
		GAMMA COLOR TEMP
	NORMAL 1 DEFAULT	2 MID
	CINEMA 2 DEFAULT	3 LOW
	DYNAMIC 3 DEFAULT	1 HIGH
	BOARD(BLACK) 4 DE	FAULT 4 Hi-BRIGHT-1
	BOARD(GREEN) 4 DE	FAULT 5 Hi-BRIGHT-2
	WHITEBOARD 5 DE	FAULT 2 MID
	DAYTIME 6 DEFAULT	6 Hi-BRIGHT-3
	When the combination of GAMMA and COLOR TEMP differs from pre-assigned modes above, the display on the menu for the PICTURE MODE is “CUSTOM”. Please refer to the GAMMA and COLOR TEMP (32, 33) items in PICTURE menu.Lines or other noise might appear on the screen when this function is operated, but it is not a malfunction.
ECO MODE	Using the ◀/► buttons changes the eco mode setting.See the ECO MODE item in SETUP menu (44).
MIRROR	Using the ◀/► buttons switches the mode for mirror status.See the MIRROR item in SETUP menu (44).
RESET	Performing this item resets all of the EASY MENU items except the FILTER TIME and LANGUAGE.A dialog is displayed for confirmation. Selecting the OK using the ▶ button performs resetting.
FILTER TIME	The usage time of the air filter is shown in the menu.Performing this item resets the filter time which counts usage time of the air filter.A dialog is displayed for confirmation. Selecting the OK using the ▶ button performs resetting.See the FILTER TIME item in OPTION menu (55).
LANGUAGE	Using the ◀/► buttons changes the display language.See the LANGUAGE item in SCREEN menu (47).
ADVANCED MENU	Press the ► or ENTER button to use the menu of PICTURE, IMAGE, INPUT, SETUP, AUDIO, SCREEN, OPTION, NETWORK or SECURITY.
EXIT	Press the ◀ or ENTER button to finish the OSD menu.

PICTURE menu

From the PICTURE menu, items shown in the table below can be performed.

Select an item using the ▲/▼ cursor buttons, and press the ▶ cursor button or ENTER button to execute the item. Then perform it according to the following table.

ADANCED MENU PICTURE IMAGE INPUT SETUP AUDIO SCREEN OPTION NETWORK SECURITY EASY MENU EXIT BRIGHTNESS CONTRAST GAMMA COLOR TEMP COLOR TINT SHARNESS ACTIVE IRIS MY MEMORY +0 +0 DEFAULT-1 MD +0 +0 4 PRESENTATION COMPUTER IN 1 1024 x 768 @60Hz

Item Description
BRIGHTNESS	Using the ◀/► buttons adjusts the brightness. Dark ⇔ Light
CONTRAST	Using the ◀/► buttons adjusts the contrast. Weak ⇔ Strong
GAMMA	Using the ▲/▼ buttons switches the gamma mode. 1 DEFAULT ⇔ 1 CUSTOM ⇔ 2 DEFAULT ⇔ 2 CUSTOM ⇔ 3 DEFAULT6 CUSTOM 3 CUSTOM6 DEFAULT ⇔ 5 CUSTOM ⇔ 5 DEFAULT ⇔ 4 CUSTOM ⇔ 4 DEFAULTTo adjust CUSTOMSelecting a mode whose name includes CUSTOM and then pressing the ► button or the ENTER button displays a dialog to aid you in adjusting the mode. This function is useful when you want to change the brightness of particular tones.Choose an item using the ◀/► buttons, and adjust the level using the ▲/▼ buttons.You can display a test pattern for checking the effect of your adjustment by pressing the ENTER button. Each time you press the ENTER button, the pattern changes as below.No pattern ⇒ Gray scale of 9 steps [IMAGE]The eight equalizing bars correspond to eight tone levels of the test pattern (Gray scale of 9 steps) except the darkest in the left end. If you want to adjust the 2nd tone from left end on the test pattern, use the equalizing adjustment bar “1”. The darkest tone at the left end of the test pattern cannot be controlled with any of equalizing adjustment bar.• Lines or other noise might appear on the screen when this function is operated, but it is not a malfunction.

(continued on next page)

Item Description
COLOR TEMP	Using the ▲/▼ buttons switches the color temperature mode.1 HIGH ⇔ 1 CUSTOM ⇔ 2 MID ⇔ 2 CUSTOM6 CUSTOM 3 LOW6 Hi-BRIGHT-3 3 CUSTOM5 CUSTOM ⇔ 5 Hi-BRIGHT-2 ⇔ 4 CUSTOM ⇔ 4 Hi-BRIGHT-1To adjust CUSTOMSelecting a mode whose name includes CUSTOM and then pressing the ▶ button or the ENTER button displays a dialog to aid you in adjusting the OFFSET and GAIN of the selected mode.OFFSET adjustments change the color intensity on the whole tones of the test pattern.GAIN adjustments mainly affect color intensity on the brighter tones of the test pattern.Choose an item using the ◀/► buttons, and adjust the level using the ▲/▼ buttons.You can display a test pattern for checking the effect of your adjustment by pressing the ENTER button.Each time you press the ENTER button, the pattern changes as below.No pattern ⇒ Gray scale of 9 steps [IMAGE]Ramp ⇔ Gray scale of 15 steps• Lines or other noise might appear on the screen when this function is operated, but it is not a malfunction.
COLOR	Using the ◀/► buttons adjusts the strength of whole color.Weak ⇔ Strong• This item can be selected only for a video, s-video and component video signal.• For an HDMITM signal, this item can also be selected if either (1) or (2) applies.(1) HDMI FORMAT item in the INPUT menu is set to VIDEO.(2) HDMI FORMAT item in the INPUT menu is set to AUTO, and the projector recognizes that it receives video signals.
TINT	Using the ◀/► buttons adjusts the tint.Reddish ⇔ Greenish• This item can be selected only for a video, s-video and component video signal.• For an HDMITM signal, this item can also be selected if either (1) or (2) applies.(1) HDMI FORMAT item in the INPUT menu is set to VIDEO.(2) HDMI FORMAT item in the INPUT menu is set to AUTO, and the projector recognizes that it receives video signals.
Item Description
SHARPNESS	Using the ◀/► buttons adjusts the sharpness.Weak ⇔ StrongThere may be some noise and/or the screen may flicker for a moment when an adjustment is made. This is not a malfunction.
ACTIVE IRIS	Using the ▲/▼ cursor buttons changes the active iris control mode.PRESENTATION ⇔ THEATER ⇔ OFFPRESENTATION: The active iris displays the best presentation image for both bright and dark scenes.THEATER: The active iris displays the best theater image for both bright and dark scenes.OFF: The active iris is always open.The screen may flicker when the PRESENTATION or THEATER modes are selected. If this occurs select OFF.
MY MEMORY	This projector has 4 memories for adjustment data (for all the items of the PICTURE menu).Selecting a function using the ▲/▼ buttons and pressing the ► or ENTER button performs each function.SAVE-1, SAVE-2, SAVE-3, SAVE-4Performing a SAVE function saves the current adjustment data into the memory linked in the number included in the function's name.Remember that the current data being stored of a memory will be lost by saving new data into the memory.LOAD-1, LOAD-2, LOAD-3, LOAD-4Performing a LOAD function loads the data from the memory linked in the number included in the function's name, and adjusts the picture automatically depending on the data.The LOAD functions whose linked memory has no data are skipped.Remember that the current adjusted condition will be lost by loading data. If you want to keep the current adjustment, please save it before performing a LOAD function.There may be some noise and the screen may flicker for a moment when loading data. This is not malfunction.You can perform the LOAD function using MY BUTTON. Please see MY BUTTON item in OPTION menu (56).

IMAGE menu

From the IMAGE menu, items shown in the table below can be performed.

Select an item using the ▲/▼ cursor buttons, and press the ▶ cursor button or ENTER button to execute the item. Then perform it according to the following table.

ADANCED MENU PICTURE IMAGE INPUT SETUP AUDIO SCREEN OPTION NETWORK SECURITY EASY MENU EXIT ASPECT NORMAL OVER SCAN 5 V POSITION 35 H POSITION 294 H PHASE 2 H SIZE 1344 AUTO ADJUST EXECUTE COMPUTER IN 1 1024 x 768 @50Hz

Item Description
ASPECT	Using the ▲/▼ buttons switches the mode for aspect ratio.For a computer signalNORMAL ⇔ 4:3 ⇔ 16:9 ⇔ 16:10 ⇔ NATIVEFor an HDMITM signalNORMAL ⇔ 4:3 ⇔ 16:9 ⇔ 16:10 ⇔ 14:9 ⇔ NATIVEFor a video signal, s-video signal or component video signal4:3 ⇔ 16:9 ⇔ 16:10 ⇔ 14:9 ⇔ NATIVEFor an input signal from the LAN, USB TYPE A or USB TYPE B port, or if there is no signal4:3 (fixed)The NORMAL mode keeps the original aspect ratio of the signal.
OVER SCAN	Using the ◀/► buttons adjusts the over-scan ratio.Small (It magnifies picture) ⇔ Large (It reduces picture)This item can be selected only for a video, s-video and component video signal.For an HDMITM signal, this item can also be selected if either (1) or (2) applies.(1) HDMI FORMAT item in the INPUT menu is set to VIDEO.(2) HDMI FORMAT item in the INPUT menu is set to AUTO, and the projector recognizes that it receives video signals.

(continued on next page)

Item Description
V POSITION	Using the ◀/► buttons adjusts the vertical position. Down ⇔ UpOver-adjusting the vertical position may cause noise to appear on the screen. If this occurs, please reset the vertical position to the default setting. Pressing the RESET button when the V POSITION is selected will reset the V POSITION to the default setting.When this function is performed on a video signal or an s-video signal, the range of this adjustment depends on OVER SCAN (35) setting. It is not possible to adjust when OVER SCAN is set to 10.This function is unavailable for a signal from the LAN, USB TYPE A, USB TYPE B or HDMI port.
H POSITION	Using the ◀/► buttons adjusts the horizontal position.Right ⇔ LeftOver-adjusting the horizontal position may cause noise to appear on the screen. If this occurs, please reset the horizontal position to the default setting. Pressing the RESET button when the H POSITION is selected will reset the H POSITION to the default setting.When this function is performed on a video signal or an s-video signal, the range of this adjustment depends on OVER SCAN (35) setting. It is not possible to adjust when OVER SCAN is set to 10.This function is unavailable for a signal from the LAN, USB TYPE A, USB TYPE B or HDMI port.

(continued on next page)

Item Description
H PHASE	Using the ◀/► buttons adjusts the horizontal phase to eliminate flicker.Right ⇔ LeftThis item can be selected only for a computer signal or a component video signal. This function is unavailable for a signal from the LAN, USB TYPE A, USB TYPE B or HDMI port.
H SIZE	Using the ◀/► buttons adjusts the horizontal size.Small ⇔ LargeThis item can be selected only for a computer signal. This function is unavailable for a signal from the LAN, USB TYPE A, USB TYPE B or HDMI port.When this adjustment is excessive, the picture may not be displayed correctly. In such a case, please reset the adjustment by pressing the RESET button on the remote control during this operation.Images might appear degraded when this function is operated, but it is not a malfunction.
AUTO ADJUST EXECUTE	Selecting this item performs the automatic adjustment feature.For a computer signalThe vertical position, the horizontal position and the horizontal phase will be automatically adjusted.Make sure that the application window is set to its maximum size prior to attempting to use this feature. A dark picture may still be incorrectly adjusted. Use a bright picture when adjusting.For a video signal and s-video signalThe video format best suited for the respective input signal will be selected automatically. This function is available only when the AUTO is selected for the VIDEO FORMAT item in the INPUT menu (39). The vertical position and horizontal position will be automatically set to the default.For a component video signalThe vertical position and horizontal position will be automatically set to the default. The horizontal phase will be automatically adjusted.The automatic adjustment operation requires approx. 10 seconds. Also please note that it may not function correctly with some input.When this function is performed for a video signal, a certain extra such as a line may appear outside a picture.When this function is performed for a computer signal, a black frame may be displayed on the edge of the screen, depending on the PC model.The items adjusted by this function may vary when the FINE or DISABLE is selected for the AUTO ADJUST item of the SERVICE item in the OPTION menu (58).

INPUT menu

From the INPUT menu, items shown in the table below can be performed.

Select an item using the ▲/▼ cursor buttons, and press the ▶ cursor button or ENTER button to execute the item. Then perform it according to the following table.

ADANCED MENU PICTURE IMAGE INPUT SETUP AUDIO SCREEN OPTION NETWORK SECURITY EASY MENU EXIT PROGRESSIVE TV VIDEO NR MID COLOR SPACE AUTO VIDEO FORMAT HDMI FORMAT AUTO HDMI RANGE AUTO COMPUTER IN FRAME LOCK RESOLUTION COMPUTER IN 1 1024 x 768 @60Hz

Item Description
PROGRESSIVE	Using the ▲/▼ buttons switches the progress mode.TV ⇔ FILM ⇔ OFFThis function works only for a video signal, s-video signal, component video signal (of 480i@60 or 576i@50 or 1080i@50/60) and an HDMITMSignal (of 480i@60 or 576i@50 or 1080i@50/60).When TV or FILM is selected, the screen image will be sharp. FILM adapts to the 2-3 Pull-Down conversion system. But these may cause a certain defect (for example, jagged line) of the picture for a quick moving object. In such a case, please select OFF, even though the screen image may lose sharpness.
VIDEO NR	Using the ▲/▼ buttons switches the noise reduction mode.HIGH ⇔ MID ⇔ LOWThis function works only for a video signal, s-video signal, component video signal (of 480i@60 or 576i@50 or 1080i@50/60) and an HDMITMSignal (of 480i@60 or 576i@50 or 1080i@50/60).
COLOR SPACE	Using the ▲/▼ buttons switches the mode for color space.AUTO ⇔ RGB ⇔ SMPTE240 ⇔ REC709 ⇔ REC601This item can be selected only for a computer signal (except for signals from the LAN, USB TYPE A and USB TYPE B ports) or a component video signal.The AUTO mode automatically selects the optimum mode.The AUTO operation may not work well at some signals. In such a case, it might be good to select a suitable mode except AUTO.

(continued on next page)

Item Description
VIDEO FORMAT	The video format for S-VIDEO port and VIDEO port can be set.(1) Use the ▲/▼ buttons to select the input port.(2) Using the ◀/► buttons switches the mode for video format.AUTO ⇔ NTSC ⇔ PAL ⇔ SECAMN-PAL ⇔ M-PAL ⇔ NTSC4.43This item is performed only for a video signal from the VIDEO port or the S-VIDEO port.The AUTO mode automatically selects the optimum mode.The AUTO operation may not work well for some signals. If the picture becomes unstable (e.g. an irregular picture, lack of color), please select the mode according to the input signal.
HDMI FORMAT	Using the ▲/▼ cursor buttons switches the video format for an input from the HDMI port.AUTO ⇔ VIDEO ⇔ COMPUTERFeatureAUTO automatically sets the optimum mode.VIDEO sets the suitable mode for DVD signals.COMPUTER sets the suitable mode for computer signals.When the COMPUTER is selected, the functions COLOR (PICTURE menu), TINT (PICTURE menu) and OVER SCAN (IMAGE menu) are unavailable.
HDMI RANGE	Using the ▲/▼ cursor buttons changes the digital range for input from the HDMI port.AUTO ⇔ NORMAL ⇔ ENHANCEDFeatureAUTO automatically sets the optimum mode.NORMAL s ets the suitable mode for DVD signals. (16-235)ENHANCEDsets the suitable mode for computer signals. (0-255)If the contrast of the screen image is too strong or too weak, try finding a more suitable mode.

(continued on next page)

Item Description
COMPUTER IN	The computer input signal type for COMPUTER IN1 and IN2 ports can be set.(1) Use the ▲/▼ buttons to select the COMPUTER IN port to be set.(2) Use the ◀/► buttons to select the computer input signal type. AUTO ⇔ SYNC ON G OFF Selecting the AUTO mode allows you to input a sync on G signal or component video signal from the port. Please refer to “Technical” for the connection of component video input to COMPUTER IN1/2 port.In the AUTO mode, the picture may be distorted with certain input signals. In such a case, remove the signal connector so that no signal is received and select the SYNC ON G OFF, and then reconnect the signal.
FRAME LOCK	Set the frame lock function on/off for each port.(1) Use the ▲/▼ buttons to select the input ports.(2) Use the ◀/► buttons to turn the frame lock function on/off.ON ⇔ OFFThis item can be performed only on a signal with a vertical frequency of 49 to 51Hz, 59 to 61 Hz.When ON is selected, moving pictures are displayed more smoothly.

(continued on next page)

Item Description

The resolution for the COMPUTER IN1 and COMPUTER IN2 input signals can be set on this projector.(1) In the INPUT menu select the RESOLUTION using the ▲/▼ buttons and press the ▶ button.The RESOLUTION menu will be displayed.(2) In the RESOLUTION menu select the resolution you wish to display using the ▲/▼ buttons.Selecting AUTO will set a resolution appropriate to the input signal.(3) Pressing the ▶ or ENTER button when selecting a STANDARD resolution will automatically adjust the horizontal and vertical positions, clock phase and horizontal size.The INPUT_INFORMATION dialog will be displayed.(4) To set a custom resolution use the ▲/▼ buttons to select the CUSTOM and the RESOLUTION_CUSTOM box will be displayed.Set the horizontal (HORZ) and vertical (VERT) resolutions using the ▲/▼/◀/▶ buttons.This function may not support all resolutions.(5) Move the cursor to OK on screen and press the ▶ or ENTER button. The message "ARE YOU SURE YOU WISH TO CHANGE RESOLUTION?" appears. To save the setting, press the ▶ button.The horizontal and vertical positions, clock phase and horizontal size will be automatically adjusted.The INPUT_INFORMATION dialog will be displayed.(6) To revert back to the previous resolution without saving changes, move the cursor to CANCEL on screen and press the ◀ or ENTER button.The screen will then return to the RESOLUTION menu displaying the previous resolution.• For some pictures, this function may not work well.

RESOLUTION

SETUP menu

From the SETUP menu, items shown in the table below can be performed.

Select an item using the ▲/▼ cursor buttons, and press the ▶ cursor button or ENTER button to execute the item. Then perform it according to the following table.

ADVANCED MENU PICTURE IMAGE INPUT SETUP AUDIO SCREEN OPTION NETWORK SECURITY EASY MENU EXIT D-200M 256 (100%) D-SHIFT PICTURE POSITION MID KEystone +O KEystone +O PERFECT FIT EXECUTE AUTO ECO MODE OFF ECO MODE NORMAL MIRROR NORMAL STANDBY MODE NORMAL MONITOR OUT COMPUTER IN 1 1024 x 768 @60Hz

Item Description
D-ZOOM	Using the ◀/► cursor buttons adjusts the magnification ratio. Small ⇔ Large• The on-screen menu might be displayed outside of the image display area depending on the adjustment value of the ASPECT, D-ZOOM, ☑ KEYSTONE and ☑ KEYSTONE. Changing the values of ASPECT, D-ZOOM, ☑ KEYSTONE and ☑ KEYSTONE may fix the symptom.
D-SHIFT	Using the ◀/►/▲/▼ cursor buttons adjusts the picture position.• The D-SHIFT adjustment values are not valid when the D-ZOOM is set to 256 (full screen).
PICTURE POSITION	Using the ▲/▼ cursor buttons selects the vertical picture position. TOP ⇔ MID ⇔ BOTTOMThe PICTURE POSITION is not changed if any of the following cases apply.• The ASPECT is set to 4:3.• The input signal has an aspect ratio of 4:3 or vertically larger than 4:3, while the ASPECT is set to NORMAL.• Vertical size of the displayed image is full on the effective display area, while the ASPECT is set to NATIVE.• One of the following messages is displayed on the screen:"NO INPUT IS DETECTED" "SYNC IS OUT OF RANGE" "INVALID SCAN FREQ."• The BLANK or TEMPLATE function is selected.
(AATCH) KEYSTONE	Using the ◀/► buttons corrects the vertical keystone distortion. Shrink the bottom of the image ⇔ Shrink the top of the image• The adjustable range of this function will vary among inputs. For some input, this function may not work well.• This function will be unavailable when the Transition Detector is on (74) or the PERFECT FIT (43) is adjusted.

(continued on next page)

Item Description
KEYSTONE	Using the ◀/▶ buttons corrects the horizontal keystone distortion. Shrink the right of the image ⇔ Shrink the left of the image• The adjustable range of this function will vary among inputs. For some input, this function may not work well.• This function will be unavailable when the Transition Detector is on (74) or the PERFECT FIT (43) is adjusted.
PERFECT FIT	This item allows you to adjust the shape of the projected image in each of the corners and sides.(1) Choose a corner or side to adjust using the ▲/▼/◀/▶ buttons and press the ENTER or INPUT button.(2) Adjust the distortion as below. Use the ▲/▼/◀/▶ buttons to adjust the position of the corner. Use the ▲/▼ buttons to adjust the distortion of the top or bottom side, after defining the adjusting position with the ◀/▶ buttons.Use the ◀/▶ buttons to adjust the distortion of the left or right side, after defining the adjusting position with the ▲/▼ buttons.(3) To adjust another corner or side, follow the same procedure from (1) above. To reset the adjustment of all the corners and sides, select RESET with the ▲/▼ buttons and press the ENTER or INPUT button.• While the distortion is adjusted with the PERFECT FIT function, keystone adjustment feature is unavailable. To correct the keystone distortion, reset the adjustment of all the corners and sides.• The adjustable range of this correction will vary among inputs. For some input, this function may not work well.• One adjustment position common to the top and bottom sides can be set. Also, another adjustment position common to the left and right sides can be set.• The distortion of the top and bottom sides can be adjusted only in the same direction, pincushion or barrel. The adjustment for the left and right sides is carried out in the same manner.• This function will be unavailable when the Transition Detector is on (74).
AUTO ECO MODE	Using the ▲/▼ buttons turns on/off the AUTO ECO MODE.ON ⇔ OFF• When ON is selected, the projector will always be set to Eco mode at start-up regardless of the ECO MODE (44) setting. An OSD message “AUTO ECO MODE” will be displayed for tens of seconds when the projector starts with this function activated.

(continued on next page)

Item Description
ECO MODE	Using the ▲/▼ buttons changes the eco mode setting.BRIGHT ⇔ NORMALWhen the NORMAL is selected, acoustic noise and screen brightness are reduced.When AUTO ECO MODE (43) is set to ON, the projector will always be set to Eco mode at start-up regardless this setting.
MIRROR	Using the ▲/▼ buttons switches the mode for mirror status. NORMAL ⇔ H:INVERT ⇔ V:INVERT ⇔ H&V:INVERTIf the Transition Detector is on and MIRROR status is changed, TRANSITION DETECTOR ON alarm (74) will be displayed when projector is restarted after the AC power is turned off.
STANDBY MODE	Using ▲/▼ buttons switches the standby mode setting between NORMAL and SAVING.NORMAL ⇔ SAVINGWhen SAVING is selected, the power consumption in the standby mode is lowered with some functional restriction as below:When SAVING is selected, the RS-232C communication control except to turn the projector on and the network function are disabled while the projector is in the standby mode. If the COMMUNICATION TYPE in the COMMUNICATION menu is set to NETWORK BRIDGE, all of the RS-232C commands are disabled (61).When SAVING is selected, STANDBY setting of AUDIO SOURCE (45) is invalid, and no signal is output from AUDIO OUT port in the standby mode.When SAVING is selected, STANDBY setting of MONITOR OUT is invalid, and no signal is output from MONITOR OUT port in the standby mode.
MONITOR OUT	While the image signal from the input port chosen in step (1) is projected, the image signal from the input port selected in step (2) is output to MONITOR OUT port.(1) Choose a picture input port using ▲/▼ buttons.Choose STANDBY to select the picture output in the standby mode.(2) Select one of the COMPUTER IN ports using ◀/► buttons.Select OFF to disable the MONITOR OUT port for the input port or standby mode chosen in the step (1).You cannot select COMPUTER IN1 in step (1) and COMPUTER IN2 in step (2) and vice versa.

AUDIO menu

From the AUDIO menu, items shown in the table below can be performed. Select an item using the ▲/▼ cursor buttons, and press the ▶ cursor button or the ENTER button to execute the item. Then perform it according to the following table.

ADVANCED MENU PICTURE IMAGE INPUT SETUP AUDIO SCREEN OPTION NETWORK SECURITY EASY MENU EXIT VOLUME 24 SPEAKER ON AUDIO SOURCE HDMI AUDIO 1 MIC LEVEL HIGH MIC VOLUME 0 COMPUTER IN 1 1024 x 768 @60Hz SELECT

Item Description
VOLUME	Using the ◀/► buttons adjusts the volume.Low ⇔ High
SPEAKER	Using the ▲/▼ buttons turns on/off the built-in speaker.ON ⇔ OFFWhen OFF is selected, the built-in speaker does not work.
AUDIO SOURCE	While the image signal from the input port chosen in step (1) is projected, the audio signal from the input port selected in step (2) is output to both the AUDIO OUT port and built-in speaker of this projector. However, the built-in speaker does not work when SPEAKER is set to OFF.(1) Choose a picture input port using the ▲/▼ buttons.Choose STANDBY to select the sound output in the standby mode.(2) Select one of the AUDIO IN ports using ◀/► buttons.Select ✗ to mute the sound from the input port or in the standby mode chosen in the step (1).In the AUDIO SOURCE window, “H” symbolizes the audio signal from the HDMI port. It can be selected only for the picture input from the HDMI port.Even if the projector is in the standby mode, cooling fans may work and make noises when the built-in speaker is in operation.C.C. (Closed Caption) is automatically activated when ✗ is selected and an input signal containing C.C. is received. This function is available only when the signal is NTSC for VIDEO or S-VIDEO, or 480i@60 for COMPUTER IN1 or COMPUTER IN2, and when AUTO is selected for DISPLAY in the C.C. menu under the SCREEN menu(52).

(continued on next page)

Item Description
HDMI AUDIO	Using the ▲/▼ buttons switches the mode for the HDMITM audio.Check each of the two modes provided and select the suitable one for your HDMITM audio device.1 ⇔ 2
MIC LEVEL	Using the ▲/▼ buttons switches the input level to match that of the microphone connected to the MIC port.HIGH ⇔ LOWHIGH: for a microphone with an amplifier.LOW: for a microphone without an amplifier.
MIC VOLUME	Using the ◀/► buttons adjusts the volume of the microphone connected to the MIC port.Low ⇔ High

SCREEN menu

From the SCREEN menu, items shown in the table below can be performed.

Select an item using the ▲/▼ cursor buttons, and press the ▶ cursor button or ENTER button to execute the item. Then perform it according to the following table.

ADVANCED MENU PICTURE IMAGE INPUT SETUP AUDIO SCREEN OPTION NETWORK SECURITY EASY MENU EXIT LANGUAGE ENGLISH MENU POSITION BLANK BLACK START UP ORIGINAL MyScreen EXECUTE MyScreen Lock OFF MESSAGE ON SOURCE NAME TEMPLATE TEST PATTERN C.C. COMPUTER IN 1 1024 x 768 @50Hz

Item Description
LANGUAGE	Using the ▲/▼/◄/► buttons switches the OSD (On Screen Display) language.ENGLISH ⇔ FRANÇAIS ⇔ DEUTSCH ⇔ ESPAÑOL↑ ...... (shown in the LANGUAGE dialog) ...... ↑Press the ENTER or INPUT button to save the language setting.
MENU POSITION	Using the ▲/▼/◄/► buttons adjusts the menu position.To quit the operation, press the MENU button on the remote control or keep no operation for about 10 seconds.
BLANK	Using the ▲/▼ buttons switches the mode for the blank screen.The blank screen is a screen for the temporarily blanking feature(27). It is displayed by pressing the BLANK button on the remote control.MyScreen ⇔ ORIGINAL ⇔ BLUE ⇔ WHITE ⇔ BLACK↑MyScreen: Screen can be registered by the MyScreen item (48).ORIGINAL: Screen preset as the standard screen.BLUE, WHITE, BLACK: Plain screens in each color.• To avoid remaining as an afterimage, the MyScreen or ORIGINAL screen will change to the plain black screen after several minutes.
START UP	Using the ▲/▼ buttons switches the mode for the start-up screen.The start-up screen is a screen displayed when no signal or an unsuitable signal is detected.MyScreen ⇔ ORIGINAL ⇔ OFF↑MyScreen: Screen can be registered by the MyScreen item (48).ORIGINAL: Screen preset as the standard screen.OFF: Plain black screen.• To avoid remaining as an afterimage, the MyScreen or ORIGINAL screen will change to the BLANK screen (above) after several minutes. If also the BLANK screen is the MyScreen or ORIGINAL, the plain black screen is instead used.• When the ON is selected to the MyScreen PASSWORD item in the SECURITY menu (72), the START UP is fixed to MyScreen.

(continued on next page)

Item Description

MyScreen

This item allows you to capture an image for use as a MyScreen image which can be used as the BLANK screen and START UP screen. Display the image you want to capture before executing the following procedure.Selecting this item displays a dialog titled "MyScreen". It will ask you if you start capturing an image from the current screen.Please wait for the target image to be displayed, and press the ENTER or INPUT button when the image is displayed. The image will freeze and the frame for capturing will appear.To stop performing, press the RESET button on the remote control.Using the ▲/▼/◄/► buttons adjusts the frame position.Please move the frame to the position of the image which you want to use. The frame may not be able to be moved for some input signals.To start registration, press the ENTER or INPUT button on the remote control.To restore the screen and return to the previous dialog, press the RESET button on the remote control.Registration may take several minutes.When the registration is completed, the registered screen and the following message is displayed for several seconds: "MyScreen registration is finished."If the registration failed, the following message is displayed: "A capturing error has occurred. Please try again."This function cannot be selected when the ON is selected to the MyScreen Lock item (49).This function cannot be selected when the ON is selected to the MyScreen PASSWORD item in SECURITY menu (72).This function is unavailable for a signal from the LAN, USB TYPE A, USB TYPE B or HDMI port.

(continued on next page)

Item Description
MyScreen Lock	Using the ▲/▼ buttons turns on/off the MyScreen lock function.ON ⇔ OFFWhen the ON is selected, the item MyScreen is locked. Use this function for protecting the current MyScreen.• This function cannot be selected when the ON is selected to the MyScreen PASSWORD item in SECURITY menu (72).
MESSAGE	Using the ▲/▼ buttons turns on/off the message function.ON ⇔ OFFWhen the ON is selected, the following message function works.“AUTO IN PROGRESS” while automatically adjusting“NO INPUT IS DETECTED”“SYNC IS OUT OF RANGE”“INVALID SCAN FREQ.”“Searching....” while searching for the input“Detecting....” while an input signal is detected“AUTO ECO MODE” while starting up with AUTO ECO MODEThe indication of the input signal displayed by changingThe indication of the aspect ratio displayed by changingThe indication of the PICTURE MODE displayed by changingThe indication of the ACTIVE IRIS displayed by changingThe indication of the MY MEMORY displayed by changingThe indication of “FREEZE” and “II” while freezing the screen by pressing the FREEZE button.The indication of the TEMPLATE displayed by changing.The indication of “+++ FOCUS +++” displayed by changingThe D-ZOOM dialog displayed by changing• When the OFF is selected, please remember if the picture is frozen. Do not mistake freezing for a malfunction (27).

(continued on next page)

Item Description
SOURCE NAME	Each input port for this projector can have a name applied to it.(1) Use the ▲/▼ buttons on the SCREEN menu to select SOURCE NAME and press the ▶ or ENTER button.The SOURCE NAME menu will be displayed.(2) Use the ▲/▼ buttons on the SOURCE NAME menu to select the port to be named and press the ▶ button. The SOURCE NAME dialog will be displayed.Right side of the menu is blank until a name is specified.
	(3) Select an icon you would like to assign to the port in the SOURCE NAME dialog.The name assigned to the port will also be automatically switched according to your icon selection. Press the ENTER or INPUT button to determine your icon selection.(4) Select a number you would like to assign to the port along with the icon. You can select the number either from blank (no number assigned), 1, 2, 3, or 4. Then press the ENTER or INPUT button.(5) If you would like to modify the name assigned to the port, select CUSTOM NAME and press the ENTER or INPUT button.

(continued on next page)

Item Description
SOURCE NAME(Continued)	(6) The current name will be displayed on the first line. Use the ▲/▼/◄/► buttons and the ENTER or INPUT button to select and enter characters. To erase 1 character at one time, press the RESET button or press the ◀ and INPUT button at the same time. Also if you move the cursor to DELETE or ALL CLEAR on screen and press the ENTER or INPUT button, 1 character or all characters will be erased. The name can be a maximum of 16 characters.(7) To change an already inserted character, press the ▲ button to move the cursor to the first line, and use the ◀/► buttons to move the cursor on the character to be changed.After pressing the ENTER or INPUT button, the character is selected. Then, follow the same procedure as described at the item (6) above.(8) To finish entering text, move the cursor to the OK on screen and press the ►, ENTER or INPUT button. To revert to the previous name without saving changes, move the cursor to the CANCEL on screen and press the ◀, ENTER or INPUT button.
TEMPLATE	Using the ▲/▼ cursor buttons switches the mode for the template screen.Press the ► cursor (or the ENTER) button to display the selected template, and press the ◀ cursor button to close the displayed screen.The last selected template is displayed when the MY BUTTON allocated to the TEMPLATE function is pressed (57).TEST PATTERN ⇔ DOT-LINE1 ⇔ DOT-LINE2 ⇔ DOT-LINE3↔ ↗ ↗MAP2 ⇔ MAP1 ⇔ CIRCLE2 ⇔ CIRCLE1 ⇔ DOT-LINE4You can turn a map upside down and scroll it horizontally when MAP1 or MAP2 is selected. To invert or scroll the map, display the guidance by pressing the RESET button on the remote three seconds or more when MAP1 or MAP2 appears.

(continued on next page)

Item Description
C.C.(Closed Caption)	The C.C. is the function that displays a transcript or dialog of the audio portion of a video, files or other presentation or other relevant sounds. It is required to have NTSC format video or 480i@60 format component video source supporting C.C. feature to utilize this function.It may not work properly, depending on equipment or signal source.In this case, please turn off the Closed Caption.
	DISPLAYSelect Closed Caption DISPLAY setting from following options using ▲/▼ buttons.AUTO ⇔ ON ⇔ OFFAUTO: Closed Caption automatically displays when the volume is muted.ON: Closed Caption is on.OFF: Closed Caption is off.The caption is not displayed when the OSD menu is active.The Closed Caption is the function to display the dialogue, narration, and / or sound effects of a television program or other video sources. The Closed Caption availability is depending upon broadcaster and/or content.
	MODESelect Closed Caption MODE setting from following options using ▲/▼ buttons.CAPTIONS ⇔ TEXTCAPTIONS: Display Closed Caption.TEXT: Display Text data, which is for additional information such as news reports or a TV program guide. The information covers the entire screen. Not all of the C.C. program has Text information.
	CHANNELSelect Closed Caption CHANNEL from following options using ▲/▼ buttons.1 ⇔ 2 ⇔ 3 ⇔ 41: Channel 1, primary channel / language2: Channel 23: Channel 34: Channel 4The channel data may vary, depending on the content. Some channel might be used for secondary language or empty.

OPTION menu

From the OPTION menu, items shown in the table below can be performed.

Select an item using the ▲/▼ cursor buttons, and press the ▶ cursor button or ENTER button to execute the item, except for the items LAMP TIME and FILTER TIME. Then perform it according to the following table.

ADVANCED MENU PICTURE IMAGE INPUT SETUP AUDIO SCREEN OPTION NETWORK SECURITY EASY MENU EXIT AUTO SEARCH OFF DIRECT POWER ON OFF AUTO POWER OFF Dmin USB TYPE B USB DISPLAY LAMP TIME Oh FILTER TIME Oh MY BUTTON MY SOURCE VIDEO SERVICE COMPUTER IN 1 1024 x 768 @60Hz

Item Description
AUTO SEARCH	Using the ▲/▼ buttons turns on/off the automatic signal search function.ON ⇔ OFFWhen the ON is selected, detecting no signal automatically cycles through input ports in the following order. The search is started from the current port. Then when an input is found, the projector will stop searching and display the image.→ COMPUTER IN1 ⇒ COMPUTER IN2 ⇒ LAN ⇒ USB TYPE AVIDEO ⇔ S-VIDEO ⇔ HDMI ⇔ USB TYPE B←• It may take several seconds to project the images from the USB TYPE B port.
DIRECT POWER ON	Using the ▲/▼ buttons turns on/off the DIRECT POWER ON function.ON ⇔ OFFWhen set to the ON, the lamp in projector will be automatically turned on without the usual procedure (18), only when the projector is supplied with the power after the power was cut while the lamp was on.• This function does not work as long as the power has been supplied to the projector while the lamp is off.• After turning the lamp on by the DIRECT POWER ON function, if neither input nor operation is detected for about 30 minutes, the projector is turned off, even though the AUTO POWER OFF function (54) is disabled.

(continued on next page)

Item Description
AUTO POWER OFF	Using the ▲/▼ buttons adjusts the time to count down to automatically turn the projector off.Long (max. 99 minutes) ⇔ Short (min. 0 minute = DISABLE) When the time is set to 0, the projector is not turned off automatically.When the time is set to 1 to 99, and when the passed time with no-signal or an unsuitable signal reaches at the set time, the projector lamp will be turned off.If one of the projector's buttons or the remote control buttons is pressed or one of the commands (except get commands) is transmitted to theCONTROL port during the corresponding time, projector will not be turned off.Please refer to the section “Turning off the power” (19).
USB TYPE B	Using the ▲/▼ buttons selects the function of USB TYPE B port.To use this function, you need to connect the USB TYPE B port of the projector and the type A USB port of a computer.MOUSE ⇔ USB DISPLAYMOUSE: The accessory remote control works as the simple mouse and keyboard of the computer.USB DISPLAY: The port works as an input port that receives image signals from the computer (86).It may take several seconds to project the images from the USB TYPE B port.In the following cases, a message to notify you that USB TYPE B port is not available for picture input appears together with the USB TYPE B dialog:- This setting is switched to MOUSE while a picture input from the USB TYPE B port is projected.- The USB TYPE B port is selected as the picture input source while this setting is set to MOUSE. Select USB DISPLAY in the dialog to project the picture input to the USB TYPE B port. In this case, you cannot use the simple mouse and keyboard function. Otherwise select other port for picture input.

(continued on next page)

Item Description
LAMP TIME	The lamp time is the usage time of the lamp, counted after the last resetting. It is shown in the OPTION menu.Pressing the RESET button on the remote control or the ▶ button of the projector displays a dialog.To reset the lamp time, select the OK using the ▶ button.CANCEL ⇒ OKPlease reset the lamp time only when you have replaced the lamp, for a suitable indication about the lamp.For the lamp replacement, see the section "Replacing the lamp" (89).
FILTER TIME	The filter time is the usage time of the air filter, counted after the last resetting. It is shown in the OPTION menu.Pressing the RESET button on the remote control or the ▶ button of the projector displays a dialog.To reset the filter time, select the OK using the ▶ button.CANCEL ⇒ OKPlease reset the filter time only when you have cleaned or replaced the air filter, for a suitable indication about the air filter.For the air filter cleaning, see the section “Cleaning and replacing the air filter” (91, 92).

(continued on next page)

Item Description

MY BUTTON

This item is to assign one of the following functions to MY BUTTON 1/2 on the remote control (6).(1) Use the ▲/▼ buttons on the MY BUTTON menu to select a MY BUTTON - (1/2) and press the ▶ or ENTER button to display the MY BUTTON setup dialog.(2) Then using the ▲/▼/◄/► buttons sets one of the following functions to the chosen button. Press the ENTER or INPUT button to save the setting.LAN: Selects input from LAN port.USB TYPE A: Selects input from USB TYPE A port.USB TYPE B: Selects input from USB TYPE B port.HDMI: Selects input from HDMI port.COMPUTER IN1: Selects the input from COMPUTER IN1 port.COMPUTER IN2: Selects the input from COMPUTER IN2 port.S-VIDEO: Selects the input from S-VIDEO port.VIDEO: Selects the input from VIDEO port.SLIDESHOW: Selects the input from USB TYPE A port, and starts a Slideshow.MY IMAGE: Displays the MY IMAGE menu (67).MESSENGER: Turns the messenger text displayed on the screen on/off (Messenger Function in the User's Manual - Network Guide).When there is no transferred text data to display, the message "NO MESSENGER DATA" appears.INFORMATION: Displays SYSTEM_INFORMATION, INPUT_INFORMATION (63), NETWORK_INFORMATION (70) or nothing.MY MEMORY: Loads one of adjustment data stored (34).When more than one data are saved, the adjustment changes every time the MY BUTTON is pressed.When no data is saved in memory, the dialog "No saved data" appears.When the current adjustment is not saved to memory, the dialog as shown in the right appears.If you want to keep the current adjustment, please press the ► button to exit. Otherwise loading a data will overwrite the current adjusted condition.

(continued on next page)

Item Description
MY BUTTON(Continued)	ACTIVE IRIS: Changes the active iris mode.PICTURE MODE: Changes the PICTURE MODE (31).FILTER RESET: Displays the filter time reset confirmation dialogue (55).TEMPLATE: Makes the template pattern selected to the TEMPLATE item (51) appear or disappear.AV MUTE: Turns the picture and audio on/off.D-ZOOM: Turns the D-ZOOM mode on/off. When the D-ZOOM mode is on, use the ◀/► cursor buttons to adjust the magnification ratio.D-SHIFT: Turns the D-SHIFT mode on/off. When the D-SHIFT mode is on, use the ▲/▼/◄/► cursor buttons to move the magnifying area.RESOLUTION: Turns on/off the RESOLUTION dialog (41).MIC VOLUME: Turns on/off the MIC VOLUME dialog (46).ECO MODE: Turns on/off the ECO MODE dialog (44).
MY SOURCE	Using ▲/▼ buttons selects the picture input port to be selected with pressing the MY SOURCE/DOC.CAMERA button on the remote control.You can use this function not only for document cameras but also computers and other equipment.COMPUTER IN1 ⇔ COMPUTER IN2 ⇔ LAN ⇔ USB TYPE AVIDEO ⇔ S-VIDEO ⇔ HDMI ⇔ USB TYPE B

(continued on next page)

Item Description
SERVICE	Selecting this item displays the SERVICE menu.Select an item using the ▲/▼ buttons, and press the ► button or the ENTER button on the remote control to execute the item.
	FAN SPEEDUsing the ▲/▼ buttons switches the rotation speed of the cooling fans. If the projector is used at an altitude of about 1600 m or higher, select HIGH. Otherwise, select NORMAL. Note that the projector is noisier when the HIGH is selected.HIGH ⇔ NORMAL
	AUTO ADJUSTUsing the ▲/▼ buttons to select one of the mode. When the DISABLE is selected, the automatic adjustment feature is disabled.FINE ⇔ FAST ⇔ DISABLEFINE: Finer tuning including H.SIZE adjustment.FAST: Faster tuning, setting H.SIZE to prearranged data for the input signal.· Depending on conditions, such as input image, signal cable to the projector, environment around the projector, etc., the automatic adjustment may not work correctly. In such a case, please choose DISABLE to disable the automatic adjustment, and make adjustment manually.
	GHOST1. Select a color element of ghost using the ◀/► buttons.2. Adjust the selected element using the ▲/▼ buttons to disappear ghost.
	FILTER MESSAGEUse the ▲/▼ button to set the timer for notifying by the message when to replace the filter unit500h ⇔ 1000h ⇔ 2000h ⇔ 3000h ⇔ 4000h ⇔ 5000h ⇔ OFFAfter choosing an item except OFF, the message “REMINDER *** HRS PASSED ...” will appear after the timer reaches the interval time set by this feature (97).When the OFF is chosen, the message will not appear. Utilize this feature to keep the air filter clean, setting the suitable time according to your environment of this projector.· Please take care of the filter unit periodically, even if there is no message. If the air filter becomes to be blocked by dust or other matter, the internal temperature will rise, which could cause malfunction, or reduce the lifetime of the projector.· Please be careful with the operating environment of the projector and the condition of the filter unit.
Item Description
SERVICE(continued)	KEY LOCK(1) Use the ▲/▼ buttons to select CONTROL PANEL or REMOTE CONTROL.(2) Use the ◀/► buttons to turn the key lock function on/off.When ON is selected, all buttons on the projector or remote control except the STANDBY/ON button are locked.Please use this function to prevent tampering or accidental operation.It is not possible to set both CONTROL PANEL and REMOTE CONTROL to ON.
	LENS DOOR LOCKUse the ▲/▼ cursor buttons to turn on/off the LENS DOOR LOCK function. Set LENS DOOR LOCK to ON to keep the lens door open even when power is turned off. Follow cautions below when you set LENS DOOR LOCK to ON and keep the lens door open all the time.Do not apply excessive force on or allow impact to the lens door, as it incorporates a mirror.Keep the projector out of the reach of children.Never touch a lens door or mirror. If the mirror is broken, the projected image will be distorted. Close the lens door, and contact your dealer.When the LENS DOOR LOCK is set to ON and the lens door is not open completely for some reason, the image may shift or have keystone distortion. In that case use the LENS DOOR OPEN function (below) to open the lens door completely.
	LENS DOOR OPENUse the LENS DOOR OPEN function to open the lens door if not open completely for some reason such as cleaning.
	LENS DOOR CLOSEUse the LENS DOOR CLOSE function to temporarily close the lens door when LENS DOOR LOCK is set to ON. Note that the lamp will be turned off when the lens door is closed. Press the STANDBY/ON button on the projector or the remote control to open the lens door and start the projector again.

(continued on next page)

Item Description
SERVICE(continued)	REMOTE FREQ.(1) Use the ▲/▼ button to change the projector's remote sensor frequency setting (4, 17).1:NORMAL ⇔ 2:HIGH (2) Use the ◀/► button to change the projector's remote sensor on or off.ON ⇔ OFFThe factory default setting is for both 1:NORMAL and 2:HIGH to be on. If the remote control does not function correctly, disable either of them.It's not possible to disable both options at the same time.
	COMMUNICATION	Selecting this item displays COMMUNICATION menu.In this menu, you can configure the serial communication settings of the projector using the CONTROL port.· Select an item using the cursor buttons ▲/▼. Then pressing the ► button opens the submenu for the setting item you selected. Or, pressing the ◀ button instead of the ► button makes the menu back to the previous one without changing the setup. Each submenu can be operated as described above.· When COMMUNICATION TYPE (61) is set to OFF, the other items in COMMUNICATION menu are invalid.· For the function of serial communication, refer to the User's Manual - Network Guide.

(continued on next page)

Item Description
SERVICE(continued)	COMMUNICATION(continued)	COMMUNICATION TYPESelect the communication type for transmission via theCONTROL port.NETWORK BRIDGE ⇔ OFFNETWORK BRIDGE: Select this type, if it is required to control an external device as a network terminal, via this projector from the computer.TheCONTROL port doesn't accept RS-232C commands (Network Bridge Function in the User's Manual - Network Guide)OFF: Select this mode to receive RS-232C commands using theCONTROL port.· OFF is selected as the default setting.· When you select the NETWORK BRIDGE, check the item, TRANSMISSTION METHOD (below).
		SERIAL SETTINGSSelect the serial communication condition for the CONTROL port.BAUD RATE4800bps ⇌ 9600bps ⇌ 19200bps ⇌ 38400bpsPARITYNONE ⇌ ODD ⇌ EVENThe BAUD RATE is fixed to 19200bps and PARITY is fixed NONE when the COMMUNICATION TYPE is set to OFF (above).
		TRANSMISSION METHODSelect the transmission method for communication by the NETWORK BRIDGE from theCONTROL port.HALF-DUPLEX ⇌ FULL-DUPLEXHALF-DUPLEX: This method lets the projector make two way communication, but only one direction, either transmitting or receiving data, is allowed at a time.FULL-DUPLEX: This method lets the projector make two way communication, transmitting and receiving data at the same time.HALF-DUPLEX is selected as the default setting.· If you select HALF-DUPLEX, check the setting of the item RESPONSE LIMIT TIME (62).

(continued on next page)

Item Description
SERVICE(continued)	COMMUNICATION(continued)	RESPONSE LIMIT TIMESelect the time period to wait for receiving response data from other device communicating by the NETWORK BRIDGE and the HALF-DUPLEX through theCONTROL port.OFF ⇔ 1s ⇔ 2s ⇔ 3sOFF: Select this mode if it is not required to check the responses from the device that the projector sends data to. In this mode, the projector can send out data from the computer continuously.1s /2s /3s: Select the time period to keep the projector waiting for response from the device that the projector sends data to. While waiting the response, the projector does not send out any data from theCONTROL port.This menu is available only when the NETWORK BRIDGE is selected for the COMMUNICATION TYPE and the HALF-DUPLEX is selected for the TRANSMISSION METHOD (61).OFF is selected as the default setting.

(continued on next page)

Item Description
SERVICE(continued)	INFORMATIONSelecting this item displays a dialog titled “INPUT_INFORMATION”. It shows the information about the current input. The “FRAME LOCK” message on the dialog means the frame lock function is working.This item can't be selected for no signal and sync out.When the MY TEXT DISPLAY is set to ON, the MY TEXT is displayed together with the input information in the INPUT_INFORMATION box (76).
	FACTORY RESETSelecting OK using the ▶ button performs this function. By this function, all the items in all of menus will collectively return to the initial setting. Note that the items LAMP TIME, FILTER TIME, LANGUAGE, FILTER MESSAGE, NETWORK and SECURITY settings are not reset.CANCEL ⇒ OK

NETWORK menu

Remember that incorrect network settings on this projector may cause trouble on the network. Be sure to consult with your network administrator before connecting to an existing access point on your network. Select "NETWORK" from the main menu to access the following functions.

ADVANCED MENU PICTURE IMAGE INPUT SETUP AUDIO SCREEN OPTION NETWORK SECURITY EASY MENU EXIT SETUP PROJECTOR NAME MY IMAGE AMX D.D. OFF PRESENTATION INFORMATION SERVICE COMPUTER IN 1 1024 x 768 @50Hz

Select an item using the ▲/▼ cursor buttons on the projector or remote control, and press the ▶ cursor button on the projector or remote control, or ENTER button on the remote control to execute the item. Then perform it according to the following table.

See the User's Manual - Network Guide for details of NETWORK operation.

NOTE • If you are not utilizing SNTP (Date/Time Settings in the User's Manual - Network Guide), then you must set the DATE AND TIME during the initial installation.

- The network communication control is disabled while the projector is in standby mode if the STANDBY MODE item of SETUP menu is set to SAVING. Please connect the network communication to the projector after setting the STANDBY MODE to NORMAL (44).

Item Description
SETUP	Selecting this item displays the SETUP Menu for the network.Use the ▲/▼ buttons to select an item, and the ▶ or ENTER button on the remote control to perform the item.
	DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol)	Use the ▲/▼ buttons to turn DHCP on/off.ON ⇔ OFFSelect OFF when the network does not have DHCP enabled.When the “DHCP” setting changes to “ON”, it takes a little time to obtain IP address from DHCP server.Auto IP function will be assigned an IP address if the projector could not obtain an IP address from server even if DHCP is “ON”.

(continued on next page)

Item Description	IP ADDRESS	Use the ▲/▼/◄/► buttons to enter the IP ADDRESS.This function can only be used when DHCP is set to OFF.The IP ADDRESS is the number that identifies this projector on the network. You cannot have two devices with the same IP ADDRESS on the same network.The IP ADDRESS “0.0.0.0” is prohibited.
SETUP(continued)	SUBNET MASK	Use the ▲/▼/◄/► buttons to enter the same SUBNET MASK used by your computer.This function can only be used when DHCP is set to OFF.The SUBNET MASK “0.0.0.0” is prohibited.
	DEFAULT GATEWAY	Use the ▲/▼/◄/► buttons to enter the DEFAULT GATEWAY (a node on a computer network that serves as an access point to another network) address.This function can only be used when DHCP is set to OFF.
	DNS SERVER	Use the ▲/▼/◄/► buttons to input the DNS server address.The DNS server is a system to control domain names and IP addresses on the Network.
	TIME DIFFERENCE	Use the ▲/▼ buttons to enter the TIME DIFFERENCE.Set the same TIME DIFFERENCE as the one set on your computer. If unsure, consult your IT manager.Use the ► button to return to the menu after setting the TIME DIFFERENCE.
	DATE AND TIME	Use the ▲/▼/◄/► buttons to enter the Year (last two digits), Month, Date, Hour and Minute.The projector will override this setting and retrieve DATE AND TIME information from the Time server when SNTP is enabled. (Date/Time Settings in the User's Manual - Network Guide)

(continued on next page)

Item Description
PROJECTOR NAME	(1) Use the ▲/▼ buttons on the NETWORK menu to select the PROJECTOR NAME and press the ▶ button. The PROJECTOR NAME dialog will be displayed.(2) The current PROJECTOR NAME will be displayed on the first 3 lines. Particular projector name is pre-assigned by default.Use the ▲/▼/◄/► buttons and the ENTER or INPUT button to select and enter characters.To erase 1 character at one time, press the RESET button or press the ◀ and INPUT button at the same time. Also if you move the cursor to DELETE or ALL CLEAR on screen and push the ENTER or INPUT button, 1 character or all characters will be erased.The PROJECTOR NAME can be input up to 64 characters.(3) To change an already inserted character, press the ▲/▼ button to move the cursor to one of the first 3 lines, and use the ◀/► buttons to move the cursor on the character to be changed. After pressing the ENTER or INPUT button, the character is selected.Then, follow the same procedure as described at the item (2) above.(4) To finish entering text, move the cursor to the OK on screen and press the ▶, ENTER or INPUT button. To revert to the previous PROJECTOR NAME without saving changes, move the cursor to the CANCEL on screen and press the ◀, ENTER or INPUT button.

(continued on next page)

Item Description
MY IMAGE	Selecting this item displays the MY IMAGE menu.To store images in the projector, the application software PJImg/ProjectorImage Tool that can be downloaded from our website is required.Use the ▲/▼ buttons to select an item which is a still image by the MY IMAGE (My Image Function in the User's manual - Network Guide) and the ▶ or ENTER button to display the image.The item without image stored cannot be selected.The image names are each displayed in 16 characters or less.To switch the image displayedUse the ▲/▼ buttons.To return to the menuPress the ◀ button on the remote control.To erase the image displayed and its source file in the projector.(1) Press the RESET button on the remote control while displaying an image to display the MY IMAGE DELETE menu.(2) Press the ▶ button to perform to erase.To stop erasing, press the ◀ button.
AMX D.D.(AMX Device Discovery)	Use the ▲/▼ buttons to turn the AMX Device Discovery on/off.ON ⇔ OFFWhen ON is selected, the projector can be detected by controllers of AMX connected to the same network. For the details of AMX Device Discovery, visit the AMX web site.URL: http://www.amx.com/ (as of Dec.2009)

(continued on next page)

Item Description
PRESENTATION	Selecting this item displays the PRESENTATION menu.Use ▲/▼ buttons to select one of the following items, then press ▶or ENTER button to use the function.
	QUIT PRESENTER MODE	If you set a computer to the Presenter mode while its image is projected, the projector is occupied by the computer and access from any other computer is blocked.Use this function to quit the Presenter mode and allow other computers to access the projector.Select this item to display a dialog.Press ▶ button to choose OK in the dialog.The Presenter mode is cancelled and a message is displayed indicating the result.To make Presenter mode setting, use “LiveViewer”. For details, see the section Presenter mode in the User's Manual – Network Guide.
	MULTI PC MODE	If you set one or more computers to the Multi PC mode on “LiveViewer” and send their images to the projector, you can select the display mode on the projector from two options below.- Single PC mode: displays the image of the selected computer on full screen.- Multi PC mode: displays the images sent from up to four computers on screen that is divided into quarter sections.Select this item to display a dialog.Use the dialog to change the display mode as explained below.

(continued on next page)

Item Description
PRESENTATION(continued)	MULTI PC MODE(continued)	• To change from Multi PC mode to Single PC mode, select one of computers in the dialog using the ▲/▼/◄/► buttons and press the ENTER or INPUT button.Press the ► button to choose OK, and then press ENTER or INPUT again. The image for the selected computer is displayed on full screen.• To change from Single PC mode to Multi PC mode, press ► button to choose OK in the dialog and press the ENTER or INPUT button.The display mode is changed.• For details on how to switch the display mode to Multi PC mode on your computer, see the section Switching the display mode in the User's Manual – Network Guide.• The Presenter mode setting of the selected computer becomes valid when the display mode is changed to Single PC mode.Also, the Presenter mode setting becomes invalid when the display mode is changed to Multi PC mode, regardless the setting on the computers.For details, see the section Presenter mode in the User's Manual – Network Guide.
	DISPLAY USER NAME	Selecting this item displays the user name. This function helps you identify from which computer the current image is sent.• You can set user names for each computer on “LiveViwer”.For details, see the section Display User Name in the User's Manual – Network Guide.

(continued on next page)

Item Description
INFORMATION	Selecting this item displays the NETWORK_INFORMATION dialog for confirming the network settings.For the details of PASSCODE, see the section Selecting the network connection method in the User's manual – Network Guide.Only the first 16 characters of the projector name are displayed.When the voltage level of the battery for the built in clock decreases, the set time may become incorrect even though accurate date and time are input. Replace the battery suitably (93).IP ADDRESS, SUBNET MASK and DEFAULT GATEWAY indicate “0.0.0.0” when DHCP is ON and the projector has not gotten address from DHCP server.
SERVICE	Executing this item restarts and initializes the network functions.Choose the RESTART EXECUTE using the button ▶.Then use the button ▶ to execute.Network will be once cut off when choose restart.If DHCP is selected on, IP address may be changed.After selecting RESTART EXECUTE, NETWORK menu may not be controlled approx. 30 seconds.

SECURITY menu

This projector is equipped with security functions. From the SECURITY menu, items shown in the table below can be performed.

To use SECURITY menu: User registration is required before using the security functions.

ADVANCED MENU PICTURE IMAGE INPUT SETUP AUDIO SCREEN OPTION NETWORK SECURITY EASY MENU EXIT ENTER PASSWORD COMPUTER IN 1024 x 768 @SOHz

Enter to the SECURITY menu

1. Press the ▶ button. The ENTER PASSWORD box will be displayed.

2. Use the ▲/▼/◄/► buttons to enter the registered password. The factory default password is 6015. This password can be changed (below). Move the cursor to the right side of the ENTER PASSWORD box and press the ► button to display the SECURITY menu.

3. It is strongly recommended the factory default password to be changed as soon as possible.

4. If an incorrect password is input, the ENTER PASSWORD box will be displayed again. If incorrect password is input 3 times, the projector will turn off. Afterwards the projector will turn off every time an incorrect password is input.

5. Items shown in the table below can be performed.

SECURITY SECURITY PASSWORD CHANGE MyScreen PASSWORD OFF PIN LOCK OFF TRANSITION DETECTOR OFF MY TEXT PASSWORD OFF MY TEXT DISPLAY OFF MY TEXT WRITING RETURN

If you have forgotten your password

(1). While the ENTER PASSWORD box is displayed, press and hold the RESET button on the remote control for about 3 seconds or press and hold the INPUT button for 3 seconds while pressing the ▶ button on the projector.
(2). The 10 digit Inquiring Code will be displayed. Contact your dealer with the 10 digit Inquiring Code. Your password will be sent after your user registration information is confirmed.

- If there is no key input for about 55 seconds while the Inquiring Code is displayed, the menu will close. If necessary, repeat the process from (1).

Item Description
	(1) Use the ▲/▼ buttons on the SECURITY menu to select SECURITY PASSWORD CHANGE and press the ▶ button to display the ENTER NEW PASSWORD box.(2) Use the ▲/▼/◄/► buttons to enter the new password.(3) Move the cursor to the right side of the ENTER NEW PASSWORD box and press the ► button to display the NEW PASSWORD AGAIN box, enter the same password again.(4) Move the cursor to the right side of the NEW PASSWORD AGAIN box and press the ► button and the NOTE NEW PASSWORD box will be displayed for about 30 seconds, please make note of the password during this time.Pressing the ENTER button on the remote control or ► button on the projector will close the NOTE NEW PASSWORD box.· Please do not forget your password.

(continued on next page)

Item Description

MyScreen PASSWORD

The MyScreen PASSWORD function can be used to prohibit access to the MyScreen function and prevent the currently registered MyScreen image from being overwritten.1 Turning on the MyScreen PASSWORD1-1 Use the ▲/▼ buttons on the SECURITY menu to select MyScreen PASSWORD and press the ▶button to display the MyScreen PASSWORD on/off menu.1-2 Use the ▲/▼ buttons on the MyScreen PASSWORD on/off menu to select ON.The ENTER NEW PASSWORD box (small) will be displayed.1-3 Use the ▲/▼/◄/► buttons to enter the password. Move the cursor to the right side of the ENTER NEW PASSWORD box (small) and press the ► button to display the NEW PASSWORD AGAIN box, enter the same PASSWORD again.1-4 Move the cursor to the right side of the NEW PASSWORD AGAIN box and press the ► button to display the NOTE NEW PASSWORD box for about 30 seconds, please make note of the password during this time.Pressing the ENTER button on the remote control or ► button on the projector will return to MyScreen PASSWORD on/off menu.When a password is set for MyScreen:· The MyScreen registration function (and menu) will be unavailable.· The MyScreen Lock menu will be unavailable.· The START UP setting will be locked on MyScreen (and the menu will be unavailable).Turning the MyScreen PASSWORD off will allow normal operation of these functions.· Please do not forget your MyScreen PASSWORD.2 Turning off the MyScreen PASSWORD2-1 Follow the procedure in 1-1 to display the MyScreen PASSWORD on/off menu.2-2 Select OFF to display the ENTER PASSWORD box (large). Enter the registered password and the screen will return to the MyScreen PASSWORD on/off menu.If an incorrect PASSWORD is input, the menu will close. If necessary, repeat the process from 2-1.3 If you have forgotten your password3-1 Follow the procedure in 1-1 to display the MyScreen PASSWORD on/off menu.3-2 Select OFF to display the ENTER PASSWORD box (large). The 10 digit Inquiring Code will be displayed inside the box.3-3 Contact your dealer with the 10 digit Inquiring Code. Your password will be sent after your user registration information is confirmed.

(continued on next page)

Item Description

PIN LOCK

PIN LOCK is a function which prevents the projector from being used unless a registered Code is input.1 Turning on the PIN LOCK1-1 Use the ▲/▼ buttons on the SECURITY menu to select PIN LOCK and press the ▶ button or the ENTER button to display the PIN LOCK on/off menu.1-2 Use the ▲/▼ buttons on the PIN LOCK on/off menu to select ON and the Enter PIN Code box will be displayed.1-3 Input a 4 part PIN code using the ▲/▼/◄/►, COMPUTER or INPUT button.The PIN Code again box will appear. Reenter the same PIN code. This will complete the PIN code registration.If there is no key input for about 55 seconds while the Enter PIN Code box or the PIN Code again box is displayed, the menu will close. If necessary, repeat the process from 1-1.Afterwards, anytime the projector is restarted after AC power is turned off the Enter PIN Code box will be displayed. Enter the registered PIN code. The projector can be used after entering the registered PIN code. If an incorrect PIN code is input, the Enter PIN code box will be displayed again. If an incorrect PIN code is input 3 times, the projector will turn off. Afterwards the projector will turn off every time an incorrect PIN code is input. The projector will also turn off if there is no key input for about 5 minutes while the Enter PIN code box is displayed.This function will activate only when the projector is started after AC power is turned off.Please do not forget your PIN code.Turning off the PIN LOCK2-1 Follow the procedure in 1-1 to display the PIN LOCK on/off menu.2-2 Use the ▲/▼ buttons to select OFF and the Enter PIN Code box will be displayed.Enter the registered PIN code to turn the PIN LOCK function off.If an incorrect PIN code is input 3 times, the projector will turn off.3 If you have forgotten your PIN code3-1 While the Enter PIN code box is displayed, press and hold the RESET button for 3 seconds or press and hold the INPUT button for 3 seconds while pressing the ▶ button on the projector.The 10 digit Inquiring Code will be displayed.If there is no key input for about 5 minutes while the Inquiring Code is displayed, the projector will turn off.3-2 Contact your dealer with the 10 digit Inquiring Code. Your PIN code will be sent after your user registration information is confirmed.

(continued on next page)

Item Description

TRANSITION DETECTOR

If this function is set to ON when the vertical angle of the projector or MIRROR setting at which the projector is turned on is different than the previously recorded, the TRANSITION DETECTOR ON alarm will be displayed and the projector will not display the input signal.·To display the signal again, set this function OFF.·After about 5 minutes of displaying the TRANSITION DETECTOR ON alarm, the lamp will turn off.·Keystone adjustment feature has been prohibited as long as the Transition Detector function is on.1 Turning on the TRANSITION DETECTOR1-1 Use the ▲/▼ buttons on the SECURITY menu to select TRANSITION DETECTOR and press the ▶ or the ENTER button to display the TRANSITION DETECTOR on/off menu.1-2 Use the ▲/▼ buttons on the TRANSITION DETECTOR on/off menu to select ON. Select ON and the current angle and MIRROR setting will be recorded. The ENTER NEW PASSWORD box (small) will be displayed.1-3 Use the ▲/▼/◄/► buttons to enter a password. Move the cursor to the right side of the ENTER NEW PASSWORD box (small) and press the ► button to display the NEW PASSWORD AGAIN box, enter the same password again.1-4 Move the cursor to the right side of the NEW PASSWORD AGAIN box and press the ► button to display the NOTE NEW PASSWORD box for about 30 seconds, please make note of the password during this time.Pressing the ENTER button on the remote control or the ► button on the projector will return to the TRANSITION DETECTOR on/off menu.·Please do not forget your TRANSITION DETECTOR password.·This function will activate only when the projector is started after turning off the AC power.·This feature may not function properly if the projector is not in a stable position when ON is selected.2 Turning off the TRANSITION DETECTOR2-1 Follow the procedure in 1-1 to display the TRANSITION DETECTOR on/off menu.2-2 Select OFF to display the ENTER PASSWORD box (large). Enter the registered password and the screen will return to the TRANSITION DETECTOR on/off menu.If an incorrect password is input, the menu will close. If necessary, repeat the process from 2-1.3 If you have forgotten your password3-1 Follow the procedure in 1-1 to display the TRANSITION DETECTOR on/off menu.3-2 Select OFF to display the ENTER PASSWORD box (large). The 10 digit Inquiring Code will be displayed inside the box.3-3 Contact your dealer with the 10 digit Inquiring Code. Your password will be sent after your user registration information is confirmed.

[IMAGE]

Item Description

MY TEXT PASSWORD

The MY TEXT PASSWORD function can prevent the MY TEXT from being overwritten. When the password is set for the MY TEXT;• The MY TEXT DISPLAY menu will be unavailable, which can prohibit changing the DISPLAY setting.• The MY TEXT WRITING menu will be unavailable, which can prevent the MY TEXT from being overwritten.1 Turning on the MY TEXT PASSWORD1-1 Use the ▲/▼ buttons on the SECURITY menu to select the MY TEXT PASSWORD and press the ► button to display the MY TEXT PASSWORD on/off menu. 1-2 Use the ▲/▼ buttons on the MY TEXT PASSWORD on/off menu to select ON. The ENTER NEW PASSWORD box (small) will be displayed. 1-3 Use the ▲/▼/◄/► buttons to enter the password. Move the cursor to the right side of the ENTER NEW PASSWORD box (small) and press the ► button to display the NEW PASSWORD AGAIN box, and then enter the same password again. 1-4 Move the cursor to the right side of the NEW PASSWORD AGAIN box and press ► button to display the NOTE NEW PASSWORD box for about 30 seconds, then please make note of the password during this time. Pressing the ENTER button on the remote control or ► button on the projector will return to the MY TEXT PASSWORD on/off menu.2 Turning off the MY TEXT PASSWORD2-1 Follow the procedure in 1-1 to display the MY TEXT PASSWORD on/off menu.2-2 Select OFF to display the ENTER PASSWORD box (large). Enter the registered password and the screen will return to the MY TEXT PASSWORD on/off menu. ENTER PASSWORD box (large)If an incorrect password is input, the menu will close. If necessary, repeat the process from 2-13 If you have forgotten your password3-1 Follow the procedure in 1-1 to display the MY TEXT PASSWORD on/off menu.3-2 Select OFF to display the ENTER PASSWORD box (large). The 10 digit inquiring code will be displayed inside the box.3-3 Contact your dealer with the 10 digit inquiring code. Your password will be sent after your user registration information is confirmed.

(continued on next page)

Item Description
MY TEXT DISPLAY	(1) Use the ▲/▼ buttons on the SECURITY menu to select the MY TEXT DISPLAY and press the ▶ or ENTER button to display the MY TEXT DISPLAY on/off menu. (2) Use the ▲/▼ buttons on the MY TEXT DISPLAY on/off menu to select on or off.ON ⇔ OFFWhen it is set ON, the MY TEXT will be displayed on the START UP screen and the INPUT_INFORMATION when the INFORMATION on the SERVICE menu is chosen.· This function is available only when the MY TEXT PASSWORD function is set to the OFF.
MY TEXT WRITING	(1) Use the ▲/▼ buttons on the SECURITY menu to select the MY TEXT WRITING and press the ▶ button. The MY TEXT WRITING dialog will be displayed.(2) The current MY TEXT will be displayed on the first 3 lines. If not yet written, the lines will be blank.Use the ▲/▼/◄/► buttons and the ENTER or INPUT button to select and enter characters. To erase 1 character at one time, press the RESET button or press the ◀ and INPUT button at the same time. Also if you move the cursor to DELETE or ALL CLEAR on screen and press the ENTER or INPUT button, 1 character or all characters will be erased. The MY TEXT can be input up to 24 characters on each line.(3) To change an already inserted character, press the ▲/▼ button to move the cursor to one of the first 3 lines, and use the ◀/► buttons to move the cursor on the character to be changed.After pressing the ENTER or INPUT button, the character is selected. Then, follow the same procedure as described at the item (2) above.(4) To finish entering text, move the cursor to the OK on screen and press the ►, ENTER or INPUT button. To revert to the previous MY TEXT without saving changes, move the cursor to the CANCEL on screen and press the ◀, ENTER or INPUT button.· The MY TEXT WRITING function is available only when the MY TEXT PASSWORD function is set to OFF.

Presentation tools

The projector has the following two convenient tools that enable on-screen presentations easily and quickly:

- PC-LESS Presentation (below)

- USB Display (86)

PC-LESS Presentation

The PC-LESS Presentation reads image data from storage media inserted into the USB TYPE A port and displays the image on the following modes.

The PC-LESS Presentation can be started by selecting the USB TYPE A port as the input source. This feature allows you to make your presentations without using your computer.

- Thumbnail mode (78)

- Full Screen mode (82)

- Slideshow mode (83)

[Supported storage media]

- USB memory (USB memory type, USB hard disk and USB card reader type)

NOTE • USB readers (adapters) that have more than one USB slot may not work (if the adapter is acknowledged as multiple devices connected).

- USB hubs may not work.

- USB devices with security software may not work.

- Be careful when inserting or removing a USB device. (12, 80)

[Supported format]

• FAT12, FAT16 and FAT32

• NTFS is not supported. NOTE

[Supported file format]

• JPEG (.jpeg, .jpg) * Progressive is not supported.
• Bitmap (.bmp) * 16bit mode and compressed bitmap is not supported.
• PNG (.png) * Interlace PNG is not supported.
• GIF (.gif)

NOTE • Files with a resolution greater than XGA are not supported.

• Files with a resolution smaller than 36x36 are not supported.
• Files with a resolution smaller than 100x100 may not be displayed.
• Some supported files may not be displayed.
• Only a frame appears when the content of image data cannot be displayed in the Thumbnail mode.

PC-LESS Presentation (continued)

Thumbnail mode

The Thumbnail mode displays the images stored in a USB storage device on the Thumbnail screen. Maximum 20 images are displayed in a screen.

If you wish, you can jump into the Full Screen mode or Slideshow mode, after you select some images in the Thumbnail mode.

The Thumbnail mode will be started as the primary function of the PC-LESS Presentation after selecting the USB TYPE A port as the input source.

USB TYPE A SONT SLOESH Selected image Thumbnail menu Thumbnail images INPUT MENU REMOVE USB ENTER 02-SET

PC-LESS Presentation (continued)

Operating by buttons or keys

You can control the images in the Thumbnail screen with the remote control or keypad or a web browser software. The following functions can be supported while the Thumbnail is displayed.

Button operation			Functions
The remote control	The keypad on the projector	Web Remote in web browser software.
▲/▼/◄/►	▲/▼/◄/►	▲/▼/◄/►	Move cursor
PAGE UP PAGE DOWN	-	PAGE UP PAGE DOWN	Switches pages
ENTER INPUT ENTER			• Displays the selected image on the Full Screen mode when a cursor is on a thumbnail image.• Displays the SETUP menu (next) for the selected image when a cursor is on a thumbnail image number.

The SETUP menu for the selected image

Item Functions
SETUP		Use the ◀/► cursor buttons to switch each setting or use the ► cursor button to execute the functions as follows.
	RETURN	Press the ► cursor button or ENTER to return to the Thumbnail screen.
	START	Switch to ON to set the selected image as the first image in the Slideshow. This setting information will be saved in the “playlist.txt” file (85).
	STOP	Switch to ON to set the selected image as the last image in the Slideshow. This setting information will be saved in the “playlist.txt” file (85).
	SKIP	Switch to ON to skip the selected image in the Slideshow. This setting information will be saved in the “playlist.txt” file (85).
	ROTATE	Press the ► cursor button or ENTER to rotate the selected image 90 degrees clockwise. This setting information will be saved in the “playlist.txt” file (85).

PC-LESS Presentation (continued)

Operating by the menu on the Thumbnail screen

You can also control the images by using the menu on the Thumbnail screen.

Item Functions
		Moves to an upper folder.
SORT Allows you to sort files and folders as following.
	RETURN	Press the ▶ cursor button or ENTER to return to the Thumbnail screen.
	NAME UP Sorts	in ascending order by file name.
	NAME DOWN Sorts in descending order by file name.
	DATE UP Sorts	in ascending order by file date.
	DATE DOWN Sorts in descending order.by file date.
▲/▼ Go to previous / next page.
SLIDESHOW Configures and starts the Slideshow ( 83).
	RETURN	Press the ▶ cursor button or ENTER to return to the Thumbnail screen.
	PLAY	Press the ▶ cursor button or ENTER to start the Slideshow.
	START Sets the beginning number of the Slideshow.
	STOP Sets the end number of the Slideshow.
	INTERVAL Sets the interval time of the Slideshow.
	PLAY MODE Selects the Slideshow mode.
INPUT Switches the input port.
MENU		Displays the menu.
REMOVE USB		Be sure to use this function before removing USB storage device from the projector. After that, the projector will not recognize a USB storage device until you insert it again into the USB TYPE A input port.

PC-LESS Presentation (continued)

NOTE • These operations are not accessible while the projector OSD is displayed.

• The Thumbnail mode shows 20 pictures in 1 page as maximum.
• It is not possible to change the input port by using the INPUT button when the Thumbnail screen, Slideshow, or Full Screen is displayed.
• Some error icons will be displayed in the Thumbnail.

This file seems to be broken or not supported format.

A file that cannot be displayed on the thumbnail screen is indicated by a file format icon.

PC-LESS Presentation (continued)

Full Screen Mode

The Full Screen mode shows a full display image. To display in Full Screen mode, select an image in the Thumbnail screen. Then press the ENTER button on the remote control or the INPUT button on the keypad, or click [ENTER] on the Web Remote Control.

Full screen display

The following functions can be supported in the Full Screen mode.

Button operation			Functions
The remote control	The keypad on the projector	Web Remote in web browser software.
▼►orPAGE DOWN	▼or►	▼►orPAGE DOWN	Shows the next picture.
▲◄orPAGE UP	▲or◄	▲◄orPAGE UP	Shows the previous picture.
ENTER INPUT	ENTER Displays	Thumbnail.

NOTE • These operations are not accessible while the projector OSD is displayed.

- It is not possible to change the input port by using the INPUT button when the Thumbnail screen, Slideshow, or Full Screen is displayed.

PC-LESS Presentation (continued)

Slideshow mode

The Slideshow mode displays images in full screen and switches the images at intervals set in INTERVAL on the Thumbnail screen menu (78).

graph TD
    A["Food and Animal Images"] --> B["Beef and Mountain"]
    B --> C["Animal in Grassland"]
    C --> D["Animal in Forest"]
    D --> E["Animal in Grassland"]
    E --> F["Animal in Grassland"]
    F --> G["Animal in Grassland"]
    G --> H["Animal in Grassland"]
    H --> I["Animal in Grassland"]
    I --> J["Animal in Grassland"]
    J --> K["Animal in Grassland"]
    K --> L["Animal in Grassland"]
    L --> M["Animal in Grassland"]
    M --> N["Animal in Grassland"]
    N --> O["Animal in Grassland"]
    O --> P["Animal in Grassland"]
    P --> Q["Animal in Grassland"]
    Q --> R["Animal in Grassland"]
    R --> S["Animal in Grassland"]
    S --> T["Animal in Grassland"]
    T --> U["Animal in Grassland"]
    U --> V["Animal in Grassland"]
    V --> W["Animal in Grassland"]
    W --> X["Animal in Grassland"]
    X --> Y["Animal in Grassland"]
    Y --> Z["Animal in Grassland"]
    Z --> AA["Animal in Grassland"]
    AA --> AB["Animal in Grassland"]
    AB --> AC["Animal in Grassland"]
    AC --> AD["Animal in Grassland"]
    AD --> AE["Animal in Grassland"]
    AE --> AF["Animal in Grassland"]
    AF --> AG["Animal in Grassland"]
    AG --> AH["Animal in Grassland"]
    AH --> AI["Animal in Grassland"]
    AI --> AJ["Animal in Grassland"]
    AJ --> AK["Animal in Grassland"]
    AK --> AL["Animal in Grassland"]
    AL --> AM["Animal in Grassland"]
    AM --> AN["Animal in Grassland"]
    AN --> AO["Animal in Grassland"]
    AO --> AP["Animal in Grassland"]
    AP --> AQ["Animal in Grassland"]
    AQ --> AR["Animal in Grassland"]
    AR --> AS["Animal in Grassland"]
    AS --> AT["Animal in Grassland"]
    AT --> AU["Animal in Grassland"]
    AU --> AV["Animal in Grassland"]
    AV --> AW["Animal in Grassland"]
    AW --> AX["Animal in Grassland"]
    AX --> AY["Animal in Grassland"]

You can start this function from the Slideshow menu. To display the Slideshow menu, select the SLIDESHOW button in the Thumbnail mode and press the ENTER button on the remote control or INPUT button on the projector.

The following operations can be accessible while the Slideshow is displayed.

Button operation			Functions
The remote control	The keypad on the projector	Web Remote in web browser software.
ENTER INPUT	ENTER Displays	thumbnail

* These operations are not accessible while the projector OSD is displayed.

NOTE • It is not possible to change the input port by using the INPUT button when the Thumbnail screen, Slideshow, or Full Screen is displayed.
- When the Slideshow mode is set to ONE TIME, the last slide of the presentation will be held on screen till the ENTER button on the remote control or Web Remote Control, or INPUT button on the projector is pushed.

PC-LESS Presentation (continued)

You can play the Slideshow at your desired configuration.

Configure the Slideshow items in the Thumbnail.

1) RETURN : Returns to the thumbnail mode.
2) PLAY : Play the Slideshow.
3) START : Set the beginning number of the Slideshow.
4) STOP : Set the end number of the Slideshow.
5) INTERVAL : Set the interval time of the Slideshow.

It is not recommend to set the interval

time very short something like several seconds, because it may take more than several seconds to read and display an image file if it is stored in very deep layer directory or if so many files are stored in the same directory.

6) PLAY MODE : Select the Slideshow mode.

ONE TIME : Play the Slideshow one time.

ENDLESS : Play the Slideshow endless.

SLIDESHOWN RETURN EXECUTE PLAY EXECUTE START #1 STOP #10 INTERVAL 1s PLAY MODE ONE TIME

NOTE • The settings of the Slideshow are saved to the “playlist.txt” file that is stored in the storage media. If the file is not existed, it is generated automatically.

• The settings for the START, STOP, INTERVAL, and PLAY MODE are saved to the Playlist.
• If the storage media is under the write protection or the "playlist.txt" is the read only type file, it is impossible to change the settings of the Slideshow.

PC-LESS Presentation (continued)

Playlist

The Playlist is a DOS format text file, which decides the order of displayed still image files in the Thumbnail or Slideshow.

The playlist file name is "playlist.txt" and it can be edited on a computer.

It is created in the folder that contains the selected image files when the PC-LESS

Presentation is started or the Slideshow is configured.

[Example of "playlist.txt" files]

START setting : STOP setting : INTERVAL setting : PLAY MODE setting :

img001.jpg: : : :

img002.jpg:600:::

img003.jpg:700:rot1::

img004.jpg: : :SKIP:

img005.jpg:1000:rot2:SKIP:

The “playlist.txt” file contains the following information.

Each piece of information requires to be separated by “:”, and “:” at the end of each line.

1st line: START, STOP, INTERVAL and PLAY MODE settings (84).

2nd line and after: file name, interval time, rotation setting and skip setting.

interval time: It can be set from 0 to 999900 (ms) with an increment of 100 (ms).

rotation setting: "rot1" means a rotation at 90 degrees clockwise; "rot2" and "rot3" increase another 90 degrees in order.

skip setting: "SKIP" means that the image will not be displayed in the Slideshow.

NOTE • The maximum length in a line on the "playlist.txt" file is 255 characters including linefeed. If any line exceeds the limit, the "playlist.txt" file becomes invalid.

- Up to 999 files can be registered to the Playlist. However, if some folders exist in the same directory the limit number is decreased by the number of folders.

Any files over the limit will not be shown in the Slideshow.

- If the storage device is protected or does not have sufficient space, the "playlist.txt" file cannot be created.

- For the Slideshow settings, refer to the section "Slideshow mode" (83).

USB Display

The projector can display images transferred from a computer via an USB cable (10).

Hardware and software requirement for computer

- OS: One of the following.

Windows ^® XP Home Edition /Professional Edition (32 bit version only)

Windows Vista ^® Home Basic /Home Premium /Business /Ultimate /Enterprise (32 bit version only) Windows ^® 7 Starter /Home Basic /Home Premium /Professional /Ultimate /Enterprise (32 bit version only)

• CPU: Pentium 4 (2.8 GHz or higher)
• Graphic card: 16 bit, XGA or higher
• Memory: 512 MB or higher
- Hard disk space: 30 MB or higher
- USB Port
- USB cable : 1 piece

Select the USB DISPLAY for the USB TYPE B item in the OPTION menu. When you connect your computer to the USB TYPE B port on the projector using a USB cable, the projector will be recognized as a CD-ROM drive on your computer. Then, the software in the projector, "LiveViewerLiteUSB.exe", will run automatically and the application, "LiveViewer Lite for USB", will be ready on your computer for the USB Display. The application, "LiveViewer Lite for USB", will be automatically closed when the USB cable is unplugged.

NOTE • If the software does not start automatically (this is typically because CD-ROM autorun is disabled on your OS), follow the instructions below.

(1) Click on the [Start] button on the toolbar and select the "Run"
(2) Enter F:\LiveViewerLiteUSB.exe and then press the [OK]

If your CD-ROM drive is not drive F on your computer, you will need to replace F with the correct drive letter assigned to your CD-ROM drive.

• CD-ROM autorun is disabled while the screen saver is running.
• The image transmission from the computer is suspended while the password-protected screen saver is running. To resume the transmission, exit the screen saver.
• Please check and get the latest version at Hitachi Web site.

http://www.hitachi-america.us/digitalmedia or http://www.hitachidigitalmedia.com Follow the instructions that can be obtained at the site for updating.

This application will appear in the Windows notification area once it starts. You can quit the application from your computer by selecting "Quit" on the menu.

3:00 PM

NOTE • The “LiveViewer” (refer to the User's Manual - Network Guide) and this application cannot be used at the same time. If you connect your computer to the projector by using a USB cable while the "LiveViewer" is running, the following message will be displayed.

• If any application software having the firewall function is installed into your computer, make the firwall function invalid with following the user's manual.
• Some security software may block image transmission. Please change the security software setting to allow the use of "LiveViewer Lite for USB".

LiveViewer Lite for USB Cannot start LiveViewer Lite for USB while LiveViewer is running. OK

USB Display (continued)

Right-Click menu

The menu shown in the right will be displayed when you right-click the application icon in the Windows notification area.

Display Quit 3:00 PM

Display : The Floating menu is displayed, and the icon disappears from the Windows notification area.

Quit : The application is closed, and the icon disappears from the Windows notification area.

NOTE • If you wish to restart the application, you need to unplug the USB cable and plug it again.

Floating menu

If you select "Display" on the Right-Click menu, the Floating menu shown in the right will appear on your computer screen.

① Start capture button

The transmission to the projector is started and the images will be displayed.

② Stop button

The image transmission is stopped.

③ Hold button

The image on the projector's screen is temporally frozen. The last image before the button is clicked is remained on the screen. You can revise the image data on your computer without showing it on the projector's screen.

④ Option button

The Options window is displayed.

⑤ Minimize button

The Floating menu is closed, and the icon reappears in the Windows notification area.

LiveViewer Lite for USB ① ③ ④ ⑤ ②

NOTE • If you click the Start capture button and/or Stop button repeatedly, images may not be displayed on the screen.

USB Display (continued)

Options window

If you select the Option button on the Floating menu, the Options window is displayed.

Options Settings About Optimize Performance Transmission speed Image quality Keep PC resolution Close

Optimize Performance

The “LiveViewer Lite for USB” captures screenshots in JPEG data and sends them to the projector. The “LiveViewer Lite for USB” has two options that have different compression rate of JPEG data.

Transmission speed

Speed takes priority over Image quality.

It makes JPEG compression rate higher.

The screen on the projector is rewritten quicker because the

transferred data is smaller, but the image quality is worse.

Image quality

Image quality takes priority over Speed.

It makes JPEG compression rate lower.

The screen on the projector is rewritten slower because the transferred data is larger, but the image quality is better.

Keep PC resolution

If you remove the check mark from the [Keep PC resolution] box, the screen resolution of your computer will be switched to XGA and the display speed may be faster.

NOTE • When the resolution is changed, the arrangement of icons on computer desktop screen may be changed.

About

The version information of the "LiveViewer Lite for USB".

Maintenance

Replacing the lamp

A lamp has finite product life. Using the lamp for long periods of time could cause the pictures darker or the color tone poor. Note that each lamp has a different lifetime, and some may burst or burn out soon after you start using them.

Preparation of a new lamp and early replacement are recommended. To prepare a new lamp, make contact with your dealer and tell the lamp type number.

1. Turn the projector off, and unplug the power cord. Allow the projector to cool for at least 45 minutes.
2. Prepare a new lamp. If the projector is mounted on a ceiling, or if the lamp has broken, also ask the dealer to replace the lamp.

lamp cover

Line drawing of a device casing with ventilation slots and a handle (no text or symbols)

In case of replacement by yourself, follow the following procedure.

1. Loosen the screw (marked by arrow) of the lamp cover and then slide and lift the lamp cover to the side to remove it.
2. Loosen the 2 screws (marked by arrow) of the lamp, and slowly pick up the lamp by the handle. Never loosen any other screws.
3. Insert the new lamp, and retighten firmly the 2 screws of the lamp that are loosened in the previous process to lock it in place.
4. While putting the interlocking parts of the lamp cover and the projector together, slide the lamp cover back in place. Then firmly fasten the screw of the lamp cover.
5. Turn the projector on and reset the lamp time using the LAMP TIME item in the OPTION menu.

(1) Press the MENU button to display a menu.
(2) Point at the ADVANCED MENU in the menu using the ▼/▲ button, then press the ▶ button.
(3) Point at the OPTION in the left column of the menu using the ▼/▲button, then press the ▶ button.

Handle

(4) Point at the LAMP TIME using the ▼/▲ button, then press the ▶ button. A dialog will appear.

(5) Press the ▶ button to select "OK" on the dialog. It performs resetting the lamp time.

⚠️ CAUTION ▶ Do not touch any inner space of the projector, while the lamp is taken out.

NOTE • Please reset the lamp time only when you have replaced the lamp, for a suitable indication about the lamp.

Replacing the lamp (continued)

Lamp warning

HIGH VOLTAGE

HIGH TEMPERATURE

HIGH PRESSURE

⚠ WARNING ▶ The projector uses a high-pressure mercury glass lamp. The lamp can break with a loud bang, or burn out, if jolted or scratched, handled while hot, or worn over time. Note that each lamp has a different lifetime, and some may burst or burn out soon after you start using them. In addition, if the bulb bursts, it is possible for shards of glass to fly into the lamp housing, and for gas containing mercury and dust containing fine particles of glass to escape from the projector's vent holes.
▶ About disposal of a lamp: This product contains a mercury lamp; do not put it in a trash. Dispose of it in accordance with environmental laws.

- For lamp recycling, go to www.lamprecycle.org (in the US).

- For product disposal, consult your local government agency or www.eiae.org (in the US) or www.epsc.ca (in Canada).

For more information, call your dealer.

Disconnect the plug from the power outlet

• If the lamp should break (it will make a loud bang when it does), unplug the power cord from the outlet, and make sure to request a replacement lamp from your local dealer. Note that shards of glass could damage the projector's internals, or cause injury during handling, so please do not try to clean the projector or replace the lamp yourself.
• If the lamp should break (it will make a loud bang when it does), ventilate the room well, and make sure not to inhale the gas or fine particles that come out from the projector's vent holes, and not to get them into your eyes or mouth.
• Before replacing the lamp, turn the projector off and unplug the power cord, then wait at least 45 minutes for the lamp to cool sufficiently. Handling the lamp while hot can cause burns, as well as damaging the lamp.

- Never unscrew except the appointed (marked by an arrow) screws.

- Do not open the lamp cover while the projector is mounted on a wall or ceiling. This is dangerous, since if the lamp's bulb has broken, the shards will fall out when the cover is opened. In addition, working in high places is dangerous, so ask your local dealer to have the lamp replaced even if the bulb is not broken.

- Do not use the projector with the lamp cover removed. At the lamp replacing, make sure that the screws are screwed in firmly. Loose screws could result in damage or injury.

- Use only the lamp of the specified type. Use of a lamp that does not meet the lamp specifications for this model could cause a fire, damage or shorten the life of this product.

- If the lamp breaks soon after the first time it is used, it is possible that there are electrical problems elsewhere besides the lamp. If this happens, consult your local dealer or a service representative.

- Handle with care: jolting or scratching could cause the lamp bulb to burst during use.

- Using the lamp for long periods of time, could cause it dark, not to light up or to burst. When the pictures appear dark, or when the color tone is poor, please replace the lamp as soon as possible. Do not use old (used) lamps; this is a cause of breakage.

Cleaning and replacing the air filter

The air filter unit of this projector consists of a filter cover, two kinds of filters, and a filter frame. The new double large filters system is expected to function longer. However, please check and clean it periodically to keep ventilation needed for normal operation of the projector.

When the indicators or a message prompts you to clean the air filter, comply with it as soon as possible. Replace the filters when they are damaged or too soiled. To prepare new filters, make contact with your dealer and tell the following type number.

Type number : UX37191 (Filter set)

When you replace the lamp, please replace the air filter. An air filter of specified type will come together with a replacement lamp for this projector.

1. Turn the projector off, and unplug the power cord. Allow the projector to sufficiently cool down.
2. Use a vacuum cleaner on and around the filter cover.
3. Slide the filter unit upward to take it off from the projector.
4. Use a vacuum cleaner for the filter vent of the projector.
5. Take the fine meshed filter out while holding the filter cover. It is recommended to leave the coarse meshed filter in the filter cover as it is.
6. Use a vacuum cleaner on both sides of the fine meshed filter while holding it so it will not be sucked in. Use a vacuum cleaner for the inside of the filter cover to clean up the coarse meshed filter. If the filters are damaged or heavily soiled, replace them with new ones.
7. Put the fine meshed filter on the coarse meshed one, turning its stitched side up.
8. Put the filter unit back into the projector.

3. Filter cover Filter unit Intake vent

7. Filter cover Filter (coarse meshed) Filter (fine meshed)

(continued on next page)

Cleaning and replacing the air filter (continued)

9. Turn the projector on and reset the filter time using the FILTER TIME item in the EASY MENU.

(1) Press the MENU button to display a menu.
(2) Point at the FILTER TIME using the ▼/▲ button, then press the ▶ button. A dialog will appear.
(3) Press the ▶ button to select "OK" on the dialog. It performs resetting the filter time.

⚠ WARNING ▶ Before taking care of the air filter, make sure the power cable is not plugged in, then allow the projector to cool sufficiently. Taking care of the air filter in a high temperature state of the projector could cause an electric shock, a burn or malfunction to the projector.

▶ Use only the air filter of the specified type. Do not use the projector without the air filter or the filter cover. It could result in a fire or malfunction to the projector.

▶ Clean the air filter periodically. If the air filter becomes clogged by dust or the like, internal temperatures rise and could cause a fire, a burn or malfunction to the projector.

NOTE • Please replace the air filter when it is damaged or heavily soiled.

• When you replace the projection lamp, please replace the air filter. An air filter of specified type will come together with a replacement lamp for this projector.
• Please reset the filter time only when you have cleaned or replaced the air filter, for a suitable indication about the air filter.
• The projector may display the message such as “CHECK THE AIR FLOW” or turn off the projector, to prevent the internal heat level rising.

Replacing the internal clock battery

This projector has internal clock that uses a battery. When the clock of the network function does not work correctly, please try solution by replacement of the battery:

HITACHI MAXELL, part number CR2032 or CR2032H.

Battery cover

1. Turn the projector off, and unplug the power cord. Allow the projector to cool sufficiently.
2. After making sure that the projector has cooled adequately, slowly turn over the projector, so that the bottom is facing.
3. Turn the battery cover fully in the direction indicated "OPEN" using a coin or the like, and pick the cover up to remove it.
4. Pry up the battery using a flathead screwdriver or the like to take it out. While prying it up, put a finger lightly on the battery since it may pop out of the holder.
5. Replace the battery with a new HITACHI MAXELL, Part No. CR2032 or CR2032H. Slide the battery in under the plastic claw, and push it into the holder until it clicks.
6. Replace the battery cover in place, then turn it in the direction indicated "CLOSE" using such as coins, to fix.

90° N3J00 850 850 850 850 90°

NOTE • The internal clock will be initialized by removing the battery. For setting the clock, see the User's Manual - Network Guide.

⚠ WARNING ▶ Be careful of handling a battery, as a battery can cause explosion, cracking or leakage, which could result in a fire, an injury, and environment pollution.

• Use only the specified and perfect battery. Do not use a battery with damage, such as a scratch, a dent, rust or leakage.
• When replacing the battery, replace it with a new battery.
• When a battery leaked, wipe the leakage out well with a waste cloth. If the leakage adhered to your body, immediately rinse it well with water. When a battery leaked in the battery holder, replace the batteries after wiping the leakage out.
• Make sure the plus and minus terminals are correctly aligned when loading a battery.
• Do not work on a battery; for example recharging or soldering.
• Keep a battery in a dark, cool and dry place. Never expose a battery to a fire or water.
• Keep a battery away from children and pets. Be careful for them not to swallow a battery. If swallowed consult a physician immediately for emergency treatment.
• Obey the local laws on disposing a battery.

Caring for the mirror and lens

If the projection mirror or lens is flawed, soiled or fogged, it could cause deterioration of display quality. Please take care of the mirror and lens, being cautious of handling.

1. Turn the projector off and unplug the power cord from the power outlet. And cool the projector down by leaving it for a while as it is.
2. The lens door can be opened manually. Please hold both side of the lens door and slowly open it until it is locked with clicking sound.
3. Wipe softly the mirror and lens with a damped soft cleaning cloth for lens on the market, being careful not to give any damage on the mirror and lens. For around edge of the mirror and lens where might be difficult to be wiped out, please use an air blower for cameras on the market to clean up.
4. To close the lens door properly, please take the following procedure.

(1) Insert the power cord with the lens door opened.

(2) The power indicator will light in orange, and the lens door closes automatically. Do not touch the lens door when the door is closing. Do not allow anything to obstruct the lens door.

Illustration of hands holding a sheet of paper or paper inside a device (no text or symbols visible)

Illustration of hands cleaning a paper liner with a handle (no text or symbols)

10x Blower

Illustration of a hand using a cloth to press down an open projector (no text or symbols visible)

Cleaning cloth

NOTE

• When the lens door is closed manually, it may not shut properly.
• The lens door may not close when the LENS DOOR LOCK function of the SERVICE item in the OPTION menu is set to ON. Refer to the LENS DOOR LOCK function of the SERVICE item in the OPTION menu (59).

⚠ WARNING ▶ Before caring for the projection mirror and lens, turn the projector off and unplug the power cord, then cool the projector sufficiently.
▶ Do not use a vacuum cleaner to clean the projection mirror or lens, since it might give some damage.
▶ Do not use cleaners or chemicals other than those specified in this manual. Pay special attention to the mirror and lens as these materials could cause serious damage to either.

⚠ CAUTION ▶ Be careful not to pinch your finger with the lens door, to prevent an injury.

Other care

Inside of the projector

In order to ensure the safe use of your projector, please have it cleaned and inspected by your dealer about once every year.

Caring for the cabinet and remote control

Incorrect care could have adverse influence such as discoloration, peeling paint, etc.

1. Turn the projector off, and unplug the power cord. Allow the projector to cool sufficiently.
2. After making sure that the projector is cool adequately, lightly wipe with gauze or a soft cloth.
   If the projector is extremely dirty, dip soft cloth in water or a neutral cleaner diluted in water, and wipe lightly after wringing well. Then, wipe lightly with a soft, dry cloth.

⚠ WARNING ▶ Before caring, make sure the power cord is not plugged in, and then allow the projector to cool sufficiently. The care in a high temperature state of the projector could cause a burn and/or malfunction to the projector.
▶ Never try to care for the inside of the projector personally. Doing is so dangerous.
▶ Avoid wetting the projector or inserting liquids in the projector. It could result in a fire, an electric shock, and/or malfunction to the projector.
- Do not put anything containing water, cleaners or chemicals near the projector.
- Do not use aerosols or sprays.
⚠️ CAUTION ▶ Please take right care of the projector according to the following. Incorrect care could cause not only an injury but adverse influence such as discoloration, peeling paint, etc.
▶ Do not use cleaners or chemicals other than those specified in this manual.
▶ Do not polish or wipe with hard objects.
NOTICE ▶ Do not directly touch the lens surface with hands.

Troubleshooting

If an abnormal operation should occur, stop using the projector immediately.

⚠ WARNING ▶ Never use the projector if abnormal operations such as smoke, strange odor, excessive sound, damaged casing or elements or cables, penetration of liquids or foreign matter, etc. should occur. In such cases, immediately disconnect the power plug from the power outlet. After making sure that the smoke or odor has stopped, contact to your dealer or service company.

Otherwise if a problem occurs with the projector, the following checks and measures are recommended before requesting repair.

If this does not resolve the problem, please contact your dealer or service company. They will tell you what warranty condition is applied.

Related messages

When some message appears, check and cope with it according to the following table. Although these messages will be automatically disappeared around several minutes, it will be reappeared every time the power is turned on.

Message Description
	There is no input signal.Please confirm the signal input connection, and the status of the signal source.
	The USB TYPE B port is selected as the picture input source even if MOUSE is selected for USB TYPE B (54).Select USB DISPLAY in the dialog to project the picture input to the USB TYPE B port. In this case, you cannot use the simple mouse and keyboard function. Otherwise select other port for picture input.
	Projector is waiting for an image file.Check the hardware connection, settings on the projector and network-related settings.The computer-Projector network connection might be disconnected. Please re-connect using “Connect button” of the “LiveViewer”. (Using the “LiveViewer” in the User's Manual - Network Guide)
	The horizontal or vertical frequency of the input signal is not within the specified range.Please confirm the specs for your projector or the signal source specs.
	An improper signal is input.Please confirm the specs for your projector or the signal source specs.

(continued on next page)

Related messages (continued)

Message Description
	The internal temperature is rising.Please turn the power off, and allow the projector to cool down at least 20 minutes. After having confirmed the following items, please turn the power ON again.Is there blockage of the air passage aperture?Is the air filter dirty?Does the peripheral temperature exceed 35°C?Is the projector used at an altitude of about 1600 m or higher?If the projector is used at an altitude of about 1600 m or higher, set FAN SPEED of the SERVICE item in the OPTION menu to HIGH (58).
	A note of precaution when cleaning the air filter.Please immediately turn the power off, and clean or change the air filter referring to the “Cleaning and replacing the air filter” section of this manual. After you have cleaned or changed the air filter, please be sure to reset the filter timer (55, 92).
NOT AVAILABLE	The button operation is not available.

Regarding the indicator lamps

When operation of the LAMP, TEMP and POWER indicators differs from usual, check and cope with it according to the following table.

POWER indicator	LAMP indicator	TEMP indicator	Description
Lighting In Orange	Turned off	Turned off	The projector is in a standby state.Please refer to the section “Power on/off”.
Blinking In Green	Turned off	Turned off	The projector is warming up.Please wait.
Lighting In Green	Turned off	Turned off	The projector is in an on state. Ordinary operations may be performed.
Blinking In Orange	Turned off	Turned off	The projector is cooling down.Please wait.
Blinking In Red	(discretionary)	(discretionary)	The projector is cooling down. A certain error has been detected.Please wait until POWER indicator finishes blinking, and then perform the proper measure using the item descriptions below.
Blinking In Red or Lighting In Red	Lighting In Red	Turned off	The lamp does not light, and there is a possibility that interior portion has become heated.Please turn the power off, and allow the projector to cool down at least 20 minutes. After the projector has sufficiently cooled down, please make confirmation of the following items, and then turn the power on again.Is there blockage of the air passage aperture?Is the air filter dirty?Does the peripheral temperature exceed 35°C?If the same indication is displayed after the remedy, please change the lamp referring to the section “Replacing the lamp”.
Blinking In Red or Lighting In Red	Blinking In Red	Turned off	The lamp cover has not been properly fixed.Please turn the power off, and allow the projector to cool down at least 45 minutes. After the projector has sufficiently cooled down, please make confirmation of the attachment state of the lamp cover. After performing any needed maintenance, turn the power on again.If the same indication is displayed after the remedy, please contact your dealer or service company.
Blinking In Red or Lighting In Red	Turned off	Blinking In Red	The cooling fan is not operating.Please turn the power off, and allow the projector to cool down at least 20 minutes. After the projector has sufficiently cooled down, please make confirmation that no foreign matter has become caught in the fan, etc., and then turn the power on again.If the same indication is displayed after the remedy, please contact your dealer or service company.
Blinking In Red or Lighting In Red	Turned off	Lighting In Red	There is a possibility that the interior portion has become heated.Please turn the power off, and allow the projector to cool down at least 20 minutes. After the projector has sufficiently cooled down, please make confirmation of the following items, and then turn the power on again.Is there blockage of the air passage aperture?Is the air filter dirty?Does the peripheral temperature exceed 35°C?Is the projector used at an altitude of about 1600 m or higher? If the projector is used at an altitude of about 1600 m or higher, set FAN SPEED of the SERVICE item in the OPTION menu to HIGH (58).
Lighting In Red	Turned off	Turned off	The lens door is not opened properly.One of the followings has been happened.The lens door is not opened properly, when the projector is turned on.The lens door position is shifted, while the projector is working. Restart the projector, after confirming that there is nothing that the lens door hits while opening or closing.
Lighting In Green	Simultaneous blinking in Red		It is time to clean the air filter.Please immediately turn the power off, and clean or change the air filter referring to the section “Cleaning and replacing the air filter”. After cleaning or changing the air filter, please be sure to reset the filter timer. After the remedy, reset the power to ON.
Lighting In Green	Alternative blinking in Red		There is a possibility that the interior portion has become overcooled.Please use the unit within the usage temperature parameters (5°C to 35°C).After the treatment, reset the power to ON.
Blinking In Green for approx. 3 seconds.	Turned off	Turned off	At least 1 Power ON schedule is saved to the projector.Please refer to Schedule Settings section of User's Manual - Network Guide.

NOTE • When the interior portion has become overheated, for safety purposes, the projector is automatically shut down, and the indicator lamps may also be turned off. In such a case, disconnect the power cord, and wait at least 45 minutes. After the projector has sufficiently cooled down, please make confirmation of the attachment state of the lamp and lamp cover, and then turn the power on again.

Resetting all settings

When it is hard to correct some wrong settings, the FACTORY RESET function of SERVICE item in OPTION menu (63) can reset all settings (except settings such as LANGUAGE, LAMP TIME, FILTER TIME, FILTER MESSAGE, SECURITY and NETWORK) to the factory default.

Phenomena that may be easy to be mistaken for machine defects

About the phenomenon confused with a machine defect, check and cope with it according to the following table.

Phenomenon Cases not involving a machine defect		Reference page
Power does not come on.	The electrical power cord is not plugged in.Correctly connect the power cord.	14
	The main power source has been interrupted during operation such as by a power outage (blackout), etc.Please disconnect the power plug from the power outlet, and allow the projector to cool down at least 10 minutes, then turn the power on again.	14, 18
	Either there is no lamp and/or lamp cover, or either of these has not been properly fixed.Please turn the power off and disconnect the power plug from the power outlet, and allow the projector to cool down at least 45 minutes. After the projector has sufficiently cooled down, please make confirmation of the attachment state of the lamp and lamp cover, and then turn the power on again.	89
Neither sounds nor pictures are outputted.	The signal cables are not correctly connected.Correctly connect the connection cables.	9 ~ 13
	Signal source does not correctly work.Correctly set up the signal source device by referring to the manual of the source device.	-
	The input changeover settings are mismatched.Select the input signal, and correct the settings.	20 ~ 22
	The BLANK function for pictures and the MUTE function for sounds are working.AV MUTE may be active.Refer to the item “Sound does not come out” and “No pictures are displayed” on the next page to turn off the MUTE and BLANK functions.	20, 27, 57
Sound does not come out.	The signal cables are not correctly connected.Correctly connect the audio cables.	9 ~ 13
	The MUTE function is working.Restore the sound pressing MUTE or VOLUME +/- button on the remote control.	20
	The volume is adjusted to an extremely low level.Adjust the volume to a higher level using the menu function or the remote control.	20, 45, 46
	The AUDIO SOURCE/SPEAKER setting is not correct.Correctly set the AUDIO SOURCE/SPEAKER in AUDIO menu.	45
	The mode selected for HDMI AUDIO is not suitable.Check each of the two modes provided and select the suitable one for your HDMITM audio device.	46
No pictures are displayed.	The signal cables are not correctly connected.Correctly connect the connection cables.	9 ~ 13
	The brightness is adjusted to an extremely low level.Adjust BRIGHTNESS to a higher level using the menu function.	32
	The computer cannot detect the projector as a plug and play monitor.Make sure that the computer can detect a plug and play monitor using another plug and play monitor.	10
	The BLANK screen is displayed.Press BLANK button on the remote control.	27
	The USB TYPE B port is selected as the picture input source even if MOUSE is selected for USB TYPE B.Select USB DISPLAY for USB TYPE B in OPTION menu to project the picture input to the port. Otherwise select other port for picture input.	54
	The projector does not recognize the USB storage device inserted into USB TYPE A port.Use the REMOVE USB function first, remove the USB storage device, and then insert it into the port again.Before removing the USB storage device, be sure to use the REMOVE USB function on the thumbnail screen, which appears when the USB TYPE A port is selected as the input source.	12
Video screen display freezes.	The FREEZE function is working.Press FREEZE button to restore the screen to normal.	27
Colors have a faded-out appearance, or Color tone is poor.	Color settings are not correctly adjusted.Perform picture adjustments by changing the COLOR TEMP, COLOR, TINT and/or COLOR SPACE settings, using the menu functions.	33, 38
	COLOR SPACE setting is not suitable.Change the COLOR SPACE setting to AUTO, RGB, SMPTE240, REC709 or REC601.	38
Pictures appear dark.	The brightness and/or contrast are adjusted to an extremely low level.Adjust BRIGHTNESS and/or CONTRAST settings to a higher level using the menu function.	32
	The projector is operating in Eco mode.Set ECO MODE to BRIGHT, and set AUTO ECO MODE to OFF, in the SETUP menu.	43, 44
	The lamp is approaching the end of its product lifetime.Replace the lamp.	89, 90
Pictures appear blurry.	Either the focus and/or horizontal phase settings are not properly adjusted.Adjust the focus using the focus ring, and/or H PHASE using the menu function.	24, 37
	The lens is dirty or misty.Clean the lens referring to the section “Caring for the lens”.	94
Some kind of image degradation such as flickering or stripes appear on screen.	When the projector is operating in Eco mode, flickering may appear on screen.Set ECO MODE to BRIGHT, and set AUTO ECO MODE to OFF, in the SETUP menu.	43, 44
	The OVER SCAN ratio is too big.Adjust OVER SCAN in the IMAGE menu smaller.	35
	Excessive VIDEO NR.Change the setting of VIDEO NR in the INPUT menu.	38
	The FRAME LOCK function cannot work on the current input signal.Set FRAME LOCK in the INPUT menu to OFF.	40
The computer connected to the USB TYPE B port of the projector does not start up.	The computer cannot start up in the current hardware configuration.Disconnect the USB cable from the computer, then reconnect it after starting up the computer.	10
RS-232C does not work.	The SAVING function is working.Select NORMAL for STANDBY MODE item in the SETUP menu.	44
	The COMMUNICATION TYPE for the CONTROL port is set to NETWORK BRIDGE.Select OFF for COMMUNICATION TYPE item in the OPTION - SERVICE - COMMUNICATION menu.	61
Network does not work	The SAVING function is working.Select NORMAL for STANDBY MODE item in the SETUP menu.	44
NETWORK BRIDGE function does not work	The NETWORK BRIDGE function is turned off.Select NETWORK BRIDGE for COMMUNICATION TYPE item in the OPTION - SERVICE - COMMUNICATION menu.	61
Schedule function does not work	The SAVING function is working.Select NORMAL for STANDBY MODE item in the SETUP menu.	44
When the projector is connected to the network, it powers off and on as described below.Powers off↓POWER indicatorblinks in orange a few times↓Goes intostandby mode	Disconnect the LAN cable and check that the projector is working properly.If this phenomenon occurs after connecting to the network, there may be a loop between two Ethernet switching hubs within the network, as explained below.- There are two or more Ethernet switching hubs in a network.- Two of the hubs are doubly connected by LAN cables.- This double connection forms a loop between the two hubs.Such a loop may have an adverse effect on the projector as well as the other network devices.Check the network connection and remove the loop by disconnecting the LAN cables such that there is only one connecting cable between two hubs.	-
Video files cannot be played properly on a computer on which the "LiveViewer" was run.	The "LiveViewer" has been intentionally or accidentally forced to shut down.DirectDraw® or Direct3D® has been disabled on your Windows®.Please refer to the Microsoft® Help and Support home page on how to enable DirectDraw® or Direct3D®.	-

NOTE • Although bright spots or dark spots may appear on the screen, this is a unique characteristic of liquid crystal displays, and it does not constitute or imply a machine defect.

Specifications

Please see the Specifications in the User's Manual (concise) which is a book.

End User License Agreement for the Projector Software

• Software in the projector consists of the plural number of independent software modules and there exist our copyright or/and third party copyrights for each of such software modules.
• Be sure to read “End User License Agreement for the Projector Software” which is separated document. (in the CD)

Projector ED-A220N

(Type no. ED-A220NM)

User's Manual (detailed) Network Guide

Line drawing of a portable electronic device with ventilation slots and control panel (no text or symbols)

Thank you for purchasing this product.

This manual is intended to explain only the network function. For proper use of this product, please refer to this manual and the other manuals for this product.

⚠ WARNING ▶ Before using this product, be sure to read all manuals for this product. After reading them, store them in a safe place for future reference.

Features

This projector has the network function that brings you the following main features.

√ Network Presentation : allows the projector to project computer images transmitted through a network. (37)
√ Web Control : allows you to monitor and control the projector through a network from a computer. (45)
√ My Image : allows the projector to store up to four still images and project them. (70)
√ Messenger : allows the projector to display text sent from a computer through a network. (72)
√ Network Bridge : allows you to control an external device through the projector from a computer. (74)

NOTE • The information in this manual is subject to change without notice.

• The manufacturer assumes no responsibility for any errors that may appear in this manual.
• The reproduction, transfer or copy of all or any part of this document is not permitted without express written consent.

Trademark acknowledgment

• Microsoft®, Internet Explorer®, Windows®, Windows Vista® and Aero® are registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S. and/or other countries.
• Pentium® is a registered trademark of Intel Corporation.
• JavaScript® is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems, Inc.
• HDMI, the HDMI logo and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC in the United States and other countries.
  • Trademark PJLink is a trademark applied for trademark rights in Japan, the United States of America and other countries and areas.
  All other trademarks are the properties of their respective owners.

Contents

1. Connection to the Network .... 4

1.1 System requirements 4

1.1.1 Required equipment preparation 4
1.1.2 Hardware and software requirement for computer 4

1.2 Installing the "LiveViewer" 6

1.2.1 Installing the "LiveViewer" 6
1.2.2 Updating the "LiveViewer" 7

1.3 Process to connect the network 8

1.3.1 Process overview 8
1.3.2 Starting the "LiveViewer" 9

1.4 Selecting the network connection mode 10

1.4.1 Selecting either the wireless LAN or wired LAN 10
1.4.2 Selecting My Connection 12

1.5 Selecting the network connection method .... 14

1.5.1 Passcode connection 15

1.6 Manual Configuration 23

1.6.1 Profile connection 23
1.6.2 History connection 24

1.7 Configuring the network settings manually 25

1.8 Confirming the connection to your destination 30

1.8.1 Connection and transmission 30
1.8.2 Connection error 32

1.9 Profile data 33

1.9.1 Outline of Profile data 33
1.9.2 Making Profile data 33
1.9.3 Editing Profile data 34
1.9.4 Registering My Connection 35

2. Network Presentation ...... 37

2.1 Using the "LiveViewer" 37

2.1.1 Main menu and Operating buttons 37
2.1.2 Displaying the status 39
2.1.3 Switching the display mode 40
2.1.4 Option menu 41

2.2 Starting the Network Presentation 43

2.2.1 Display mode 43
2.2.2 Presenter mode 44
2.2.3 Display User Name 44

3. Web Control 45

3.1 Logon 46
3.2 Network Information 48
3.3 Network Settings 49
3.4 Port Settings 50
3.5 Mail Settings 52
3.6 Alert Settings 53
3.7 Schedule Settings 55
3.8 Date/Time Settings 58
3.9 Security Settings 60
3.10 Projector Control 61
3.11 Remote Control 67
3.12 Projector Status 68
3.13 Network Restart 69

4. My Image Function ...... 70

5. Messeger Function ...... 72

6. Network Bridge Function ...... 74

6.1 Connecting devices 74
6.2 Communication setup 75
6.3 Communication port 75
6.4 Transmission method 76
6.4.1 HALF-DUPLEX 76
6.4.2 FULL-DUPLEX 77

7. Other Functions ...... 78

7.1 E-mail Alerts 78
7.2 Projector Management using SNMP 80
7.3 Event Scheduling 81
7.4 Command Control via the Network 84

8. Troubleshooting 89

9. Warranty and after-sales service 92

1. Connection to the network

1. Connection to the Network

1.1 System requirements

1.1.1 Required equipment preparation

The following equipments are required to connect the projector to your computer through the network.

√ Projector
√ LAN cable (to connect the projector to a network): CAT-5 or greater
√ Computer (minimum 1 set): equipped with the network feature (100Base-TX or 10Base-T)

1.1.2 Hardware and software requirement for computer

The “LiveViewer” software needs to be installed on all the computers to connect to the projector through a network. To use the “LiveViewer” your computer needs to meet the following requirements.

√ OS: One of the following. Windows ^® XP Home Edition /Professional Edition (32 bit version only) Windows Vista ^® Home Basic /Home Premium /Business /Ultimate /Enterprise (32 bit version only)

Windows® 7 Starter /Home Basic /Home Premium /Professional /Ultimate / Enterprise (32 bit version only)

√ CPU: Pentium 4 (2.8 GHz or higher)

√ Graphic card: 16 bit, XGA or higher

* When using the "LiveViewer" it is recommended that the display resolution of your computer is set to 1024 x 768.

√ Memory: 512 MB or higher
√ Hard disk space: 100 MB or higher
√ Web browser: Internet Explorer® 6.0 or higher
√ CD-ROM drive

NOTE • The network communication control is disabled while the projector is in standby mode if the STANDBY MODE item is set to SAVING. Please connect the network communication to the projector after setting the STANDBY MODE to NORMAL. (SETUP menu in the User's Manual – Operating Guide)

• You can get the latest version of the "LiveViewer" and the latest information for this product from our website. (7)
• Depending on the specification of your computer, the computer may slow down due to high CPU usage when the "LiveViewer" is running.
• The “LiveViewer” does not work on Windows Vista® that is not updated to Service Pack 1 or later. Please install the latest Service Pack on your Windows Vista®.

1.1 System requirements (continued)

NOTE • Set your computer's resolution to XGA or less. Refer to the user manual for your computer or Windows. If it is larger than XGA, the transmission speed will be reduced.

• If you use a screen resolution greater than XGA, the projector will shrink it to XGA on screen.
• Images might not been transmitted, caused by OS version or the driver software for Network Adapter on your computers. It is highly recommended that OS and the driver should be updated to the latest.
• If any application software having the firewall function is installed into your computer, make the firewall function invalid with following the user's manual.

1.2 Installing the "LiveViewer"

1.2.1 Installing the "LiveViewer"

The "LiveViewer" software needs to be installed on all the computers to connect to the projector through a network.

You need to log in as an administrator user to install the software.

1) Turn on the computer.
2) Shut down all applications.
3) Insert the accompanying CD-ROM into the computer's CD-ROM drive.

NOTE • After sequence 3), the User Account Control (UAC) dialog will appear (if you are using Windows Vista® or Windows® 7). Please click the [Allow] to continue installation.

4) After a moment, the Choose Setup Language dialog will appear as shown on the right. Select what you like to use in the list, and click the [OK].

Choose Setup Language Select the language for the installation from the choices below. English OK Cancel

NOTE • If the Choose Setup Language dialog doesn't appear, proceed as follows:

(1) Click on the [Start] button on the toolbar and select the "Run".
(2) Enter E:\setup.exe and then press the [OK].

If your CD-ROM drive is not drive E on your computer, you will need to replace E with the correct drive letter assigned to your CD-ROM drive.

If the software has been already installed, Uninstallation will be done. Click the [Cancel] button, then uninstallation will be canceled. If you uninstalled the software by miss-operation, please re-install the software from first procedure.

5) After a moment, the Welcome dialog will appear as shown on the right. Press the [Next].

LiveViewer - InstallShield Wizard Welcome to the InstallShield Wizard for LiveViewer The InstallShield Wizard will install LiveViewer on your computer. To continue, click Next.

1.2 Installing the "LiveViewer" (continued)

6) The License Agreement dialog appears. If you accept it, select "I accept the terms of the license agreement" and press the [Next].
7) The Choose Destination Location dialog appears. Press the [Next].

NOTE • The C:\Program Files\Projector Tools\LiveViewer folder will be created and the program will be installed into that folder. If you wish to install to a different folder, click the [Browse] and select another folder.

8) Confirm the program folder name. If "Projector Tools" is okay, press the [Next] to continue. If not, enter the desired folder name and then press the [Next].

9) [Windows® XP] The Hardware Installation dialog appears if you are using Windows® XP. Press Continue Anyway. [Windows Vista® or Windows® 7] The Windows Security dialog will appear if you are using Windows Vista® or Windows® 7. Please click the [Install this driver software anyway] and continue installation.

10) After a moment, installation will complete and the Setup Complete dialog will appear as shown on the right. Click the [Finish]. This completes the software installation. Then your computer automatically restarts.

(1) To confirm that the software has been properly installed, press the [Start] button on the toolbar, select All Programs and then select the Projector Tools folder.
(2) The "LiveViewer" will appear in that folder if the installation was successful.

LiveViewer - InstallShield Wizard License Agreement Please read the following license agreement carefully License Agreement Hacki Consumer Electronics Co., Ltd. To the Customers/Users Be sure to read the following "License Agreement" carefully: By installing and/or using of this software, you agree to the LicenseAgreement If you do NOT agree to the License Agreement, you are NOT authorized to install and/or with this software. 1. You may use this software under the terms of this License Agreement. ○ I accept the terms of the license agreement ○ I do not accept the terms of the license agreement Next < Back Next > Cancel

LiveViewer - InstallShield Wizard Choose Destination Location Select folder where setup will install files Setup will install LiveViewers in the following folders. To install to the folder, click Next. To install to a different folder, click Browse and select another folder. Destination Folder C:\Program Files\Projector Tools\LiveViews Browse... < Back Next > Cancel

LiveViewer - InstallShield Wizard Select Program Folders Please select a program folder. Setup will add programs icons to the Program Folder listed below. You may type a new folder name, or select one from the existing folders for: Click Next to continue. Program Folder: Projecta Tools Existing Folder: Administrative Tools Games Startup < Back Next > Cancel

LiveViewer - InstallShield Wizard InstallShieldWizard Complete The InstallShield Wizard has successfully installed LiveViewer. Before you can use the program, you must restart your computer. Yes, I want to restart my computer now. No, I will restart my computer late. Remove any disks from their drivers, and then click Finish to complete setup. + Back Finish Cancel

1.2.2 Updating the "LiveViewer"

Please check and get the latest version at Hitachi Web site.

http://www.hitachi-america.us/digitalmedia or http://www.hitachidigitalmedia.com Some functions explained in this manual require the "LiveViewer" Version 4.xx. (In the version information a number between 00 and 99 will replace the xx.)

1.3 Process to connect the network

Before connecting your computer and projector via a network, make sure that the LAN port is selected as the input source on the projector. (Operating in the User's Manual – Operating Guide) Otherwise a connection cannot be established.

1.3.1 Process overview

An overview of the process to connect your computer and the projector via a network is shown below.

The "LiveViewer" allows you to skip some of the steps below to establish a network connection quickly and easily.

graph TD
    A["① Selecting the network connection mode\n- Wireless LAN\n- Wired LAN\n- My Connection"] --> B["② Selecting the network connection method\n- Enter PassCode\n- Configure Manually\n- Select From List"]
    B --> C["③ Manual configuration\n- Profile\n- History\n- Configure Network Settings Manually"]
    C --> D["④ Configuring the network settings manually"]
    D --> E["⑤ Confirming the connection to your destination"]
    A --> F["If My Connection is selected"]
    B --> G["If Enter PassCode or Select From List is selected"]
    C --> H["If Profile or History is selected"]
    D --> I["Confirming the connection to your destination"]

NOTE • Wireless LAN can be selected only when an access point to convert wireless LAN to wired LAN exists between your computer and the projector. • Up to 30 computers can be simultaneously connected to the projector through a network.

1.3 Process to connect the network (continued)

1.3.2 Starting the "LiveViewer"

Start the "LiveViewer" in your computer, taking one of the followings.

• Double click the "LiveViewer" icon on the Desktop in your computer.
• Select "Start" → "All Programs" → "Projector Tools" → "LiveViewer" on Windows menu.

NOTE • After sequence, the User Account Control (UAC) dialog will appear (if you are using Windows Vista® or Windows® 7). Please click [Allow] to start "LiveViewer".

Then, proceed to item 1.4 Selecting the network connection mode. (10)

1. Connection to the network

1.4 Selecting the network connection mode

After starting the "LiveViewer", the "Select the Network Connection" screen comes up. Select the network connection that you would like to use. There are 3 options in the menu.

• Wireless LAN
• Wired LAN
• My Connection

Projector Connection Select the Network Connection that you would like to use. ● Wireless LAN ○ Wired LAN Connection Name Adapter Name Wireless Network Connec... 11a/b/g Wireless LAN Mini PCI Express ... ● My Connection Next > Exit

If you select either the wireless LAN or wired LAN, proceed to item 1.4.1 Selecting either the wireless LAN or wired LAN. (below)

If you select My Connection, jump to item 1.4.2 Selecting My Connection. (12)

NOTE • Select Wireless LAN only when you connect the computer and the access point via wireless network and connect the access point and the projector via wired network, since the projector doesn't have wireless LAN function.

1.4.1 Selecting either the wireless LAN or wired LAN

If you select either the wireless LAN or wired LAN, a list of the network adapters in your computer is shown in the menu.

Select what you like to use in the list, and click the [Next].

Then, proceed to item 1.5 Selecting the network connection method. (14)

Projector Connection Select the Network Connection that you would like to use • Wireless LAN • Wired LAN Connection Name Adapter Name Wireless Network Connec... 11a/b/g Wireless LAN Mini PC Express... My Connection Next > Exit

NOTE • If you select the wireless LAN, the wireless LAN adapters in your computer are shown in the list.

- If the wired LAN is selected, the wired LAN adapters in your computer are shown.

[Troubleshooting]

■ Are you sure that you want to turn on the network adapter?

The screen is displayed in the case that the selected network adapter is invalid.

• To turn it on, click the [Yes], and then proceed to item 1.5. (14)
- Not to turn it on, click the [No], and then the screen is back to the previous one to select another network adapter.

Projector Connection Are you sure that you want to turn on the network adapter? Yes No

1.4 Selecting the network connection mode (continued)

■ A network connection was not established.

The screen is displayed in the case that the projector is not connected with a LAN cable to your computer when the wired LAN is selected.

Be sure that the projector is connected with a LAN cable to your computer.

Projector Connection A network connection was not established. Please check the network connection.

Click the [OK], then the screen is back to the previous one to select the network connection mode.

1. Connection to the network

1.4 Selecting the network connection mode (continued)

1.4.2 Selecting My Connection

Select the [My Connection] and click the [Connect].

If you select the My Connection, the computer is connected to the projector through the network by using the profile data that is pre-assigned to My Connection. (35) When you select the My Connection, the computer immediately starts the connection to the projector.

Projector Connection Select the Network Connection that you would like to use. Wireless LAN Wired LAN Connection Name Adapter Name My Connection Connect Exit

Proceed to item 1.8 Confirming the connection to your destination. (30)

NOTE • If the DHCP is set on in the projector, the network connection between the projector and computer may not be established since IP address may be varied. If you like to use the My Connection, set the DHCP off in the projector.

- If no profile data is assigned to the My Connection, it can't be used.

[Troubleshooting]

■ A network connection could not be established.

Windows prevented network configuration changes.

You may log in the Windows under User authority.

Click the [OK] to return to the screen to select the network connection mode. (10)

Projector Connection A network connection could not be established. Windows prevented network configuration changes. Please insure that you are authorized to make these changes or check your security settings.

Consult to the network administrator and log in again under the Administrator authority. After that, please resume at item 1.3.2 Starting the “LiveViewer”. (9)

1.4 Selecting the network connection mode (continued)

■ Are you sure you want to connect the selected projector?

The message is appeared when the wireless adapter you selected is already used for another network connection.

- To connect, click the [Yes]. Proceed to item 1.8 Confirming the connection to your destination. (30)

- Not to connect, click the [No] to return to the screen to select the network connection mode. (10)

Projector Connection Are you sure you want to connect the selected projector? Yes No

1. Connection to the network

1.5 Selecting the network connection method

There are some options to connect to the network.

• Enter PassCode
• Configure Manually
• Select From List

Select one of them to meet your requirement.

Projector Connection Select the option that describes the connection method you would like to use: • Enter PassCode ○ Configure Manually ○ Select From List Projector name IP address Find The PassCode is a 12-digit code, that can be found on the Startup Screen of the projector you are currently trying to connect to. < Back Next > Exit

Enter PassCode

If you want to use the Passcode for network connection, select the [Enter PassCode] and click the [Next].

The Passcode is given by the projector on screen. And you simply input the Passcode to the "LiveViewer" to connect the network.

Proceed to item 1.5.1 Passcode connection. (15)

Configure Manually

Select the [Configure Manually] and click the [Next].

Then, proceed to item 1.6 Manual Configuration. (23)

Select From List

Before selecting this item, your computer and the projectors need to be connected to the same network.

If the connection is already established, select the [Select From List].

From the list of the projectors connected to the network, select which projector you would like to send your images. Proceed to 1.8 Confirming the connection to your destination. (30)

1.5 Selecting the network connection method (continued)

1.5.1 Passcode connection

The unique Passcode system brings you very quick and simple connection to the network.

The Passcode is a code that expresses the network setting in the projector. If you input the code in the “LiveViewer” in your computer, the network setting in the projector and computer can be matched and the connection will be established immediately.

The section is intended to explain how to use the Passcode.

(1) Getting the Passcode

The Passcode is 12-digit code consisting of alphanumeric characters (“1-9” and “A-Z”).

Example: PASSCODE 1234-5678-9ABC

The Passcode is given on the projector when the LAN port is selected as input source.

NOTE • The Passcode system does not work under the condition below. If such is the case, establish the connection manually.

1) Subnet mask is not Class A or B or C.

The Passcode system accepts Class A, B and C only.

Class A:(255.0.0.0), Class B:(255.255.0.0), Class C:(255.255.255.0)

There are two methods to get the Passcode from the projector

Method 1

1) Turn on the projector, and make sure that the projector image is on screen.

2) Press the COMPUTER button on the remote control or INPUT button on the projector to select the LAN as input port.

If there is no signal on the LAN port, you can find the Passcode on screen.

1. Connection to the network

1.5 Selecting the network connection method (continued)

Method 2

1) Turn on the projector, and make sure that the projector image is on screen.
2) Press the MENU button on the remote control or the ▲/▼ buttons on the projector to show the menu on screen.
3) Use the ▲/▼ cursor buttons to select the ADVANCED MENU, and use the ▶ cursor button to enter the item.
4) Use the ▲/▼ cursor buttons to select the NETWORK, and use the ▶ cursor button to enter the item.
5) Use the ▲/▼ cursor buttons to select the INFORMATION, and use the ▶ cursor button to display the INFORMATION.
6) The Passcode appears in the INFORMATION window.

NOTE • Take the method 2 when you project your computer image by the "LiveViewer", or when the LAN port is not selected as input source.

- If no communication between the projector and computer in 5 minutes, the Passcode will be changed.

1.5 Selecting the network connection method (continued)

(2) Entering the Passcode

If you select [Enter PassCode] at item 1.5, the "Please enter the PassCode" screen is displayed. Please enter the Passcode divided 4-digit each in 3 boxes (total 12-digit).

Example PASSCODE: 1234 - 5678 - 9ABC

Projector Connection Please enter the PassCode. PASSCODE : The PassCode is a 12-digit code, that can be found on the Startup Screen of the projector you are currently trying to connect to. < Back Connect Exit

After entering the Passcode, click the [Connect] to start the connection to the projector.

Proceed to item 1.8 Confirming the connection to your destination. (30)

If you click the [Back], the screen is back to item 1.5 Selecting the network connection method. (14)

NOTE • When entering the Passcode, capital and small letters are not distinguished.

- If you are using a Subnet mask other than Class A, B or C, you will have to establish the connection manually.

If the manual setting screen is displayed, please follow item 1.5.1 (3). (21)

[Troubleshooting]

■ Incorrect PassCode.

The incorrect Passcode was input.

Click the [Back] to return to the "Please enter the PassCode" screen.

Check the PassCode on the projector screen (15) and enter the code again.

Projector Connection Incorrect PassCode. PASSCODE : 1234 - 5678 - 9ABC < Back Exit

1. Connection to the network

1.5 Selecting the network connection method (continued)

■ A network connection could not be established.

Windows prevented network configuration changes.

You may log in the Windows under User authority.

Click the [OK], then the "LiveViewer" main menu is displayed even though the network is not established. Click on the main and go back to item 1.5 Selecting the network connection method. (14)

Projector Connection A network connection could not be established. Windows prevented network configuration changes. Please insure that you are authorized to make these changes or check your security settings.

Consult to the network administrator. Log in the Windows under Administrator authority. After that, please resume at item 1.3.2 Starting the “LiveViewer”. (9)

■ If you need to add a Network configuration on your computer to connect to the projector.

This dialog will be displayed when you need to add a Network configuration on your computer to connect to the projector. Confirm with your network administrator if the Network configuration displayed on the dialog is OK, and then click the [Yes].

Projector Connection Do you want to apply suggested network settings as follows? IP Address : 192.168.1.165 Subnet mask : 255.255.255.0 Change... Not displaying confirmation dialog for adding Network settings. Yes No

Click the [NO], then the "LiveViewer" main menu is displayed even though the network is not established. Click on the main menu and go back to item 1.5 Selecting the network connection method. (14)

1.5 Selecting the network connection method (continued)

If you put a check mark in the box "Not displaying confirmation dialog for adding Network settings", the projector memorizes current configuration and this dialog is not displayed again. To display this dialog again, click Option icon in the "LiveViewer" main menu and remove the check mark in the box "Not displaying confirmation dialog for adding Network settings".

If you want to change the Network configuration to add, click the [Change]. A dialog for changing the Network configuration as shown to the right will be displayed. Enter IP address and subnet mask, then click the [OK]. Procedure to connect to the projector will start.

Proceed to item 1.8 Confirming the connection to your destination. (30)

If you click the [Cancel], you will return to the dialog for adding a Network configuration.

Projector Connection Enter Computer IP Address and Subnet mask. IP address : Subnet mask : OK Cancel

If the entered IP address and projector's IP address are the same, a warning dialog shown to the right will be displayed.

Click the [OK], and then enter a different IP address from the projector's one in the dialog for changing Network configuration.

Projector Connection An IP Address overlaps with the IP Address of the projector you are trying to connect to. Please choose an IP Address that is currently not in use.

If the connection is not available with the entered Network configuration, a warning dialog shown to the right will be displayed. Click the [OK] to return to the dialog for changing the Network configuration, and then enter appropriate configuration.

Projector Connection Incorrect IP Address. OK

NOTE • If a Network configuration to connect to the projector has been added on the computer, the added Network configuration will be erased once the application software is closed.

1. Connection to the network

1.5 Selecting the network connection method (continued)

■ Are you sure you want to connect the selected projector?

The message is appeared when the wireless adapter you selected is already used for another network connection.

- To connect, click the [Yes]. Proceed to item 1.8 Confirming the connection to your destination. (30)

- Not to connect, click the [No] then the "LiveViewer" main menu is displayed even though the network is not established. Click 📄 on the main menu to go back to item 1.5 Selecting the network connection method. (14)

Projector Connection Are you sure you want to connect the selected projector? Yes No

1.5 Selecting the network connection method (continued)

(3) Confi guring manually

After entering the Passcode (17), you are required to enter the network configuration manually if you use a Subnet mask other than Class A, B or C. (15) If you use the wired LAN, go to (22).

Wireless LAN

The projector is required to be connected to an access point by a LAN cable.

Diagram showing a laptop connected to a printer and a power cord, with a lightning bolt symbol indicating signal or connection (no text or labels present)

1) The setting on the access point. *1
Enter the following information.
SSID : WirelessAccessPoint (example)
Encryption: WEP64bit (example)
Encryption key *2: ********** (example)

2) The setting on the projector. *3

Enter the following information.

Subnet mask *4: 255.255.255.128

(example)

Projector Connection Enter the following information. SSID : Encryption : OFF Encryption key : Subnet mask : SSID,Encryption and Encryption key: use wireless access point configuration settings. Subset mask: enter the Subnet mask that the projector is using. < Back Connect Exit

3) Click the [Connect].

4) The wireless connection will be established.

Proceed to item 1.8 Confirming the connection to your destination. (30)

*1 Contact the network administrator to find out the setting on the access point.
*2 If you use an encryption, you need to set it. Contact the network administrator to check the encryption key that is set in the projector.
The encryption key is always shown as “**********”.
*3 To find the network setting on the projector, refer to the NOTE. (22)
*4 If you use Subnet mask except Class A/B/C, please set it.

1. Connection to the network

1.5 Selecting the network connection method (continued)

Wired LAN

1) Enter the following information for the projector.

Subnet mask *1: 255.255.255.128 (example)

2) Click the [Connect].
3) The network connection will be established. Proceed to item 1.8 Confirming the connection to your destination. (30)

Projector Connection Enter the following information. Subnet mask : Please enter the projector subnet mask. < Back Connect Exit

*1 If you use a Subnet mask other than Class A, B or C, this screen appears.

NOTE • If you require the network setting information on the projector, take the following procedure to find it out.

1) Turn on the projector, and make sure that the projector image is on screen.
2) Press the MENU button on the remote control or the ▲/▼ buttons on the projector to show the menu on screen.
3) Use the ▲/▼ cursor buttons to select the ADVANCED MENU, and use the ▶ cursor button to enter the item.
4) Use the ▲/▼ cursor buttons to select the NETWORK, and use the ▶ cursor button to enter the item.
5) Use the ▲/▼ cursor buttons to select the INFORMATION, and push the ▶ cursor button.
6) The setting will be displayed in the NETWORK_INFORMATION-box.

1.6 Manual configuration

There are 3 options for the manual configuration.

• Profile (below)
  • History (24)
• Configure Network Settings Manually (25)

If you select Configure Network Settings Manually, proceed to item 1.7 Configuring the network settings manually. (25)

Projector Connection Select the manual connection method you would like to use Profile Profile name Date created Profile-1 11/30/2009 3:19:46 PM Profile-2 11/30/2009 3:19:41 PM New Edit Delete My Connection History Projector name IP address Last connected Projector-1 192.168.1.101 11/30/2009 3:23:24 PM Projector-2 192.168.1.102 11/30/2009 3:22:24 PM Projector-3 192.168.1.103 11/30/2009 3:21:24 PM Configure Network Settings Manually. < Back Connect Exit

1.6.1 Profile connection

Selecting a profile data connect the network with the projector.

It is required to store the profile data in advance. (33)

1) Select the [Profile].
2) Choose a profile data listed in the window.
3) Click the [Connect].

4) The network connection will be established. Proceed to item 1.8 Confirming the connection to your destination. (30)

Projector Connection Select the manual connection method you would like to use Profile Profile name Date created Profile-1 11/30/2009 3:19:46 PM Profile-2 11/30/2009 3:10:41 PM New Edit Delete My Connection History Projector name IP address Last connected Projector-1 192.168.1.101 11/30/2009 3:23:24 PM Projector-2 192.168.1.102 11/30/2009 3:22:24 PM Projector-3 192.168.1.103 11/30/2009 3:21:24 PM Register to profile Configure Network Settings Manually. < Back Connect Exit

NOTE • To check the setting in a profile data, follow the process below.

1) Choose a profile data that you want to check.
2) Move the mouse cursor to the profile data, and click the right button on the mouse to display a pop-up menu.
3) Select the "Property" in the pop-up menu, and click the left button on the mouse.
4) The setting information of the selected profile data is shown.

- If the DHCP is set on in the projector, the network connection between the projector and computer may not be established since IP address may be varied. If you like to use the Profile connection, set the DHCP off in the projector.

1. Connection to the network

1.6 Manual configuration (continued)

1.6.2 History connection

The “LiveViewer” can memory the network settings when connecting to the projector as a history record. After that, selecting a history record can quickly connect the network with the projector.

1) Select the [History].
2) Choose a history record listed in the window.
3) Click the [Connect].

4) The network connection will be established.

Proceed to item 1.8 Confirming the connection to your destination. (30)

Projector Connection Select the manual connection method you would like to use Profile Profile name Date created Profile-1 11/30/2009 3:19:46 PM Profile-2 11/30/2009 3:19:41 PM New Edit Delete My Connection History Projector name IP address Last connected Projector-1 192.168.1.101 11/30/2009 3:22:24 PM Projector-2 192.168.1.102 11/30/2009 3:22:24 PM Projector-3 192.168.1.103 11/30/2009 3:21:24 PM Register to profile Configure Network Settings Manually. < Back Connect Exit

If you want to copy a history record to a profile data, select one of the history record and click the [Register to profile]. The profile data cannot be erased automatically.

NOTE • The number of the history record is maximum 10 for each network adapter. When the 11th data is stored, the oldest record among the 10 will be overwritten.

• The date & time information in each history record is renewed when the network is connected by using the history record.
• If the DHCP is set on in the projector, the network connection between the projector and computer may not be established since IP address may be varied.
• Even if you use the profile connection, it will be memorized as a history record.

1.7 Configuring the network settings manually

All setting for the network connection between the projector and computer is input manually.

Select the [Configure Network Settings Manually].

Projector Connection Select the manual connection method you would like to use Profile Profile name Date created Profile-1 11/30/2009 3:19:46 PM Profile-2 11/30/2009 3:10:41 PM New Edit Delete My Connection History Projector name IP address Last connected Projector-1 192.168.1.101 11/30/2009 3:23:24 PM Projector-2 192.168.1.102 11/30/2009 3:22:24 PM Projector-3 192.168.1.103 11/30/2009 3:21:24 PM Register to profile Configure Network Settings Manually. < Back Next > Exit

The information to be input manually is different, depending on how you want to connect the projector and computer.

Wireless LAN

The projector is required to be connected to an access point by a LAN cable. Go to (26).

Wired LAN

If you use the wired LAN, go to (27).

1. Connection to the network

1.7 Confi guring the network settings manually (continued)

Wireless LAN

Diagram showing a printer connected to a laptop via a wireless signal line (no text or symbols present)

1) The setting on the access point. *1 Enter the following information.

SSID: WirelessAccessPoint (example)

Encryption: WEP64bit (example)

Encryption key *2: ********** (example)

Mode: INFRASTRUCTURE

Projector Connection Enter the following information. SSID : Encryption : OFF Encryption key : Mode : INFRASTRUCTURE Enter Wireless Access Point Configuration Information. < Back Next > Exit

2) Click the [Next].

3) Enter the following information that is set in the projector. *3

IP address : 192.168.1.10 (example)

Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0 (example)

Projector Connection Enter the following information. IP address : Subnet mask : Enter Projector IP Address and Subnet mask. < Back Connect Exit

4) Click the [Connect].

5) The wireless connection will be established.

Proceed to item 1.8 Confirming the connection to your destination. (30)

*1 Contact the network administrator to find out the setting on the access point.
*2 If you use an encryption, you need to set it. Contact the network administrator to check the encryption key that is set in the projector.
The encryption key is always shown as “**********”.

*3 To find the network setting on the projector, refer to the NOTE. (22)

1.7 Configuring the network settings manually (continued)

Wired LAN

1) Enter the following information for the projector. *1
IP address : 192.168.1.10 (example)
Subnet mask : 255.255.255.0 (example)

Projector Connection Enter the following information. IP address : Subnet mask : Enter Projector IP Address and Subnet mask < Back Connect Exit

2) Click the [Connect].

3) The network connection will be established.

Proceed to item 1.8 Confirming the connection to your destination. (30)

*1 To find the network setting on the projector, refer to the NOTE. (22)

[Troubleshooting]

■ A network connection could not be established.

Windows prevented network configuration changes.

You may log in the Windows under User authority.

Click the [OK], then the "LiveViewer" main menu is displayed even though the network is not established. Click 📄 on the main menu and go back to item 1.5 Selecting the network connection method. (14)

Projector Connection A network connection could not be established. Windows prevented network configuration changes. Please insure that you are authorized to make these changes or check your security settings.

Consult to the network administrator. Log in the Windows under Administrator authority. After that, please resume at item 1.3.2 Starting the “LiveViewer”. (9)

1. Connection to the network

1.7 Configuring the network settings manually (continued)

■ If you need to add a Network configuration on your computer to connect to the projector.

This dialog will be displayed when you need to add a Network configuration on your computer to connect to the projector. Confirm with your network administrator if the Network configuration displayed on the dialog is OK, and then click the [Yes].

Projector Connection Do you want to apply suggested network settings as follows? IP Address : 192.168.1.165 Subnet mask : 255.255.2550 Change... Not displaying confirmation dialog for adding Network settings. Yes No

Click the [NO], then the "LiveViewer" main menu is displayed even though the network is not established. Click 📄 on the main menu and go back to item 1.5 Selecting the network connection method. (14)

If you put a check mark in the box "Not displaying confirmation dialog for adding Network settings", the projector memorizes current configuration and this dialog is not displayed again. To display this dialog again, click Option 🔒 icon in the "LiveViewer" main menu and remove the check mark in the box "Not displaying confirmation dialog for adding Network settings".

If you want to change the Network configuration to add, click the [Change]. A dialog for changing the Network configuration as shown to the right will be displayed. Enter IP address and subnet mask, then click the [OK]. Procedure to connect to the projector will start.

Proceed to item 1.8 Confirming the connection to your destination. (30) If you click the [Cancel], you will return to the dialog for adding a Network configuration.

Projector Connection Enter Computer IP Address and Subnet mask. IP address : Subnet mask : OK Cancel

1.7 Configuring the network settings manually (continued)

If the entered IP address and projector's IP address are the same, a warning dialog shown to the right will be displayed.

Click the [OK], and then enter a different IP address from the projector's one in the dialog for changing Network configuration.

Projector Connection An IP Address overlaps with the IP Address of the projector you are trying to connect to. Please choose an IP Address that is currently not in use.

If the connection is not available with the entered Network configuration, a warning dialog shown to the right will be displayed. Click the [OK] to return to the dialog for changing the Network configuration, and then enter appropriate configuration.

Projector Connection Incorrect IP Address. OK

NOTE • If a Network configuration to connect to the projector has been added on the computer, the added Network configuration will be erased once the application software is closed.

■ Are you sure you want to connect the selected projector?

The message is appeared when the wireless adapter you selected is already used for another network connection.

- To connect, click the [Yes]. Proceed to item 1.8 Confirming the connection to your destination. (30)

- Not to connect, click the [No] then the "LiveViewer" main menu is displayed even though the network is not established. Click 📄 on the main menu to go back to item 1.5 Selecting the network connection method. (14)

Projector Connection Are you sure you want to connect the selected projector? Yes No

1.8 Confirming the connection to your destination

1.8.1 Connection and transmission

When the network connection is established, the "Connection to Projector successful" screen is displayed.

Make sure that the right projector that you want to send your image to is selected, by checking the projector name and IP address shown in the screen.

Projector Connection Connection to Projector successful. Projector name : PRJ_0123456789ab IP address : 192.168.1.100 Are you sure that you want to display images on the projector? Register this setting to My Connection Yes No

• To send images to the projector, click the [Yes]. The transmission will be started. To display the transmitted images, select the LAN port as input source on the projector.
• Not to send, click the [No], then the "LiveViewer" main menu is displayed in stand-by mode. (Stand-by mode is the state where there is no image transmission, although the network connection is established.) The transmission can be started, if you click ▶ or □ button on the "LiveViewer" main menu.

If you wish to use the current connection setting as a profile data for My Connection, check in the box for the [Register this setting to My Connection].

[Troubleshooting]

■ This projector is currently in use (Presenting) by another user.

The projector you want to send your images to is occupied by another computer in the Presenter mode.

Click the [OK], then the "LiveViewer" main menu is displayed in stand-by mode. Retry to send your images, after the Presenter mode is off.

Projector Connection This projector is currently in use (Presenting) by another user. You cannot connect with this projector until the other session (Presenter Mode) is finished.

1.8 Confirming the connection to your destination (continued)

■ A Slideshow is currently running on the projector that you are trying to display to.

The projector you want to send your images to is in the Slideshow mode in the PC-LESS Presentation.

• Click the [Yes], then the projector will stop the Slideshow and switch the input source to the LAN port.
• Click the [No], then the projector is remained in the Slideshow mode, and the "LiveViewer" main menu is displayed in stand-by mode on your computer.

Projector Connection A Glideshow is currently running on the projector that you are trying to display to (PC-Less Presentation Mode). If you continue, you will cancel the current Slideshow. Yes No

■ Are you sure you want to change the input channel of the Projector to LAN?

The projector is not set to the LAN as an input signal.

• Click the [Yes], then the projector is switched to the LAN.
• Click the [No], then the projector is remained as it is, and the "LiveViewer" main menu is displayed in stand-by mode on your computer.

Projector Connection Are you sure you want to change the input channel of the Projector to LAN? Yes No

1. Connection to the network

1.8 Confirming the connection to your destination (continued)

1.8.2 Connection error

When the connection to the projector could not be established, an error message, "Network Connection not established", will come up.

Click the [OK] then the "LiveViewer" main menu is displayed even though the network is not established. Click 📄 on the main menu to go back to item 1.5 Selecting the network connection method. (14)

Projector Connection Network Connection not established. OK

NOTE • Check the network setting in the projector, and retry the connection from item 1.3.2 Starting the “LiveViewer”. (9)

1.9 Profile data

1.9.1 Outline of Profile data

The network setting to connect the projector and computer can be stored as a profile data. Once the data is stored, all you need to do is to select the data to connect to the network. It is recommended when the same network connection is often used.

1.9.2 Making Profile data

The profile data is made on the Manual Configuration screen. (23)

Up to 10 profile data can be stored for each network adapter.

1) Select the [Profile] and click the [New].

2) The "Create new profile" will come up. If you have already made 10 profile data, you cannot make a new one, until you delete a stored data.

Input all information required for your network connection.

If you want to clear the information you input, click the [Clear].

Projector Connection Select the manual connection method you would like to use Profile Profile Name Date created Profile-1 11/30/2009 3:19:46 PM Profile-2 11/30/2009 3:19:41 PM New Edit Delete My Connection History Projector name IP address Last connected Projector-1 192.168.1.101 11/30/2009 3:23:24 PM Projector-2 192.168.1.102 11/30/2009 3:22:24 PM Projector-3 192.168.1.103 11/30/2009 3:21:24 PM Register to profile Configure Network Settings Manually. < Back Connect Exit

Create new profile Profile name : Adapter name : 11a/b/g Wireless LAN MiniPCI Express Adapter Wireless settings SSD : Encryption : OFF Encryption key : Mode : AD-HOC Projector settings IP address : Subnet mask : Computer settings IP address : Subnet mask : Clear OK Cancel

3) Click the [OK], after all information is set. If you don't want to store it, click the [Cancel].

4) The new profile data is shown in the profile list, if you click the [OK].

NOTE • When you make a new profile data, it is strongly recommended to check that the new data can work properly by selecting the data at the Profile connection. (23)

- If you change a network adapter on your computer, make a new profile data for the adapter.

1. Connection to the network

1.9 Profile data (continued)

1.9.3 Editing Profile data

If necessary, the profile data can be edited on the Manual Configuration screen. (23)

1) Select the [Profile], and select one of the data listed in the window.
2) Click the [Edit].
3) The "Edit profile" screen will come up.
4) Edit the information required to be revised. If you want to clear all information in the window, click the [Clear].
5) Click the [OK], after the editing is completed. If you don't want to store it, click the [Cancel].
6) The edited profile data is stored and shown in the profile list with the new date created information, if you click the [OK].

Projector Connection Select the manual connection method you would like to use Profile: Profile Name Date created Profile-1 11/30/2009 3:19:46 PM Profile-2 11/30/2009 3:10:41 PM New Edit Delete My Connection History Projector name IP address Last connected Projector-1 192.168.1.101 11/30/2009 3:23:24 PM Projector-2 192.168.1.102 11/30/2009 3:22:24 PM Projector-3 192.168.1.103 11/30/2009 3:21:24 PM Register to profile Configure Network Settings Manually. < Back Connect Exit

Edit profile Profile name : Profile-1 Adapter name : 11a/b/g Wireless LAN MiniPCI Express Adapter Wireless settings SSID : Encryption : OFF Encryption key : Mode : AD-HOC Projector settings IP address : 192 , 168 , 1 , 101 Subnet mask : 255 , 255 , 255 , 0 Computer settings IP address : 192 , 168 , 1 , 102 Subnet mask : 255 , 255 , 255 , 0 Clear OK Cancel

NOTE • When you edit a profile data, it is strongly recommended to check that the edited data can work properly by selecting the data at the Profile connection. (23)

1.9 Profile data (continued)

1.9.4 Registering My Connection

One of the profile data, which is often used, can be registered as the My Connection profile data. Once the data is registered, all you need to do is to select the My Connection to connect to the network. (12)

1) Click the [My Connection].
2) The "Add My Connection" screen will come up.
The currently selected profile data for the My Connection is shown with a check mark in the list.
3) Select one of the profile data listed in the window and put a mark in the check box. The data selected before is turned unmarked.
4) Click the [OK], then the window is closed. If you don't want to select a new one, click the [Cancel].

Projector Connection Select the manual connection method you would like to use Profile Profile name Date created Profile-1 11/30/2009 3:19:46 PM Profile-2 11/30/2009 3:10:41 PM New Edit Delete My Connection History Projector name IP address Last connected Projector-1 192.168.1.101 11/30/2009 3:21:24 PM Projector-2 192.168.1.102 11/30/2009 3:22:24 PM Projector-3 192.168.1.103 11/30/2009 3:21:24 PM Regular to profile Configure Network Settings Manually. < Back Connect Exit

Add My Connection Profile list Profile name Adapter name ✓ Profile-2 10/100Mbps PCI Ethernet Adapter ☐ Profile-1 10/100Mbps PCI Ethernet Adapter OK Cancel

NOTE • If you don't want to use the My Connection, mark no data listed in the window, and click the [OK].
- In the list, all profile data are shown no matter which network adapter is selected. You can register a profile data that is not for currently selected network adapter as the My Connection profile data.

1. Connection to the network

1.9 Profile data (continued)

Also, you can register a profile data to My Connection, when the network connection is established. When it is established, the "Connection to Projector successful" screen is displayed. (30)

If you wish to use the current connection setting for My Connection, check in the box for the [Register this setting to My Connection]. And then, if it is okay to overwrite the present data for My Connection, click the [OK]. A new profile data will be created and it is registered as My Connection profile data.

Projector Connection Connection to Projector successful. Projector name : PRJ_0120456789ab IP address : 192.150.1.100 Are you sure that you want to display images on the projector? ✓ Register this setting to My Connection Yes No

NOTE • If there are already 10 profile data, the check box cannot be checked. Please erase one of the existing profile data. • The profile name for the stored data is assigned by the "LiveViewer" automatically. The name will be shown at the right side of the check box.

2. Network Presentation

2.1 Using the "LiveViewer"

When you get the connection between your projector and computer, the "LiveViewer" main menu will be shown on the computer screen.

On the main menu you can configure settings and operate functions to send your images to the projector.

2.1.1 Main menu and Operating buttons

1) Menu Type

There are 2 type of the main menu, Easy type and Advanced type, which can be switched on screen.

- When the network connection is not established, the Advanced type will be on screen.

Easy Type ① ③ Switch to Advanced type ②

Advanced Type Switch to Easy type Indicator Status Display ④ ⑤ ⑥ ⑦ ⑧ ⑨

2) Operating buttons

① Starting Capture button

The transmission to the projector is started and the images will be displayed. The Display mode will be the Single PC mode at first.

② Stop button

The image transmission is stopped.

NOTE • The images may not be displayed on screen, if the Start/Stop buttons are clicked repeatedly.

- The primary image is displayed in multi-display environment.

2.1 Using the "LiveViewer" (continued)

③ Hold button

The image on screen is temporally frozen.

The last image before the button is clicked is remained on screen.

You can revise the image data on your computer without showing it on the projector's screen.

④ Display mode button(40)

The button switches the Single PC mode and Multi PC mode.

⑤ Connect button

The screen to select the connection mode is displayed.

Go to item 1.5. (14)

⑥ Option button

The option screen is displayed.

⑦ Web control button

Starts the Web browser on your computer and displays Web control screen to control the projector and change various settings for the projector. (45)

⑧ Information button

The version of the "LiveViewer" is displayed.

⑨, ⑩ Close button

The network is disconnected and the "LiveViewer" is closed.

⑪ Minimize button

The displayed icon changes as shown below depending on the status of the "LiveViewer". If the icon is double-clicked, the last type of the main menu will be shown on screen.

Connected

Disconnected Not connected Hold

2.1 Using the "LiveViewer" (continued)

2.1.2 Displaying the status

1) Indicator

The indicator shows the following status.

Indicator Status Note
	Not connected	The network connection to the projector is not established yet.
	Hold	The network connection is established, but the image transmissions on hold.
	Connected	The network connection is established and the images on the computer are being sent to the projector.
	Disconnected	The network connection to the projector is disconnected.

2) Status Display in Multi PC mode

The icon is displayed at the right end of the Display mode buttons.

One of the following icons to inform which quarter screens are used will be shown.

Status Status icon
No computer is on screen
One computer is on screen.
Two computers are on screen.
Three computers are on screen.
Four computers are on screen.

NOTE • The status display is refreshed in every 3 seconds.

- If the status cannot be acquired, it will not be displayed refreshed.

2.1 Using the "LiveViewer" (continued)

2.1.3 Switching the display mode

The “LiveViewer” has the Single PC mode and Multi PC mode. The modes can be switched on the main menu.

1) Click the button on the main menu.

The buttons below are displayed.

① ② ③ ④ ⑤ ⑥

⑥:Status Display

2) Select from ① to ⑤ buttons, and click it.
① Switching to the Single PC mode : Your image is displayed on full screen.
②-⑤ Switching to the Multi PC mode : Your image is displayed on a quarter screen identified in the button.
3) The projector screen is switched to the mode selected above, and the transmission of your computer image will be started to display your image on the screen.
4) The icon ☐ on the main menu is replaced by the icon you selected.

NOTE • The image transmission will be stopped, when you click the Single mode button while the projector is in the Single PC mode or you click one of the Multi mode buttons that shows the quarter screen which is currently displaying your computer images in the Multi PC mode.

• If the Multi PC mode is selected, the projector screen is automatically divided to 4 zones.
• When the Presenter mode is enabled and the projector is used by a computer in the Single PC mode, images from other computers cannot be sent to the projector even if the button is pressed.
• When a quarter-screen occupied by another computer is selected, image transmission from that computer will be put on hold and the image of the currently specified computer will be displayed.

The display mode can be set also by using the MULTI PC MODE in the PRESENTATION item in the NETWORK menu. The last setting made will take effect regardless of the setting method.

(Refer to 📄NETWORK menu in the User's Manual – Operating Guide for the function on the projector.)

2.1 Using the "LiveViewer" (continued)

2.1.4 Option menu

Clicking the Option button displays the option menu on screen.

Options Not displaying confirmation dialog for adding Network settings. Optimize Performance Transmission speed Image quality Presenter Mode Display User Name: Unnamed Close

① “Not displaying confirmation dialog for adding Network settings”

This setting allows you to choose to display or not the confirmation dialog for adding a Network configuration (19, 28) when you connect your computer to the projector. It is turned off by default.

② Optimize Performance

The “LiveViewer” captures computer screen in JPEG data and sends the JPEG data to the projector. The “LiveViewer” has two options that have different compression rate of JPEG data.

Transmission speed

Speed takes priority over Image quality.

It makes JPEG compression rate higher.

The screen on the projector is rewritten quicker because the transferred data is smaller, but the image quality is worse.

Image quality

Image quality takes priority over Speed.

It makes JPEG compression rate lower.

The screen on the projector is rewritten slower because the transferred data is larger, but the image quality is better.

2.1 Using the "LiveViewer" (continued)

③ Presenter Mode

In the Single PC mode, the projector can be occupied by one computer and can block an access from any other computer, if the Presenter mode is selected in the “LiveViewer”.

While making your presentation, you don't need to worry that the image on screen is unexpectedly switched to an image sent by another computer.

If you want to turn it on, put a check mark in the check box.

NOTE • If the Multi PC mode is selected, the setting for the Presenter mode is invalid.

• When switching from the Multi PC mode to the Single PC mode, the Presenter mode setting of the computer is valid.
• The Presenter Mode is set valid in factory default setting.
• In addition to using the software menu on the computer on which Presenter Mode is turned on, you can cancel this function by using the projector's OSD menu QUIT PRESENTER MODE EXECUTE of the PRESENTATION item in the NETWORK menu.

④ Display User Name

A “User Name” that is up to 20 letters can be input by using alphanumeric characters.

The user name can be displayed on the projector screen, so you can find out whose image is currently on the screen.

(Refer to NETWORK menu in the User's Manual – Operating Guide) If the check box is not marked, the information is not sent to the projector.

2.2 Starting the Network Presentation

This chapter explains the Network Presentation feature with which you can project computer images transmitted through a network.

The "LiveViewer" allows you to project images from one or multiple computers by connecting the projector to an existing network without using computer cables.

This Network Presentation feature helps you to smoothly make your presentations and conduct conferences.

To start the Network Presentation, select the LAN port as the input source on the projector and click the Starting Capture button on the "LiveViewer".

2.2.1 Display mode

Two display modes, Single PC mode and Multi PC mode, are available for the Network Presentation.

1) Single PC mode

The projector displays images sent by one computer.

graph TD
    A["Printer"] --> B["Mouse Image"]
    A --> C["Mouse Image with bar chart"]
    A --> D["Mouse Image with bar chart"]
    A --> E["Mouse Image with bar chart"]
    style A fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style B fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style C fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style D fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style E fill:#ccf,stroke:#333

2. Network Presentation

2.2 Starting the Network Presentation (continued)

2) Multi PC mode

The projector screen is divided to 4 zones. The projector displays images in one zone sent by a computer, so that the projector can display images sent by up to 4 computers at the same time.

graph TD
    A["打印机"] --> B["计算机"]
    A --> C["Laptop 1"]
    A --> D["Laptop 2"]
    A --> E["Laptop 3"]
    A --> F["Laptop 4"]
    A --> G["Laptop 5"]
    A --> H["Laptop 6"]
    A --> I["Laptop 7"]
    A --> J["Laptop 8"]
    A --> K["Laptop 9"]
    A --> L["Laptop 10"]
    A --> M["Laptop 11"]
    A --> N["Laptop 12"]
    A --> O["Laptop 13"]
    A --> P["Laptop 14"]
    A --> Q["Laptop 15"]
    A --> R["Laptop 16"]
    A --> S["Laptop 17"]
    A --> T["Laptop 18"]
    A --> U["Laptop 19"]
    A --> V["Laptop 20"]
    A --> W["Laptop 21"]
    A --> X["Laptop 22"]
    A --> Y["Laptop 23"]
    A --> Z["Laptop 24"]
    A --> AA["Laptop 25"]
    A --> AB["Laptop 26"]
    A --> AC["Laptop 27"]
    A --> AD["Laptop 28"]
    A --> AE["Laptop 29"]
    A --> AF["Laptop 30"]
    A --> AG["Laptop 31"]
    A --> AH["Laptop 32"]
    A --> AI["Laptop 33"]
    A --> AJ["Laptop 34"]
    A --> AK["Laptop 35"]
    A --> AL["Laptop 36"]
    A --> AM["Laptop 37"]
    A --> AN["Laptop 38"]
    A --> AO["Laptop 39"]
    A --> AP["Laptop 40"]
    A --> AQ["Laptop 41"]
    A --> AR["Laptop 42"]
    A --> AS["Laptop 43"]
    A --> AT["Laptop 44"]
    A --> AU["Laptop 45"]
    A --> AV["Laptop 46"]
    A --> AW["Laptop 47"]
    A --> AX["Laptop 48"]
    A --> AY["Laptop 49"]
    A --> AZ["Laptop 50"]
    A --> BA["Laptop 51"]
    A --> BB["Laptop 52"]
    A --> BC["Laptop 53"]
    A --> BD["Laptop 54"]
    A --> BE["Laptop 55"]
    A --> BF["Laptop 56"]
    A --> BG["Laptop 57"]
    A --> BH["Laptop 58"]
    A --> BI["Laptop 59"]
    A --> BJ["Laptop 60"]
    A --> BK["Laptop 61"]
    A --> BL["Laptop 62"]
    A --> BM["Laptop 63"]
    A --> BN["Laptop 64"]
    A --> BO["Laptop 65"]
    A --> BP["Laptop 66"]
    A --> BQ["Laptop 67"]
    A --> BR["Laptop 68"]
    A --> BS["Laptop 69"]
    A --> BT["Laptop 70"]
    A --> BU["Laptop 71"]
    A --> BV["Laptop 72"]
    A --> BW["Laptop 73"]
    A --> BX["Laptop 74"]
    A --> BY["Laptop 75"]
    A --> BZ["Laptop 76"]
    A --> CA["Laptop 77"]
    A --> CB["Laptop 78"]
    A --> CC["Laptop 79"]
    A --> CD["Laptop 80"]
    A --> CE["Laptop 81"]
    A --> CF["Laptop 82"]
    A --> CG["Laptop 83"]
    A --> CH["Laptop 84"]
    A --> CI["Laptop 85"]
    A --> CJ["Laptop 86"]
    A --> CK["Laptop 87"]
    A --> CY["Laptop 88"]
    A --> CZ["Laptop 89"]
    A --> DA["Laptop 90"]
    A --> DB["Laptop 91"]
    A --> DC["Laptop 92"]
    A --> DD["Laptop 93"]
    A --> DEL["Laptop 94"]
    A --> DF["Laptop 95"]
    A --> DG["Data visualization: fruit, fruit chart, bar chart, pie chart, cat chart, dog chart, prism chart"]

2.2.2 Presenter mode

In the Single PC mode, the projector can be occupied by one computer and can block an access from any other computer, if the Presenter mode is selected in the "LiveViewer".

While making your presentation, you don't need to worry that the image on screen is unexpectedly switched to an image sent by another computer.

The Presenter mode can be set on the Option menu in the "LiveViewer" main menu. (41)

2.2.3 Display User Name

A "User Name" can be input in the "LiveViewer", which is displayed on screen by operating the menu on the projector. So, it can be found out whose image is currently displayed on screen. (41)

3. Web Control

You can adjust or control the projector via a network from a web browser on a computer that is connected to the same network.

NOTE • Internet Explorer 6.0 or later is required.

• If JavaScript is disabled in your web browser configuration, you must enable JavaScript in order to use the projector web pages properly. See the Help files for your web browser for details on how to enable JavaScript.
• It is recommended that all web browser updates are installed.

3.1 Logon

To use the Web Control function, you need to logon with your user name and password. (47)

Refer to the following for configuring or controlling the projector via a web browser.

Example: If the IP address of the projector is set to 192.168.1.10:

1) Display the logon window as shown on the right. There are two options to display this window.

① Using the "LiveViewer"

Connect your computer and the projector via Network using the "LiveViewer". (9) Then click the Web Control button on the "LiveViewer" main menu (37) to start the Web browser software.

② Using Web browser software

Make sure that your computer and the projector is connected via network, and then start Web browser.

Enter the projector's IP address into URL

input box of the Web browser as the example below, and then press the Enter key or → button.

Example: If the IP address of the projector is set to 192.168.1.10:

Enter "http://192.168.1.10/" into the address bar of the web browser and press the Enter key or click → button.

Connect to 192.168.1.10 The server 192.168.1.10 at Web Server Authentication requires a username and password. Warning: This server is requesting that your username and password be sent in an insecure manner (basic authentication without a secure connection). User name: Password: Remember my password OK Cancel

2) Enter your user name and password, and then click the [OK].

NOTE • The language used on the Web Control screen is the same as that of the OSD on the projector. If you want to change it, you need to change the OSD language on the projector. (SCREEN menu in the User's Manual – Operating Guide)

3.1 Logon (Continued)

Below are the factory default settings for user name and password.

User name Password
Administrator

If you logon successfully, the screen below will be displayed.

Main menu Top:Network Information Projector Name Projector-1 DHCP 08 IP Address 197.106.2.48 Subnet Back 255.05.255.0 Default Gateway 197.106.1.3 Init Security Address 197.106.1.4 MAC Address 000067289560

3) Click the desired operation or configuration item on the main menu.

3.2 Network Information

Top Network Information Project Name Projector 1 ISRP ON SP Address 192.308.1.19 Network Mail 255.853.255.8 Unpaid Currency 193.308.1.1 DNS/Senovar Address 193.308.3.4 MSL Address 800007229540

Displays the projector's current network configuration settings.

Item Description
Projector Name Displays the projector name settings.
DHCP	Displays the DHCP configuration settings.
IP Address Displays the current IP address.
Subnet Mask Displays the subnet mask.
Default Gateway Displays the default gateway.
DNS Server Address Displays the DNS server address.
MAC Address Displays the ethernet MAC address.

3.3 Network Settings

Network Settings Topic Network Information Network Settings Port Settings Mail Settings Alert Settings Schedule Settings Data/Test Settings Security Settings Projector Control Remote Control Projector Status Network Readarf Network Settings SP Configuration SP Address: 100 MHz 1.20 Email Address: 100 MHz 1.20 Default Gateway: 1.20 Projector Name: email:100 MHz email Address (100MHz) Email Address: 100 MHz To apply changes in network settings: click Apply, then perform Network Readarf. OK Cancel

Displays and configures network settings.

Item Description
IP Configuration		Configures network settings.
		DHCP ON Enables DHCP.
		DHCP OFF Disables DHCP.
		IP Address
		Subnet Mask
		Default Gateway
Projector Name		Configures the name of the projector.The length of the Projector Name can be up to 64 alphanumeric characters. Only alphabets, numbers and following symbols can be used. !"#$%&'()*+,-./;;<=>?@[\]^_{}~ and space.Particular projector name is pre-assigned by default.
sysLocation (SNMP)		Configures the location to be referred to when using SNMP.The length of the sysLocation can be up to 255 alphanumeric characters. Only numbers '0-9' and alphabet 'a-z', 'A-Z' can be used.
sysContact (SNMP)		Configures the contact information to be referred to when using SNMP.The length of the sysContact can be up to 255 alphanumeric characters. Only numbers '0-9' and alphabet 'a-z', 'A-Z' can be used.
DNS Server Address		Configures the DNS server address.
AMX D.D.(AMX Device Discovery)		Configures the AMX Device Discovery setting to detect the projector from the controllers of AMX connected to the same network. For the details of AMX Device Discovery, visit the AMX web site.URL: http://www.amx.com

Click the [Apply] button to save the settings.

NOTE • The new configuration settings are activated after restarting the network connection. When the configuration settings are changed, you must restart the network connection. You can restart the network connection by clicking the [Network Restart] on the main menu.

- If you connect the projector to an existing network, consult a network administrator before setting server addresses.

3.4 Port Settings

Port Settings Network Control Port1 (Port:33) Portages Available Available option Available Network Control Port2 (Port:9715) Portages Available Available option Available P&Link Port (Port:4352) Portages Available Available option Available My Image Port (Port:9716) Portages Available Available option Available Messenger Port (Port:9719) Portages Available Available option Available

Displays and configures communication port settings.

Item Description
Network Control Port1 (Port:23)	Configures command control port 1 (Port:23).
Port open Click the [Enable] check box to use port 23.
Authentication	Click the [Enable] check box when authentication is required for this port.
Network Control Port2 (Port:9715)	Configures command control port 2 (Port:9715).
Port open Click the [Enable] check box to use port 9715.
Authentication	Click the [Enable] check box when authentication is required for this port.
PJLinkTM Port (Port:4352)	Configures the PJLinkTM port (Port:4352).
Port open	Click the [Enable] check box to use port 4352.
Authentication	Click the [Enable] check box when authentication is required for this port.
My Image Port (Port:9716)	Configures the My Image Port (Port:9716).
Port open Click the [Enable] check box to use port 9716.
Authentication	Click the [Enable] check box when authentication is required for this port.
Messenger Port (Port:9719)	Configures the Messenger Port (Port:9719).
Port open Click the [Enable] check box to use port 9719.
Authentication	Click the [Enable] check box when authentication is required for this port.

3.4 Port Settings (Continued)

Item Description
SNMP Port Configures the SNMP port.
	Port open Click the [Enable] check box to use SNMP.
	Trap address	Configures the destination of the SNMP Trap in IP format.• The address allows not only IP address but also domain name if the valid DNS server is setup in the Network Settings. The maximum length of host or domain name is up to 255 characters.
	Download MIB file	Downloads a MIB file from the projector.
Network Bridge Port		Configures the Bridge port number.
		Input the port number.Except for 9715, 9716, 9719, 9720, 5900, 5500, 4352 between 1024 and 65535 can be set up. It is set to 9717 as the default setting.

Click the [Apply] button to save the settings.

NOTE • The new configuration settings are activated after restarting the network connection. When the configuration settings are changed, you must restart the network connection. You can restart the network connection by clicking the [Network Restart] on the main menu.

3.5 Mail Settings

Mail Settings Send Mail Email1 Survey Address Email 3 mail address Email 4 mail address Send Mail Send Mail Send Mail Send Mail Send Mail Send Mail Send Mail Send Mail Send Mail Send Mail Send Mail Send Mail Send Mail Send Mail Send Mail Send Mail Send Mail Send Mail Send Mail Send Mail Send Mail Send Mail Send Mail Send Mail Send Mail Send Mail Send Mail Send Mail Send Mail Send Mail Send Mail Send Mail Send Mail Send Mail

Displays and configures e-mail addressing settings.

Item Description
Send Mail	Click the [Enable] check box to use the e-mail function.Configure the conditions for sending e-mail under the Alert Settings.
SMTP Server Address	Configures the address of the mail server in IP format.• The address allows not only IP address but also domain name if the valid DNS server is setup in the Network Settings. The maximum length of host or domain name is up to 255 characters.
Sender E-mail address	Configures the sender e-mail address.The length of the sender e-mail address can be up to 255 alphanumeric characters.
Recipient E-mail address	Configures the e-mail address of up to five recipients. You can also specify the [TO] or [CC] for each address. The length of the recipient e-mail address can be up to 255 alphanumeric characters.

Click the [Apply] button to save the settings.

NOTE • You can confirm whether the mail settings work correctly using the [Send Test Mail] button. Please enable Send mail setting before clicking the [Send Test Mail].

- If you connect the projector to an existing network, consult a network administrator before setting server addresses.

3.6 Alert Settings

Alert Settings / Cover Error Multi-Text Multi-Text/Cover Error Multi-Text/Cover Error Multi-Text/Cover Error Multi-Text/Cover Error Multi-Text/Cover Error Multi-Text/Cover Error Multi-Text/Cover Error Multi-Text/Cover Error Multi-Text/Cover Error Multi-Text/Cover Error Multi-Text/Cover Error Multi-Text/Cover Error Multi-Text/Cover Error Multi-Text/Cover Error Multi-Text/Cover Error Multifinal Multifinal Multifinal Multifinal Multifinal Multifinal Multifinal Multifinal Multifinal Multifinal Multifinal Multifinal Multifinal Multifinal Multifinal Multifinal Multifinal Multifinal Multifinal Multifinal Multifinal Multifinal Multifinal Multifinal Multifinal Multifinial Multifinal Multifinal Multifinal Multifinal Multifinal Multifinal Multifinal Multifinal Multifinal Multifinal Multifinal Multifinal Multifinal Multifinal Multifinal Multifinal Multifinal Multifinal Multifinal Multifinal Multifinal Multifinal Multifinal Multifinal Multifina120000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000

Displays and configures failure & alert settings.

Item Description
Cover Error	The lamp cover has not been properly fixed.
Fan Error The cooling fan is not operating.
Lamp Error	The lamp does not light, and there is a possibility that interior portion has become heated.
Temp Error	There is a possibility that the interior portion has become heated.
Lens Door Error The lens door is not opened or closed properly.
Air Flow Error The internal temperature is rising.
Cold Error	There is a possibility that the interior portion has become overcooled.
Filter Error Filter time over.
Other Error	Other error.If displaying this error, please contact your dealer.
Schedule Execution Error	Schedule Execution error. (55)
Lamp Time Alarm Lamp time over Alarm Time setting.
Filter Time Alarm Filter time over Alarm Time setting.
Transition Detector Alarm	Transition Detector Alarm. (SECURITY menu in the User's Manual - Operating Guide)
Cold Start	When the projector is supplied with the power, it works as below.If the STANDBY MODE is set to the NORMAL:the projector's power status changes from "OFF" to "Standby state".If the STANDBY MODE is set to the SAVING:the projector's power status changes from "Standby state" to "ON (lamp is turned on)". (SETUP menu in the User's Manual - Operating Guide)
Authentication Failure	The SNMP access is detected from the invalid SNMP community.

Refer to “Troubleshooting” in the User’s Manual – Operating Guide for further detailed explanation of Error except Other Error and Schedule Execution Error.

3.6 Alert Settings (Continued)

The Alert Items are shown below.

Item Description
Alarm Time	Configures the time to alert.(Only Lamp Time Alarm and Filter Time Alarm.)
SNMP Trap	Click the [Enable] check box to enable SNMP Trap alerts.
Send Mail	Click the [Enable] check box to enable e-mail alerts.(Except Cold Start and Authentication Failure.)
Mail Subject	Configures the subject line of the e-mail to be sent.The length of the subject line can be up to 100 alphanumeric characters.(Except Cold Start and Authentication Failure.)
Mail Text	Configures the text of the e-mail to be sent.The length of the text can be up to 1024 alphanumeric characters, but if you are using some of special characters below the length may be shorter.Special characters '' : & , % \ and space(Except Cold Start and Authentication Failure.)

Click the [Apply] button to save the settings.

NOTE • The trigger of Filter Error e-mail is depending on the FILTER MESSAGE setting in the SERVICE item of the OPTION menu which defines the period until the filter message is displayed on the projector screen. An e-mail will be sent when the usage time of the filter exceeds the time limit that is set. No notification e-mail will be sent if the FILTER MESSAGE is set to TURN OFF. (OPTION menu in the User's Manual – Operating Guide)

• Lamp Time Alarm is defined as a threshold for e-mail notification (reminder) of the lamp timer. When the lamp hour exceeds this threshold that is configured through the Web page, the e-mail will be sent out.
• Filter Time Alarm is defined as a threshold for e-mail notification (reminder) of the filter time. When the filter hour exceeds this threshold that is configured in the Web page, the e-mail will be sent out.

3.7 Schedule Settings

Schedule Settings / Daily Schedule - Enable Add State Command [Parameter] 40:000 Power [OK] 12:000 Power [OFF] My Image My Image My Image My Image My Image My Image My Image My Image My Image My Image My Image My Image My Image My Image My Image My Image My Image My Image My Image My Image My Image My Image My Image My Image My Image My Image My Image My Image My Image My Image My Image My Image My Image My Image MY Image My Image MY Image MY Image MY Image MY Image MY Image MY Image MY Image MY Image MY Image MY Image MY Image MY Image MY Image MY Image MY Image MY Image MY Image MY Image MY Image MY Image MY Image MY Image MY Image MY Image MY Image MY Image MY Image MY Image MY Image MY Image MY Image MY Image MY Image MY Graphs Parameter [Parameter] Output [Output] Load [Load] Save [Save] Save [Save] Save [Save] Save [Save] Save [Save] Save [Save] Save [Save] Save [Save] Save [Save] Save [Save] Save [Save] Save [Save] Save [Save] Save [Save] Save [Save] Save [Save] Save [Save] Save [Save] Save [Save] Save [Save] Save [Save] Save [Save] Save [Save] Save [Save] Save [Save] Save [Solve] Solve [Solve] Solve [Solve] Solve [Solve] Solve [Solve] Solve [Solve] Solve [Solve] Solve [Solve] Solve [Solve] Solve [Solve] Solve [Solve] Solve [Solve] Solve [Solve] Solve [Solve] Solve [Solve] Solve [Solve] Solve [Solve] Solve [Solve]

Displays and configures schedule settings.

Item Description
Daily	Configures the daily schedule.
Sunday	Configures the Sunday schedule.
Monday	Configures the Monday schedule.
Tuesday	Configures the Tuesday schedule.
Wednesday	Configures the Wednesday schedule.
Thursday	Configures the Thursday schedule.
Friday	Configures the Friday schedule.
Saturday	Configures the Saturday schedule.
Specific date No.1	Configures the specific date (No.1) schedule.
Specific date No.2	Configures the specific date (No.2) schedule.
Specific date No.3	Configures the specific date (No.3) schedule.
Specific date No.4	Configures the specific date (No.4) schedule.
Specific date No.5	Configures the specific date (No.5) schedule.

3.7 Schedule Settings (Continued)

The schedule settings are shown below.

Item Description
Schedule Click the [Enable]	check box to enable the schedule.
Date (Month/Day)	Configures the month and date.This item appears only when Specific date (No. 1-5) is selected.

Click the [Apply] button to save the settings.

The current event settings are displayed on the schedule list. To add additional functions and events, set the following items.

Item Description
Time		Configures the time to execute commands.
Command[Parameter]		Configures the commands to be executed.
	Power	Configures the parameters for power control.
	Input Source	Configures the parameters for input switching.
	My Image	Configures the parameters for My Image data display. (70)
	Messenger	Configures the parameters for Messenger data display. (72)
	Slideshow	Configures the Start/Stop parameters for the Slideshow.

Click the [Register] button to add new commands to the schedule list.

Click the [Delete] button to delete commands from the schedule list.

Click the [Reset] button to delete all commands and reset the schedule settings from the schedule list.

3.7 Schedule Settings (Continued)

NOTE • After the projector is moved, check the date and time set for the projector before configuring the schedules. Strong shock may make the date and time settings (58) get out of tune.

- Events “My Image” and “Messenger” will not be executed appropriately but result in “schedule execution error” status in case lamp does not light or/and display data are not stored in the projector at the scheduled event execution time.

- Events “Input Source” and “My Image” will not be executed if security feature is enabled and the projector is locked due to the feature.

- Certain error state in the projector (such as temperature error, lamp error) will prevent the projector from appropriate execution of scheduled functions/events.

- If no USB memory device is inserted to the projector or no image data for display exists at the scheduled event time, a schedule execution error occurs against the scheduled Slideshow event.

- When you start the Slideshow, input source will be automatically switched to the USB TYPE A port.

- Image files stored in the root directory of the USB memory device will be displayed for the scheduled Slideshow.

- Please refer to “Troubleshooting” in the User's Manual – Operating Guide in case scheduled functions/events are not executed appropriately as you've set.

3.8 Date/Time Settings

Date/Time Settings Current Date Current Time Number of Habitat Settings Hours 108 Total Time Difference MUST 108 Cycles To apply changes to date/time settings, click apply, then perform. Network Reset.

Displays and configures the date and time settings.

Item Description
Current Date			Configures the current date in year/month/day format.
Current Time			Configures the current time in hour:minute:second format.
Daylight Savings Time			Click the [ON] check box to enable daylight savings time and set the following items.
Start			Configures the date and time daylight savings time begins.
			Month
			Week
			Day
			Time
			hour
			minute
End			Configures the day of the week daylight savings time begins (Sun, Mon, Tue, Wed, Thu, Fri, Sat).
			Time
			hour
			minute

3.8 Date/Time Settings (Continued)

Item Description
Time difference	Configures the time difference. Set the same time difference as the one set on your computer. If unsure, consult your IT manager.
SNTP	Click the [ON] check box to retrieve Date and Time information from the SNTP server and set the following items.
SNTP Server Address	Configures the SNTP server address in IP format.• The address allows not only IP address but also domain name if the valid DNS server is setup in the Network Settings. The maximum length of host or domain name is up to 255 characters.
Cycle	Configures the interval at which to retrieve Date and Time information from the SNTP server (hour:minute).

Click the [Apply] button to save the settings.

NOTE • The new configuration settings are activated after restarting the network connection. When the configuration settings are changed, you must restart the network connection. You can restart the network connection by clicking the [Network Restart] on the main menu.

• If you connect the projector to an existing network, consult a network administrator before setting server addresses.
• To enable the SNTP function, the time difference must be set.
• The projector will retrieve Date and Time information from the time server and override time settings when SNTP is enabled.
• The internal clock's time may not remain accurate. Using SNTP is recommended to maintain accurate time.

3.9 Security Settings

Security Settings / User Account User account Password No select Password To apply changes to security settings: click Apply, then perform "User Account Restart"

Displays and configures passwords and other security settings.

Item Description
User Account	Configures the user name and password.
User name	Configures the user name.The length of the text can be up to 32 alphanumeric characters.
Password	Configures the password.The length of the text can be up to 255 alphanumeric characters.
Re-enter Password	Reenter the above password for verification.
Network Control	Configures the Authentication password for the command control.
Authentication Password	Configures the Authentication password. The length of the text can be up to 32 alphanumeric characters.
Re-enter Authentication Password	Reenter the above password for verification.
SNMP	Configures the community name if SNMP is used.
Community name	Configures the community name. The length of the text can be up to 64 alphanumeric characters.

Click the [Apply] button to save the settings.

NOTE • The new configuration settings are activated after restarting the network connection. When the configuration settings are changed, you must restart the network connection. You can restart the network connection by clicking the [Network Restart] on the main menu.

- Only numbers '0-9' and alphabet 'a-z', 'A-Z' can be used.

3.10 Projector Control

Project Data - Workforce System Project Data - Projectors Project Control / MAIN Project ID: 100 Project Source: Project Mode: BLANK ON/OFF: 100 MOUNT: 100 FROSET: 100 MAGNET: 100 MAGNET POSITION: 100 MAGNET POSITION II: 100 TEMPLATE: 100 MY STRADE: 100 MY STRADE SIZE: 100 Value: [Close @ to #] Value: [Close @ to #] Value: [Close @ to #] Name: Name: Name: Name: Name: Name: Name: Name: Name: Name: Name: Name: Name: Name: Name: Name: Name: Name: Name: Name: Name: Name: Name: Name: Name: Name: Name: Name: Name: Name: Name: Name: Name: Name: Name: Name: Name: Name: Name: Name: Name: Name: Name: Name: Name: Name: Name: Name: Name: Name: Name:

The items shown in the table below can be performed using the Projector Control menu.

Select an item with the mouse.

Most of the items have a submenu. Refer to the table below for details.

NOTE • The setting value may not match with the actual value if the user changes the value manually. In that case, please refresh the page by clicking the [Refresh] button.

Controls the projector.

Item Description
MAIN
POWER Turns the power on/off.
INPUT SOURCE Selects the input source.
PICTURE MODE Selects the picture mode setting.
BLANK ON/OFF Turns Blank on/off.
MUTE Turns Mute on/off.
FREEZE Turns Freeze on/off.
MAGNIFY	Controls the magnify setting.In some input signal sources, it might stop “Magnify” even though it does not reach to maximum setting value.
MAGNIFY POSITION V	Adjusts the vertical magnify position.
MAGNIFY POSITION H	Adjusts the horizontal magnify position.
TEMPLATE Turns template on/off.
MY IMAGE Selects MY IMAGE data.
MY IMAGE DELETE Deletes MY IMAGE data.

3.10 Projector Control (Continued)

Item Description
PICTURE
BRIGHTNESS Adjusts the brightness setting.
CONTRAST Adjusts the contrast setting.
GAMMA Selects the gamma setting.
COLOR TEMP Selects the color temperature setting.
COLOR Adjusts the color setting.
TINT Adjusts the tint setting.
SHARPNESS Adjusts the sharpness setting.
ACTIVE IRIS Selects the active iris setting.
MYMEMORY SAVE Saves the MyMemory data.
MYMEMORY RECALL Recalls the MyMemory data.
IMAGE
ASPECT Selects the aspect setting.
OVER SCAN Adjusts the over scan setting.
V POSITION Adjusts the vertical position.
H POSITION		Adjusts the horizontal position.
H PHASE		Adjusts the horizontal phase.
H SIZE		Adjusts the horizontal size.
AUTO ADJUST EXECUTE		Performs the automatic adjustment.
INPUT
PROGRESSIVE		Selects the progressive setting.
VIDEO NR		Selects the video noise reduction setting.
COLOR SPACE		Selects the color space.
S-VIDEO FORMAT		Selects the s-video format setting.
C-VIDEO FORMAT		Selects the video format setting.
HDMI FORMAT		Selects the HDMI^TM format setting.
HDMI RANGE		Selects the HDMI^TM range setting.
COMPUTER IN1		Selects the COMPUTER IN1 input signal type.
COMPUTER IN2		Selects the COMPUTER IN2 input signal type.
FRAME LOCK - COMPUTER IN1		Turns the FRAME LOCK-COMPUTER IN1 function on/off.
FRAME LOCK - COMPUTER IN2		Turns the FRAME LOCK-COMPUTER IN2 function on/off.
FRAME LOCK - HDMI		Turns the FRAME LOCK-HDMI function on/off.
Item Description
SETUP
	D-ZOOM Adjusts the zoom.
	D-SHIFT V Adjusts the vertical picture position.
	D-SHIFT H Adjusts the horizontal picture position.
	PICTURE POSITION Selects the vertical picture position.
	KEYSTONE V Adjusts the vertical keystone distortion setting.
	KEYSTONE H Adjusts the horizontal keystone distortion setting.
	PERFECT FIT	Adjusts the shape of the projected image in each of the corners and sides.
	AUTO ECO MODE Turns on/off the automatic eco mode function.
	ECO MODE Selects the eco mode.
	MIRROR Selects the mirror status.
	STANDBY MODE Selects the standby mode.
	MONITOR OUT - COMPUTER IN1	Assigns the MONITOR OUT when the COMPUTER IN1 input port is selected.
	MONITOR OUT - COMPUTER IN2	Assigns the MONITOR OUT when the COMPUTER IN2 input port is selected.
	MONITOR OUT - LAN	Assigns the MONITOR OUT when the LAN input port is selected.
	MONITOR OUT - USB TYPE A	Assigns the MONITOR OUT when the USB TYPE A input port is selected.
	MONITOR OUT - USB TYPE B	Assigns the MONITOR OUT when the USB TYPE B input port is selected.
	MONITOR OUT - HDMI	Assigns the MONITOR OUT when the HDMI input port is selected.
	MONITOR OUT - S-VIDEO	Assigns the MONITOR OUT when the S-VIDEO input port is selected.
	MONITOR OUT - VIDEO	Assigns the MONITOR OUT when the VIDEO input port is selected.
	MONITOR OUT - STANDBY	Assigns the MONITOR OUT in the standby mode.
Item Description
AUDIO
VOLUME Adjusts the volume setting.
SPEAKER Turns the built-in speaker on/off.
AUDIO SOURCE - COMPUTER IN1	Assigns the AUDIO SOURCE - COMPUTER IN1 input port.
AUDIO SOURCE - COMPUTER IN2	Assigns the AUDIO SOURCE - COMPUTER IN2 input port.
AUDIO SOURCE - LAN	Assigns the AUDIO SOURCE - LAN input port.
AUDIO SOURCE - USB TYPE A	Assigns the AUDIO SOURCE - USB TYPE A input port.
AUDIO SOURCE - USB TYPE B	Assigns the AUDIO SOURCE - USB TYPE B input port.
AUDIO SOURCE - HDMI	Assigns the AUDIO SOURCE - HDMI input port.
AUDIO SOURCE - S-VIDEO	Assigns the AUDIO SOURCE - S-VIDEO input port.
AUDIO SOURCE - VIDEO	Assigns the AUDIO SOURCE - VIDEO input port.
AUDIO SOURCE - STANDBY	Assigns the AUDIO SOURCE in the standby mode.
HDMI AUDIO Selects the HDMI TM audio setting.
MIC LEVEL Selects the microphone level.
MIC VOLUME Adjusts the microphone volume setting.
SCREEN
LANGUAGE Selects the language for the OSD.
MENU POSITION V Adjusts the vertical Menu position.
MENU POSITION H Adjusts the horizontal Menu position.
BLANK Selects the Blank mode.
START UP Selects the start up screen mode.
MyScreen Lock Turns MyScreen lock function on/off.
MESSAGE Turns the message function on/off.
TEMPLATE Selects the template setting.
C.C. - DISPLAY	Selects Closed Caption DISPLAY setting.
C.C. - MODE	Selects Closed Caption MODE setting.
C.C. - CHANNEL	Selects Closed Caption CHANNEL setting.

3.10 Projector Control (Continued)

Item Description
OPTION
AUTO SEARCH Turns the automatic signal search function on/off.
DIRECT POWER ON Turns the direct power on function on/off.
AUTO POWER OFF	Configures the timer to shut off the projector when no signal is detected.
USB TYPE B Selects the USB TYPE B setting.
MY BUTTON-1	Assigns the functions for the MY BUTTON-1 button on the included remote control.
MY BUTTON-2	Assigns the functions for the MY BUTTON-2 button on the included remote control.
MY SOURCE Selects the My Source setting.
REMOTE FREQ. - NORMAL	Turns the remote control signal frequency normal function on/off.
REMOTE FREQ. - HIGH	Turns the remote control signal frequency high function on/off.

3. Web Control

3.10 Projector Control (Continued)

Projector Control / Service Confirm! Call the Substrate - Start Projector Mode Start Projector Mode Projector Control MAIN PECTUBE ONLINE INPUT NETTOP ASSETS SCREEN OPTION MODEL2 Remote Control

The items shown in the table below can be performed using the Projector Control menu. Click the [Quit Presenter Mode].

Item Description
SERVICE
Quit Presenter Mode	Quit compulsorily from the Presenter mode.

3.11 Remote Control

Remote Control Maps Network Information Network Settings Port Settings Mail Settings Alert Settings Scheduler Settings Data/Time Settings Security Settings Projector Control Projector Control Projector Status Network Support COMMENTS COMMENTS OPEN FLOW FROCCOL NOTE NEW SELECT SELECT SELECT SELECT SELECT SELECT SELECT SELECT SELECT SELECT SELECT SELECT SELECT SELECT SELECT SELECT SELECT SELECT SELECT SELECT SELECT SELECT SELECT SELECT SELECT SELECT SELECT SELECT SELECT SELECT SELECT SELECT SELECT SELECT SELECT SELECT SELECT SELECT SELECT SELECT SELECT SELECT SELECT SELECT SELECT SELECT SELECT SELECT SELECT SELECT USE

You can use your Web browser to control the projector.

- Do not attempt to control the projector with the projector's remote control and via your Web browser at the same time. It may cause some operational errors in the projector.

The functions on the bundled remote control are assigned to the Web Remote Control screen.

Item Description
POWER Assigned the same operation as STANDBY/ON button.
COMPUTER Assigned the same operation as COMPUTER button.
VIDEO Assigned the same operation as VIDEO button.
BLANK Assigned the same operation as BLANK button.
FREEZE Assigned the same operation as FREEZE button.
MUTE Assigned the same operation as MUTE button.
MENU Assigned the same operation as MENU button.
▲ Assigned the same operation as ▲ button.
▼ Assigned the same operation as ▼ button.
◀ Assigned the same operation as ◀ button.
▶ Assigned the same operation as ▶ button.
ENTER Assigned the same operation as ENTER button.
RESET Assigned the same operation as RESET button.
PAGE UP Assigned the same operation as PAGE UP button.
PAGE DOWN	Assigned the same operation as PAGE DOWN button.
SLIDESHOW	Starts the Slideshow.

NOTE • The Web Remote Control does not support repeat function that performs an action while holding a button clicked down.

• Since the repeat function is not available, click the button repeatedly as many times as you require.
• Even if you hold the button clicked down for a while, the Web Remote Control sends your request command one time only. Release the button, then click it again.
• When the [POWER] button is pushed, a message window comes up to confirm the operation. To control the power, push [OK], otherwise push [Cancel].
• The [PAGE DOWN] and [PAGE UP] buttons on the Web Remote Control cannot be used as mouse emulation function of the projector.

3.12 Projector Status

Projector Status Current Status NORMAL Late Time 10 h More Time 30 h Present Status 104 Input Status COMPUTER INS Mount the I/OFF OFF Move OFF Freeport NORMAL Status/Time Settings Security Settings Projector Control Remote Control Projector Status Network Start

Displays and configures the current projector status.

Item Description
Error Status Displays the current error status
Lamp Time Displays the usage time for the current lamp.
Filter Time	Displays the usage time for the current filter.
Power Status Displays the current power status.
Input Status Displays the current input signal source.
Blank On/Off Displays the current Blank on/off status.
Mute Displays the current Mute on/off status.
Freeze Displays the current Freeze status.

3.13 Network Restart

Network Restart Confirm! Confirming request user to log in order to further control in configure the provider on a web browser Cancel

Restarts the projector's network connection.

Item Description
Restart	Restarts the projector's network connection in order to activate new configuration settings.

NOTE • Restarting requires you to re-log on in order to further control or configure the projector via a web browser. Wait 30 seconds or more after clicking the [Restart] button to log on again.

4. My Image Function

4. My Image Function

The projector can display still images that are transferred via the network.

graph TD
    A["Computer"] -->|Transfer image data| B["Printer"]
    B --> C["Display image data (1 - 4)"]
    subgraph Image Data
        D["2005"] --> E["Stack A: ~300 units, Layer B: ~150 units, Layer C: ~100 units"]
    end
    subgraph Display Data
        F["2006"] --> G["Stack B: ~350 units, Layer A: ~180 units, Layer B: ~150 units, Layer C: ~100 units"]
    end
    D --> H["2007"] --> I["Stack B: ~400 units, Layer A: ~200 units, Layer B: ~150 units, Layer C: ~100 units"]

MY IMAGE transmission requires an exclusive application for your computer. Use the application to transfer the image data.

It can be downloaded from the Hitachi web site (http://www.hitachi-america.us/digitalmedia or http://www.hitachidigitalmedia.com).

Refer to the manual for the application for instructions.

To display the transferred image, select the MY IMAGE item in the NETWORK menu. For more information, please see the description of the MY IMAGE item of the NETWORK menu. (NETWORK menu in User's Manual – Operating Guide)

NOTE • It is possible to allocate the image file up to 4 in the maximum.

• Using MY BUTTON that registered MY IMAGE can display transferred image. (OPTION menu in the User's Manual – Operating Guide)
• The image file also can be displayed by using schedule function from the web browser. Refer to item 7.3 Event Scheduling (81) in detail.
• If you display MY IMAGE data on screen while you are using the USB Display function, the application for the USB Display will be closed. To restart the application, exit the MY IMAGE function, and then the software in the projector, LiveViewerLiteUSB.exe, will run again. (USB Display in the User's Manual – Operating Guide)

4. My Image Function (Continued)

Configure the following items from a web browser when MY IMAGE function is used.

Example: If the IP address of the projector is set to 192.168.1.10:

1) Enter "http://192.168.1.10/" into the address bar of the web browser.

2) Enter your user name and password, and then click the [OK].

3) Click the [Port Settings] on the main menu.

4) Click the [Enable] check box to open the My Image Port (Port: 9716). Click the [Enable] check box for the [Authentication] setting when authentication is required, otherwise clear the check box.

5) Click the [Apply] button to save the settings.

Top Network Information Network Settings Port Settings Mail Settings Abort Settings Schedule Settings Status/Time Settings Security Settings Projector Control Normalized Control Projector Monitor Network Protocol Part Settings Network Control Port (Port:32) Port Options Accessible Accessible Network Control Port (Port:3710) Port options Accessible Possible responses Accessible PJLink Port (Port:4302) Port options Accessible Possible responses Accessible By Image Port (Port:5716) Port options Accessible Possible responses Accessible Bessenger Port (Port:5719) Port options Accessible Possible responses Accessible

When the authentication setting is enabled, the following settings are required.

6) Click the [Security Settings] on the main menu.
7) Select the [Network Control] and enter the desired authentication password.
8) Click the [Apply] button to save the settings.

NOTE • The Authentication Password will be the same for Network Control Port1 (Port: 23), Network Control Port2 (Port: 9715), PJLink™ Port (Port: 4352), My Image Port (Port: 9716) and Messenger Port (Port: 9719).

- The new configuration settings are activated after restarting the network connection. When the configuration settings are changed, you must restart the network connection. You can restart the network connection by clicking the [Network Restart] on the main menu.

5. Messenger Function

5. Messenger Function

The projector can display the text data transferred via the network on the screen. The text data can be displayed on the screen in two ways that displays the text transferred from the computer on real time, and the other chooses and displays the text data from the ones once stored in the projector.

graph TD
    A["Computer"] -->|Transfer text data| B["Electronic Device"]
    B --> C["Display text data (ex. 4)"]
    D["Today's Topics"] --> E["The chemical class is canceled"]
    D --> F["The PE is performed at gym because today due to bad weather."]
    G["1 abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz"] --> H["2 ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ"]
    I["3 0123456789"] --> J["4 Today's Topics The chemical ..."]

Messenger function requires an exclusive application for your computer. To edit, transfer and display the text data, use the application. You can download it from the Hitachi web site (http://www.hitachi-america.us/digitalmedia or http://www.hitachidigitalmedia.com). Refer to the manual for the application for the details of Messenger function and instructions of the application.

NOTE • It is possible to store the text data up to 12 in the maximum.

• Using MY BUTTON that registered MESSENGER can turn the displaying messenger text on/off. (OPTION menu in the User's Manual – Operating Guide)
• The text file also can be displayed by using schedule function via the web browser. Refer to item 7.3 Event Scheduling (81) for the detail.

5. Messenger Function (Continued)

Configure the following items from a web browser when Messenger function is used.

Example: If the IP address of the projector is set to 192.168.1.10:

1) Enter "http://192.168.1.10/" into the address bar of the web browser.

2) Enter your user name and password, and then click the [OK].

3) Click the [Port Settings] on the main menu.

4) Click the [Enable] check box to open the Messenger Port (Port: 9719). Click the [Enable] check box for the [Authentication] setting when authentication is required, otherwise clear the check box.

5) Click the [Apply] button to save the settings.

Top Network Information Network Settings Port Settings Mail Settings Abort Settings Schedule Settings Date/Time Settings Security Settings Projector Control Normalized Control Projector Status Network Protocol Port Settings Network Control Port (Port:32) Port space Accessible Accessible Network Control Port (Port:3710) Port space Accessible Portfolio System Accessible PJLink Port (Port:4302) Port space Accessible Portfolio System Accessible By Image Port (Port:5718) Port space Accessible Portfolio System Accessible Bessenger Port (Port:5719) Port space Accessible Portfolio System Accessible

When the authentication setting is enabled, the following settings are required.

6) Click the [Security Settings] on the main menu.
7) Select the [Network Control] and enter the desired authentication password.
8) Click the [Apply] button to save the settings.

NOTE • The Authentication Password will be the same for Network Control Port1 (Port: 23), Network Control Port2 (Port: 9715), PJLink™ Port (Port: 4352), My Image Port (Port: 9716) and Messenger Port (Port: 9719).

- The new configuration settings are activated after restarting the network connection. When the configuration settings are changed, you must restart the network connection. You can restart the network connection by clicking the [Network Restart] on the main menu.

6. Network Bridge Function

This projector is equipped with the NETWORK BRIDGE function to perform mutual conversion of a network protocol and a serial interface.

Using the NETWORK BRIDGE function, a computer that is connected with this projector by Ethernet communication can control an external device that is connected with this projector by RS-232C communication as a network terminal.

graph LR
    A["Computer"] -->|TCP/IP data Serial change| B["External device"]
    B -->|RS-232C cable| C["Control port"]
    C -->|LAN cable| D["Computer"]
    D -->|Ethernet| E["External device"]
    E -->|Protocol change| B

6.1 Connecting devices

1) Connect the projector's LAN port and the computer's LAN port with a LAN cable, for Ethernet communication.
2) Connect the projector's CONTROL port and the device's RS-232C port with an RS-232C cable, for RS-232C communication.

NOTE • Before connecting the devices, read the manuals for the devices to ensure the connection.

For RS-232C connection, check the specifications of each port and use the suitable cable. (“Connection to the ports” in the User’s Manual – Operating Guide (Technical))

6.2 Communication setup

To configure the setup of the communication using NETWORK BRIDGE for the projector, use items in the COMMUNICATION menu. Open the menu of the projector and select the OPTION - SERVICE - COMMUNICATION menu.

(OPTION menu – SERVICE – COMMUNICATION in the User’s Manual – Operating Guide)

1) Using the COMMUNICATION TYPE menu, select the NETWORK BRIDGE for the CONTROL port.
2) Using the SERIAL SETTINGS menu, select the proper baud rate and parity for the CONTROL port, according to the specification of the RS-232C port of the connected device.

Item Condition

BAUD RATE 4800bps/9600bps/19200bps/38400bps

PARITY NONE/ODD/EVEN

Data length 8 bit (fixed)

Start bit 1 bit (fixed)

Stop bit 1 bit (fixed)

3) Using the TRANSMISSION METHOD menu, set up the proper method for the CONTROL port according to your use.

NOTE • The OFF is selected for the COMMUNICATION TYPE as the default setting.
- Using the COMMUNICATION menu, set up the communication. Remember that an unsuitable setup could cause malfunction of communication.
- When COMMUNICATION TYPE is set to NETWORK BRIDGE, the CONTROL port doesn't accept RS-232C commands.

6.3 Communication port

For the NETWORK BRIDGE function, send the data from the computer to the projector with using the Network Bridge Port that is configured in the “Port Settings” of web browser. (51)

NOTE • Except for 9715, 9716, 9719, 9720, 5900, 5500, 4352 between 1024 and 65535 can be set up as the Network Bridge Port number. It is set to 9717 as the default setting.

6.4 Transmission method

The transmission method can be selected from the menus, only when the NETWORK BRIDGE is selected for the COMMUNICATION TYPE.

(OPTION menu – SERVICE – COMMUNICATION in the User’s Manual – Operating Guide)

HALF-DUPLEX FULL-DUPLEX

6.4.1 HALF-DUPLEX

This method lets the projector make two way communication, but only one direction, either transmitting or receiving data, is allowed at a time.

The method does not allow the projector to receive the data from the computer while waiting for response data from an external device. After the projector receives the response data from an external device or the response limit time is past, the projector can receive the data from the computer.

That means that the projector controls transmitting and receiving the data to synchronize the communication.

To use the HALF-DUPLEX method, set up the RESPONSE LIMIT TIME following the instructions below.

graph TD
    A["Computer"] -->|TCP/IP data Serial/Tool change| B["External device"]
    B -->|RS-232C cable| C["Computer"]
    C -->|Ethernet LAN cable| D["Computer"]
    D -->|Transmitting data| E["External Device"]
    E -->|Transmitting data| F["External Device"]
    F -->|Transmitting data| G["External Device"]
    G -->|Discarding data| H["External Device"]
    H -->|Response data| I["External Device"]
    I -->|Response limit time| J["External Device"]
    J -->|Response data| K["External Device"]
    K -->|Transmitting data| L["External Device"]
    L -->|Transmitting data| M["External Device"]

Using the RESPONSE LIMIT TIME menu, set the waiting time for response data from an external device. (OPTION menu – SERVICE – COMMUNICATION in the User’s Manual – Operating Guide)

$$ O F F \leftrightarrow 1 s \leftrightarrow 2 s \leftrightarrow 3 s (\leftrightarrow O F F) $$

6.4 Transmission method (Continued)

NOTE • With using the HALF-DUPLEX method, the projector can send out 254 byte data as maximum at once.
- If it is not required to monitor the response data from an external device and the RESPONSE LIMIT TIME is set to OFF, the projector can receive the data from the computer and send it out to an external device continuously.
The OFF is selected as the default setting.

6.4.2 FULL-DUPLEX

This method lets the projector make two way communication, transmitting and receiving data at the same time, without monitoring response data from an external device.

With using this method, the computer and an external device will send the data out of synchronization. If it is required to synchronize them, set the computer to make the synchronization.

NOTE • In case that the computer controls to synchronize transmitting and receiving the data, it may not be able to control an external device well depending on the processing status of the projector.

7. Other Functions

7. Other Functions

7.1 E-mail Alerts

The projector can automatically send an alert message to the specified e-mail addresses when the projector detects a certain condition that is requiring maintenance or detected an error.

NOTE • Up to five e-mail addresses can be specified.

- The projector may be not able to send e-mail if the projector suddenly loses power.

Mail Settings (52)

To use the projector's e-mail alert function, please configure the following items through a web browser.

Example: If the IP address of the projector is set to 192.168.1.10:

1) Enter "http://192.168.1.10/" into the address bar of the web browser.
2) Enter your user name and password, and then click the [OK].
3) Click the [Mail Settings] and configure each item. Refer to item 3.5 Mail Settings (52) for further information.
4) Click the [Apply] button to save the settings.

NOTE • Click the [Send Test Mail] button in the [Mail Settings] to confirm that the e-mail settings are correct. The following mail will be delivered to the specified addresses.

Subject line :Test Mail

Text :Send Test Mail
Date <Testing date>
Time <Testing time>
IP Address <Projector IP address>
MAC Address <Projector MAC address> 

7.1 E-mail Alerts (Continued)

5) Click the [Alert Settings] on the main menu to configure the E-mail Alerts settings.
6) Select and configure each alert item. Refer to item 3.6 Alert Setting (53) for further information.
7) Click the [Apply] button to save the settings.

Failure/Warning e-mails are formatted as follows:

Subject line :

Text :

Date

Time

IP Address

MAC Address

7.2 Projector Management using SNMP

The SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) enables to manage the projector information, which is a failure or warning status, from the computer on the network. The SNMP management software will be required on the computer to use this function.

NOTE • It is recommended that SNMP functions be carried out by a network administrator.
- SNMP management software must be installed on the computer to monitor the projector via SNMP.

SNMP Settings (51)

Configure the following items via a web browser to use SNMP.

Example: If the IP address of the projector is set to 192.168.1.10:

1) Enter "http://192.168.1.10/" into the address bar of the web browser.
2) Enter your user name and password, and then click the [OK].
3) Click the [Port Settings] on the main menu.
4) Click the [Download MIB file] to download a MIB file.

NOTE • To use the downloaded MIB file, specify the file by your SNMP manager.

5) Click the [Enable] check box to open the SNMP Port. Set the IP address to send the SNMP trap to when a Failure/Warning occurs.

NOTE • A Network Restart is required after the SNMP Port configuration settings have been changed. Click the [Network Restart] and configure the following items.

6) Click the [Security Settings] on the main menu.
7) Click the [SNMP] and set the community name on the screen that is displayed.

NOTE • A Network Restart is required after the Community name has been changed. Click the [Network Restart] and configure the following items.

8) Configure the settings for Trap transmission of Failures/Warnings. Click the [Alert Settings] on the main menu and select the Failure/Warning item to be configured.
9) Click the [Enable] check box to send out the SNMP trap for Failures/Warnings. Clear the [Enable] check box when SNMP trap transmission is not required.
10) Click the [Apply] button to save the settings.

7.3 Event Scheduling

The scheduling function enables to setup scheduled events including power on / power off. It enables to be “self-management” projector.

Schedule Settings / Daily Schedule Enable Apply Show Command [Parameter] 20:00 Power [OK] 17:00 Power [OFF] Power [OK] Input Screen [TCP/IP] My Image [Image ID] Message [Image ID] Midstream [Image ID] Show Command [Parameter] Include Send Send Send Send Send Send Send Send Send Send Send Send Send Send Send Send Send Send Send Send Send Send Send Send Send Send Send Send Send Send Send Send Send Send Send Send Send Send Send Send Send Send Send Send Send Send Send Send Send Send Sensory Settings

NOTE • You can schedule the following control events: Power, Input Source, My Image, Messenger, Slideshow. (56)

- The power on / off event has the lowest priority among the all events that are defined at the same time.

- There are 3 types of Scheduling, 1) daily 2) weekly 3) specific date. (55)

- The priority for scheduled events is as follows 1) specific date 2) weekly 3) daily.

- Up to five specific dates are available for scheduled events. Priority is given to those with the lower numbers when more than one event has been scheduled for the same date and time (e.g., 'Specific date No. 1' has priority over 'Specific date No. 2' and so on.

- Be sure to set the date and time before enabling scheduled events. (58)

7.3 Event Scheduling(Continued)

Schedule Settings (55)

Schedule settings can be configured from a web browser.

Example: If the IP address of the projector is set to 192.168.1.10:

1) Enter "http://192.168.1.10/" into the address bar of the web browser.
2) Enter your user name and password, and then click the [OK].
3) Click the [Schedule Settings] on the main menu and select the required schedule item. For example, if you want to perform the command every Sunday, please select the [Sunday].
4) Click the [Enable] check box to enable scheduling.
5) Enter the date (month/day) for specific date scheduling.
6) Click the [Apply] button to save the settings.
7) After configure the time, command and parameters, click the [Register] to add the new event.
8) Click the [Delete] button when you want to delete a schedule.

There are three types of scheduling.

1) Daily: Perform the specified operation at a specified time every day.
2) Sunday \~ Saturday: Perform the specified operation at the specified time on a specified day of the week.
3) Specific date: Perform the specified operation on the specified date and time.

NOTE • In standby mode, the POWER indicator will flash green for approx. 3 seconds when at least 1 “Power ON” schedule is saved.

- When the schedule function is used, the power cord must be connected to the projector and the outlet. The schedule function does not work when the breaker in a room is tripped. The power indicator will lights orange or green when the projector is receiving AC power.

7.3 Event Scheduling(Continued)

Date/Time Settings (58)

The Date/Time setting can be adjusted via a web browser.

Example: If the IP address of the projector is set to 192.168.1.10:

1) Enter "http://192.168.1.10/" into the address bar of the web browser.
2) Enter your user name and password, and then click the [OK].
3) Click the [Date/Time Settings] on the main menu and configure each item.
Refer to item 3.8 Date/Time Settings (58) for further information.
4) Click the [Apply] button to save the settings.

Date/Time Settings Current Date Current Floor Straightfoot Coverage Time 1:01 End Time Difference SN17 SN3F Server Address 1:00 Cardt To apply changes to date/time settings, click Apply, then perform Network Reset.

NOTE • The battery for the built in clock may be dead if the clock loses time even when the date and time have been set correctly. Replace the battery by following the instructions on replacing the battery.

(Replacing the internal clock battery in the User's Manual (concise))

- The internal clock's time may not remain accurate. Using SNTP is recommended to maintain accurate time.

7. Other Functions

7.4 Command Control via the Network

You can configure and control the projector via the network using RS-232C commands.

Communication Port

The following two ports are assigned for the command control.

TCP #23 (Network Control Port1 (Port: 23)) TCP #9715 (Network Control Port2 (Port: 9715))

NOTE • Command control is available only via the specified port above.

Command Control Settings (50)

Configure the following items from a web browser when command control is used.

Example: If the IP address of the projector is set to 192.168.1.10:

1) Enter "http://192.168.1.10/" into the address bar of the web browser.
2) Enter your user name and password, and then click the [OK].
3) Click the [Port Settings] on the main menu.

Port Settings Network Control Port1 (Port:23) Port10000 Autoport00000 Network Control Port2 (Port:9715) Port10000 Autoport00000 P/Link Port (Port:4352) Port10000 Autoport00000 My Image Port (Port:9716) Port10000 Autoport00000 Messenger Port (Port:9715) Port10000 Autoport00000

4) Click the [Enable] check box to open Network Control Port1 (Port: 23) to use TCP #23. Click the [Enable] check box for the [Authentication] setting when authentication is required, otherwise clear the check box.
5) Click the [Enable] check box to open Network Control Port2 (Port: 9715) to use TCP #9715. Click the [Enable] check box for the [Authentication] setting when authentication is required, otherwise clear the check box.
6) Click the [Apply] button to save the settings.

7.4 Command Control via the Network (Continued)

When the authentication setting is enabled, the following settings are required.

7) Click the [Security Settings] on the main menu.
8) Click the [Network Control] and enter the desired authentication password.

* See NOTE.

9) Click the [Apply] button to save the settings.

NOTE • The Authentication Password will be the same for Network Control Port1 (Port: 23), Network Control Port2 (Port: 9715), PJLink™ Port (Port: 4352), My Image Port (Port: 9716) and Messenger Port (Port: 9719).

- The new configuration settings are activated after restarting the network connection. When the configuration settings are changed, you must restart the network connection. You can restart the network connection by clicking the [Network Restart] on the main menu.

7.4 Command Control via the Network (Continued)

Command Format

Command formats differ among the different communication ports.

- TCP #23

You can use the RS-232C commands without any changes. The reply data format is the same as the RS-232C commands. (☐“RS-232C

Communication" in the User's Manual – Operating Guide (Technical)

However, the following reply will be sent back in the event of authentication failure when authentication is enabled.

Reply Error code
0x1F 0x04 0x00

- TCP #9715

Send Data format

The following formatting is added to the header (0 x 02), Data length (0 x 0D), Checksum (1 byte) and Connection ID (1 byte) of the RS-232C commands.

Header Data length RS-232Ccommand Check Sum				Connection ID
0x02 0x0D	13 bytes 1 byte	1 byte

Header → 0x02, Fixed

Data length → RS-232C commands byte length (0x0D, Fixed)

RS-232C command → RS-232C commands that start with 0xBE 0xEF (13 bytes)

Check Sum → This is the value to make zero on the addition of the lower 8 bits from the header to the checksum.

Connection ID → Random value from 0 to 255 (This value is attached to the reply data)

7.4 Command Control via the Network (Continued)

Reply Data format

The connection ID (the data is same as the connection ID data on the sending data format) is attached to the RS-232C commands reply data.

Reply	Connection ID
0x06 1 byte

Reply	Connection ID
0x15 1 byte

Reply Error code	Connection ID
0x1C 2 bytes 1 byte

Reply Data		Connection ID
0x1D 2 bytes 1 byte

Reply Status code	Connection ID
0x1F 2 bytes 1 byte

Reply	Authentication Error code		Connection ID
0x1F 0x04	0x00 1 byte

7. Other Functions

7.4 Command Control via the Network (Continued)

Automatic Connection Break

The TCP connection will be automatically disconnected after there is no communication for 30 seconds after being established.

Authentication

The projector does not accept commands without authentication success when authentication is enabled. The projector uses a challenge response type authentication with an MD5 (Message Digest 5) algorithm.

When the projector is using a LAN, a random 8 bytes will be returned if authentication is enabled. Bind this received 8 bytes and the Authentication Password and digest this data with the MD5 algorithm and add this in front of the commands to send.

Following is a sample if the Authentication Password is set to "password" and the random 8 bytes are "a572f60c".

1) Connect the projector.
2) Receive the random 8 bytes "a572f60c" from the projector.
3) Bind the random 8 bytes "a572f60c" and the Authentication Password "password" and it becomes "a572f60cpassword".
4) Digest this bind "a572f60cpassword" with MD5 algorithm. It will be "e3d97429adffa11bce1f7275813d4bde".
5) Add this "e3d97429adffa11bce1f7275813d4bde" in front of the commands and send the data. Send "e3d97429adffa11bce1f7275813d4bde"+command.
6) When the sending data is correct, the command will be performed and the reply data will be returned. Otherwise, an authentication error will be returned.

NOTE • As for the transmission of the second or subsequent commands, the authentication data can be omitted when the same connection.

1. Troubleshooting

Problem Likely		Cause Things to Check		Reference Page Number
No image		The projector is not turned on.	Is the projector's lamp on? *18
		The projector's input source isn't switched to LAN.	Is the projector switched to LAN?	*20, *21
Connection to the Network	The projector that you want to connect to is nowhere to be found on the list of available projectors	The computer and/or projector's network settings are not configured correctly.	Check the network configurations of the computer and projector. If you change the projector's settings, turn off the projector's AC power and then turn it on again. If you simply put the projector in STANDBY power mode and then turn it on again, the new settings might not take effect.	-
		Firewall software other than Windows® Firewall is installed in your computer.	Refer to the manual for the firewall software and take one of the following actions: - Exclude the "LiveViewer" from blocking item list - Disable the firewall while using the "LiveViewer"	-
	Can't communicate	The computer and/or projector's network settings are not configured correctly.	Check the network configurations of the computer and projector.	-
		An access point is used, and your computer is connected to the access point via wireless LAN.	Use network utilities that may come with your computer or wireless LAN card to establish wireless network connection. For detail, refer to the manual of the computer or the card.	-
Network Presentation	The projected image is rather slow compared to that of the computer	The projector isn't capable of relaying dynamic images such as PowerPoint® animation at full speed.	Switching the priority to 'Transmission Speed' under the options menu may help to improve speed.	41
		The compression rate being used for transferring the images is too low.	Switching the priority to 'Transmission Speed' under the options menu may help to improve speed.	41
	Can't display the movies correctly.	In some combinations of computer's video card and application software, there is a possibility that true image - especially movies played by media player - cannot be transferred to the projector with the "LiveViewer".	If there is a video acceleration level adjustment function in your application, please try to adjust it. Refer your application manual in detail.	-
	Network connection between the computer and projector is disconnected when computer display resolution is changed during Network Presentation.	The computer-Projector network connection might be disconnected when computer display resolution is changed while displaying picture.	Please re-connect using "Connect button" after changing computer display resolution, or change display resolution before connecting with the "LiveViewer".	37
	Images contain lots of interference.	The compression rate being used for transferring the images is too high.	Try setting the priority to 'Image Quality' in the "LiveViewer" Option menu. You may experience a drop in speed.	41
	Neither transparency nor translucency effects (Glass)	Using the "LiveViewer" with Windows® Aero® mode.	The "LiveViewer" does not support these features of Windows Vista® Aero®.	-
Problem Likely Cause Things to Check			Reference Page Number
Others- Information from the projector to computer is not correct or completed- The projector does not respond- Image on screen is frozen.	Communication between the projector and computer is not working well.NETWORK Functions of the projector is not working well.	Try “RESTART” in SERVICE menu under the NETWORK menu.	*70

* User's Manual - Operating Guide

9. Warranty and after-sales service

9. Warranty and after-sales service

If a problem occurs with the equipment, please read 8. Troubleshooting (89) section first and review all suggested check points. After that, please contact your dealer or service company, if you still have the problem. They will tell you what warranty condition is applied.

User's Manual (detailed) Operating Guide – Technical

Example of computer signal

Resolution (H x V)	H. frequency (kHz)	V. frequency (Hz)	Rating Signal mode
720 x 400	37.9 85.0 VESA TEXT
640 x 480 31.5	59.9 VESA VGA (60Hz)
640 x 480 37.9	72.8 VESA VGA (72Hz)
640 x 480 37.5	75.0 VESA VGA (75Hz)
640 x 480 43.3	85.0 VESA VGA (85Hz)
800 x 600 35.2	56.3 VESA SVGA (56Hz)
800 x 600 37.9	60.3 VESA SVGA (60Hz)
800 x 600 48.1	72.2 VESA SVGA (72Hz)
800 x 600 46.9	75.0 VESA SVGA (75Hz)
800 x 600 53.7	85.1 VESA SVGA (85Hz)
832 x 624 49.7	74.5 Mac 16" mode
1024 x 768 48.4	60.0 VESA XGA (60Hz)
1024 x 768 56.5	70.1 VESA XGA (70Hz)
1024 x 768 60.0	75.0 VESA XGA (75Hz)
1024 x 768 68.7	85.0 VESA XGA (85Hz)
1152 x 864 67.5	75.0 VESA		1152 x 864 (75Hz)
1280 x 768 47.7	60.0 VESA W-XGA (60Hz)
1280 x 800 49.7	60.0 VESA		1280 x 800 (60Hz)
1280 x 960 60.0	60.0 VESA		1280 x 960 (60Hz)
1280 x 1024	64.0 60.0 VESA SXGA (60Hz)
1280 x 1024	80.0 75.0 VESA SXGA (75Hz)
*1280 x 1024	91.1 85.0 VESA SXGA (85Hz)
1440 x 900 55.9	59.9 VESA WXGA+ (60Hz)
1400 x 1050	65.2 60.0 VESA SXGA+ (60Hz)
*1600 x 1200	75.0 60.0 VESA UXGA (60Hz)

NOTE • Be sure to check jack type, signal level, timing and resolution before connecting this projector to a PC.

• Some PCs may have multiple display screen modes. Use of some of these modes will not be possible with this projector.
• Depending on the input signal, full-size display may not be possible in some cases. Refer to the number of display pixels above.
• Although the projector can display signals with resolution up to UXGA (1600x1200), the signal will be converted to the projector's panel resolution before being displayed. The best display performance will be achieved if the resolutions of the input signal and projector panel are identical.
  • Automatic adjustment may not function correctly with some input signals.
• The image may not be displayed correctly when the input sync signal is a composite sync or a sync on G.
• The HDMI™ input does not support the signals marked with *.

Initial set signals

The following signals are used for the initial settings. The signal timing of some computer models may be different. In such case, adjust the items V POSITION and H POSITION in the IMAGE menu.

Data Data Active video (C) H. Sync. V. Sync. Sync (A) Sync (a)

Active video (c)

Resolution (H x V)	Horizontal signal timing (μs)				Vertical signal timing (lines)				Signal mode
	(A) (B)	(C)	(D) (a)	(b) (c)	(d)
720 x 400	2.0	3.0	20.3	1.0	3	42	400	1	TEXT
640 x 480	3.8	1.9	25.4	0.6	2	33	480	10	VGA (60Hz)
640 x 480	1.3	4.1	20.3	0.8	3	28	480	9	VGA (72Hz)
640 x 480	2.0	3.8	20.3	0.5	3	16	480	1	VGA (75Hz)
640 x 480	1.6	2.2	17.8	1.6	3	25	480	1	VGA (85Hz)
800 x 600	2.0	3.6	22.2	0.7	2	22	600	1	SVGA (56Hz)
800 x 600	3.2	2.2	20.0	1.0	4	23	600	1	SVGA (60Hz)
800 x 600	2.4	1.3	16.0	1.1	6	23	600	37	SVGA (72Hz)
800 x 600	1.6	3.2	16.2	0.3	3	21	600	1	SVGA (75Hz)
800 x 600	1.1	2.7	14.2	0.6	3	27	600	1	SVGA (85Hz)
832 x 624	1.1	3.9	14.5	0.6	3	39	624	1	Mac 16" mode
1024 x 768	2.1	2.5	15.8	0.4	6	29	768	3	XGA (60Hz)
1024 x 768	1.8	1.9	13.7	0.3	6	29	768	3	XGA (70Hz)
1024 x 768	1.2	2.2	13.0	0.2	3	28	768	1	XGA (75Hz)
1024 x 768	1.0	2.2	10.8	0.5	3	36	768	1	XGA (85Hz)
1152 x 864	1.2	2.4	10.7	0.6	3	32	864	1	1152 x 864 (75Hz)
1280 x 768	1.7	2.5	16.0	0.8	3	23	768	1	W-XGA (60Hz)
1280 x 800	1.6	2.4	15.3	0.8	3	24	800	1	1280 x 800 (60Hz)
1280 x 960	1.0	2.9	11.9	0.9	3	36	960	1	1280 x 960 (60Hz)
1280 x 1024	1.0	2.3	11.9	0.4	3	38	1024	1	SXGA (60Hz)
1280 x 1024	1.1	1.8	9.5	0.1	3	38	1024	1	SXGA (75Hz)
1280 x 1024	1.0	1.4	8.1	0.4	3	44	1024	1	SXGA (85Hz)
1440 x 900	1.4	2.2	13.5	0.8	6	25	900	3	WXGA+ (60Hz)
1400 x 1050	1.2	2.0	11.4	0.7	3	33	1050	1	SXGA+ (60Hz)
1600 x 1200	1.2	1.9	9.9	0.4	3	46	1200	1	UXGA (60Hz)

Connection to the ports

NOTICE ▶ Use the cables with straight plugs, not L-shaped ones, as the input ports of the projector are recessed.

▶ Only the signal that is input from the COMPUTER IN1 or IN2 can be output from the MONITOR OUT port.

USB TYPE B HDMI USB TYPE A DC5V 0.5A B CO A ER IN1CO ER IN2 CONTROL MONITOR MIC AUDIO IN3A AUDIO OUT S-VIDEO AUDIO IN2 VIDEO

ⒶCOMPUTER IN1, ⒷCOMPUTER IN2, ⒶMONITOR OUT

• Video signal: RGB separate, Analog, 0.7Vp-p, 75Ω terminated (positive)
• H/V. sync. Signal: TTL level (positive/negative)
- Composite sync. Signal: TTL level

Pin	Signal Pin Signal
1	Video Red 10 Ground
2 V	deo Green 11 (No connection)
3 V	deo Blue	12	A: SDA (DDC data)B, C: (No connection)
4 (No connection)
5 G	round 13 H. sync / Composite sync.
6 G	round Red 14 V. sync.
7 G	round Green	15	A: SCL (DDC clock)B, C: (No connection)
8 G	round Blue
9 (No connection) --

(2) for Component signal

• Y: Component video Y with composite sync, 1.0±0.1 Vp-p, 75 Ω terminator
• Cr/Pr : Component video Cr/Pr, 0.7±0.1 Vp-p, 75 Ω terminator
• Cb/Pb : Component video Cb/Pb, 0.7±0.1 Vp-p, 75 Ω terminator

System:480i@60,480p@60,576i@50,576p@50,720p@50/60,1080i@50/60,1080p@50/60

Pin	Signal Pin Signal
1	Cr/Pr	9 (No connection)
2 Y		10 Ground
3 Cb/Pb		11 (No connection)
4 (No connection)		12 (No connection)
5 Ground 13 (No connection)
6 Ground Cr/Pr		14 (No connection)
7 Ground Y		15 (No connection)
8 Ground Cb/Pb		--

USB TYPE B HDMI COMPUTER IN1COMPUTER IN2 USB TYPE A DC5V 0.5A CONTROL MONITOR OUT MIC AUDIO IN3A AUDIO OUT S-VIDEO AUDIO IN2 VIDEO

DS-VIDEO

Mini DIN 4pin jack

• System: NTSC, PAL, SECAM, PAL-M, PAL-N, NTSC4.43, PAL(60Hz)

Pin Signal
1	Color signal 0.286Vp-p (NTSC, burst), 75Ω terminatorColor signal 0.300Vp-p (PAL/SECAM, burst) 75Ω terminator
2 Brightness signal, 1.0Vp-p, 75Ω terminator
3 Ground
4 Ground

©VIDEO

RCA jack

• System: NTSC, PAL, SECAM, PAL-M, PAL-N, NTSC4.43, PAL(60Hz)
• 1.0±0.1Vp-p, 75Ω terminator

USB TYPE A DC5V 0.5A USB TYPE B HDMI COMPUTER IN2 COMPUTER IN1 F M G I K CONTROL MONITOR OUT AUDIO 3 AUDIO 3 AUDIO 3 S-VIDEO AUDIN2 J L VIDEO

FHDMI

• Type :Digital audio/video connector
  • Audio signal : Linear PCM (Sampling rate; 32/44.1/48 kHz)

2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19

Pin	Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal
1 T	M.D.S. Data2 + 8 T.M.D.S. Data0	Shield 15 SCL
2 T	M.D.S. Data2 Shield 9 T.M.D.S. Data0 - 16 SDA
3 T	M.D.S. Data2 - 10 T.M.D.S. Clock	+ 17 DDC/CEC Ground
4	T.M.D.S. Data1 + 11 T.M.D.S. Clock Shield		18	+5V Power
5 T	M.D.S. Data1 Shield	12 T.M.D.S. Clock - 19 Hot Plug Detect
6 T	M.D.S. Data1 - 13 CEC
7 T	M.D.S. Data0 +	14 Reserved(N.C. on device)

©AUDIO IN1, ©AUDIO IN2

- About the details of RS-232C communication, please refer to the section "RS-232C Communication".

⑨⑧⑦⑥ ⑤④③②①

Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal
1 (No connection) 4 (No connection) 7 RTS
2 RD 5 Ground 8 CTS
3 TD 6 (No connection) 9 (No connection)

©LAN

RJ-45 jack

Pin	Signal Pin	Signal Pin	Signal
1	TX+	4	-	7	-
2	TX-	5	-	8	-
3	RX+	6	RX-

To input component video signal to COMPUTER IN ports

ex.

USB TYPE A DC5V 0.5A USB TYPE B HDMI COM P 1R IN1COMPUTER IN2 D-sub plug CONTROL MONITOR OUT MIC AUDIO IN3A AUDIO OUT S-VIDEO AUDIO IN2 VIDEO RCA plugs RCA connectors Y Cn/Pa COMPONENT VIDEO OUT VCR/DVD/Blu-ray Disc player

To input component video signal to the COMPUTER IN1 or IN2 port of the projector, use a RCA to D-sub cable or adapter.

For about the pin description of the required cable or adapter, refer to the descriptions about COMPUTER IN1 and IN2 port (3).

RS-232C Communication

When the projector connects to the computer by RS-232C communication, the projector can be controlled with RS-232C commands from the computer. For details of RS-232C commands, refer to RS-232C Communication / Network command table (17).

Connection

1. Turn off the projector and the computer.
2. Connect the projector's CONTROL port and the computer's RS-232C port with a RS-232C cable (cross). Use the cable that fulfills the specification shown in figure
3. Turn the computer on, and after the computer has started up turn the projector on.
4. Set the COMMUNICATION TYPE to OFF. OPTION menu - SERVICE - COMMUNICATION in the User's Manual - Operating Guide)

graph TD
    A["Computer"] --> B["RS-232C"]
    B --> C["Robot"]
    C --> D["RS-232C Cable (cross)"]
    D --> E["Control"]

RS-232C port of the computer

CONTROL port of the projector

graph TD
    CD["CD (1) (1)"] --> RD2["RD(2)"]
    RD2 --> TD2["TD (3)"]
    RD2 --> TD3["TD (3)"]
    RD2 --> TD4["TD (4)"]
    TD2 --> DTR["DTR (4)"]
    TD3 --> DTR
    DTR --> GND["GND (5)"]
    GND --> DSR["DSR (6)"]
    GND --> RTS["RTS (7)"]
    GND --> RTS
    GND --> RTS
    GND --> RTS
    DSR --> RTS
    RTS --> DTS["DTS (8)"]
    RTS --> RTS
    RTS --> RTS
    RTS --> RTS
    RTS --> RTS
    RTS --> RTS
    RTS --> RTS
    RTS --> RTS
    RTS --> RTS
    RTS --> RTS
    RTS --> RTS
    RTS --> RTS
    RTS --> RTS
    RTS --> RTS
    RTS --> RTS
    RTS --> RTS
    RTS --> RTS
    RTS --> RTS
    RTS --> RTS
    RTS --> RTS
    RTS --> RTS
    RTS --> RTS

Communication settings

1. Protocol

19200bps,8N1

2. Command format ("h" shows hexadecimal)

Byte Number

0

1

2

3

4

5

8

9

1

0

1

CommandAction

Header Data

Header code

Packet

Data size

CRC flag

Action Type

Setting code

L

H

L

H

L

H

L

H

L

H

L

H

Change setting to desired value [(cL)(cH)] by [(eL)(eH)].

03h

06h

00h

(aL)

(aH)

01h

00h

(bL)

(bH)

(cL)

(cH)

Read projector internal setup value [(bL) (bH)].

(aL)

(aH)

02h

00h

(bL)

(bH)

00h

00h

Increment setup value [(bL)(bH)] by 1.

(aL)

(aH)

04h

00h

(bL)

(bH)

00h

00h

Decrement setup value [(bL)(bH)] by 1.

(aL)

(aH)

05h

00h

(bL)

(bH)

00h

00h

Run a command [(bL)(bH)].

(aL)

(aH)

06h

00h

(bL)

(bH)

00h

00h

[Header code] [Packet] [Data size]

Set [BEh, EFh, 03h, 06h, 00h] to byte number 0\~4.

[CRC flag]

For byte number 5, 6, refer to RS-232C Communication / Network command table (17).

[Action]

Set functional code to byte number 7, 8.

= [01h, 00h], = [02h, 00h], = [04h, 00h]

= [05h, 00h], = [06h, 00h]

Refer to the Communication command table (above).

[Type] [Setting code]

For byte number 9\~12, refer to RS-232C Communication / Network command table (17).

3. Response code / Error code ("h" shows hexadecimal)

(1) ACK reply : 06h

When the projector receives the Set, Increment, Decrement or Execute command correctly, the projector changes the setting data for the specified item by [Type], and it returns the code.

(2) NAK reply : 15h

When the projector cannot understand the received command, the projector returns the error code.

In such a case, check the sending code and send the same command again.

(3) Error reply : 1Ch + 0000h

When the projector cannot execute the received command for any reasons, the projector returns the error code.

In such a case, check the sending code and the setting status of the projector.

(4) Data reply : 1Dh + xxxxh

When the projector receives the GET command correctly, the projector returns the response code and 2 bytes of data.

NOTE • For connecting the projector to your devices, please read the manual for each devices, and connect them correctly with suitable cables.

• Operation cannot be guaranteed when the projector receives an undefined command or data.
• Provide an interval of at least 40ms between the response code and any other code.
• The projector outputs test data when the power supply is switched ON, and when the lamp is lit. Ignore this data.
• Commands are not accepted during warm-up.
• When the data length is greater than indicated by the data length code, the projector ignore the excess data code. Conversely when the data length is shorter than indicated by the data length code, the projector returns the error code to the computer.

Command Control via the Network

When the projector connects network, the projector can be controlled with RS-232C commands from the computer with web browser.

For details of RS-232C commands, refer to RS-232C Communication / Network command table (17).

Connection

1. Turn off the projector and the computer.
2. Connect the projector's LAN port and the computer's LAN port with a LAN cable. Use the cable that fulfills the specification shown in figure (Use CAT-5 or greater LAN Cable when LAN ports are used)
3. Turn the computer on, and after the computer has started up turn the projector on.

LAN cable (CAT-5 or greater)

graph TD
    A["Computer"] --> B["LAN"]
    C["Printer"] --> D["LAN"]
    B --> E["Server"]
    D --> E
    style A fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style C fill:#bbf,stroke:#333
    style E fill:#dfd,stroke:#333

Communication Port

The following two ports are assigned for the command control.

TCP #23

TCP #9715

Configure the following items form a web browser when command control is used.

Port Settings
Network Control Port1 (Port: 23)	Port open	Click the [Enable] check box to open [Network Control Port1 (Port: 23)] to use TCP #23. Default setting is “Enable”.
	Authentication	Click the [Enable] check box for the [Authentication] setting when authentication is required. Default setting is “Disable”.
Network Control Port2 (Port: 9715)	Port open	Click the [Enable] check box to open [Network Control Port2 (Port: 9715)] to use TCP #9715. Default setting is “Enable”.
	Authentication	Click the [Enable] check box for the [Authentication] setting when authentication is required. Default setting is “Enable”.

When the authentication setting is enabled, the following settings are required.

Security Settings
Network Control	Authentication Password	Enter the desired authentication password. This setting will be the same for [Network Control Port1 (Port: 23)] and [Network Control Port2 (Port: 9715)]. Default setting is blank.
	Re-enter Authentication Password

Command control settings

[TCP #23]

1. Command format

Same as RS-232C communication, refer to RS-232C Communicaton command format.

2. Response code / Error code ("h" shows hexadecimal)

Four of the response / error code used for TCP#23 are the same as RS-232C

Communication (1)\~(4). One authentication error reply (5) is added.

(1) ACK reply : 06h

Refer to RS-232C communication (10).

(2) NAK reply : 15h

Refer to RS-232C communication (10).

(3) Error reply : 1Ch + 0000h

Refer to RS-232C communication (10).

(4) Data reply : 1Dh + xxxxh

Refer to RS-232C communication (10).

(5) Authentication error reply : 1Fh + 0400h

When authentication error occurred, the projector returns the error code.

[TCP #9715]

1. Command format

The commands some datum are added to the head and the end of the ones of TCP#9715 are used.

Header Data length RS-232C command Check sum Connection ID
0×02 0×0D	13 bytes 1 byte	1 byte

[Header]

02, Fixed

[Data Length]

RS-232C commands byte length (0×0D, Fixed)

[RS-232C commands]

Refer to RS-232C Communication command format (9).

[Check Sum]

This is the value to make zero on the addition of the lower 8 bits from the header to the checksum.

[Connection ID]

Random value from 0 to 255 (This value is attached to the reply data).

NOTE • Operation cannot be guaranteed when the projector receives an undefined command or data.

- Provide an interval of at least 40ms between the response code and any other code.

- Commands are not accepted during warm-up.

2. Response code / Error code ("h" shows hexadecimal)

The connection ID is attached for the TCP#23's response / error codes are used. The connection ID is same as the sending command format.

(××h : connection ID)

(1) ACK reply : 06h + xxh
(2) NAK reply : 15h + xxh
(3) Error reply : 1Ch + 0000h + xxh
(4) Data reply : 1Dh + xxxxh + xxh
(5) Authentication error reply : 1Fh + 0400h + xxh
(6) Projector busy reply: 1Fh + xxxxh + xxh

When the projector is too busy to receive the command, the projector returns the error code.

In such a case, check the sending code and send the same command again.

Automatic Connection Break

The TCP connection will be automatically disconnected after there is no communication for 30 seconds after being established.

Authentication

The projector does not accept commands without authentication success when authentication is enabled. The projector uses a challenge response type authentication with an MD5 (Message Digest 5) algorithm. When the projector is using a LAN, a random 8 bytes will be returned if authentication is enabled. Bind this received 8 bytes and the authentication password and digest this data with the MD5 algorithm and add this in front of the commands to send.

Following is a sample if the authentication password is set to “password” and the random 8 bytes are “a572f60c”.

1) Select the projector.
2) Receive the random 8 bytes "a572f60c" from the projector.
3) Bind the random 8 bytes "a572f60c" and the authentication password "password" and it becomes "a572f60cpassword".
4) Digest this bind "a572f60cpassword" with MD5 algorithm.
It will be "e3d97429adffa11bce1f7275813d4bde".
5) Add this "e3d97429adffa11bce1f7275813d4bde" in front of the commands and send the data.
Send “e3d97429adffa11bce1f7275813d4bde”+command.
6) When the sending data is correct, the command will be performed and the reply data will be returned. Otherwise, an authentication error will be returned.

NOTE • As for the transmission of the second or subsequent commands, the authentication data can be omitted when the same connection.

Network Bridge Communication

This projector is equipped with NETWORK BRIDGE function.

When the projector connects to the computer by LAN communicaton, an external device that is connected with this projector by RS-232C communication can be controlled from the computer as a network terminal.

For details, see the 6. Network Bridge Function - Network Guide.

Connection

1. Connect the computer's LAN port and the projector's LAN port with a LAN cable.
2. Connect the projector's CONTROL port and the RS-232C port of the devices that you want to control with a RS-232C cable.
3. Turn the computer on, and after the computer has started up turn the projector on.
4. Set the COMMUNICATION TYPE to NETWORK BRIDGE. (OPTION menu - SERVICE - COMMUNICATION in the User's Manual - Operating Guide)

graph TD
    A["7000"] --> B["控制 Unit"]
    C["Computer Monitor"] --> D["LAN"]
    D --> E["LAN"]
    E --> F["LAN"]
    F --> G["RS-232C Device"]
    G --> H["Computer Monitor"]

Communication settings

For communication setting, use the OPTION - SERVICE - COMMUNICATION menu. (OPTION menu - SERVICE - COMMUNICATION in the User's Manual - Operating Guide)

Item Condition
BAUD RATE 4800bps / 9600bps / 19200bps / 38400bps
Data length 8 bit (fixed)
PARITY NONE/ODD/EVEN
Start bit 1 bit (fixed)
Stop bit 1 bit (fixed)
Transmission method HALF-DUPLEX/FULL-DUPLEX

NOTE • For connecting the projector to your devices, please read the manual for each devices, and connect them correctly with suitable cables.

• Turn off (the power of) both the projector and other devices and unplug, beore connecting them.
• For details of Transmission method, refer to 6.4 Transmission method - Network Guide.

RS-232C Communication / Network command table

Names Operation Type Header								Command Data
								CRC Action Type	Setting code
Power	Set	Turn off BE EF 03 06 00 2A D3 01 00 00 60 00 00
		Turn on BE EF 03 06 00 BA D2 01 00 00 60 01 00
	Get		BE EF 03 06 00 19 D3 02 00 00 60 00 00
			[Example return]00 00 01 00 02 00[Off] [On] [Cool down]
Input Source	Set	COMPUTER IN1 BE EF 03 06 00 FE D2 01 00 00 20 00 00
		COMPUTER IN2 BE EF 03 06 00 3E D0 01 00 00 20 04 00
		HDMI	BE EF	03	06 00	0E D2	01 00	00 20	03 00
		S-VIDEO	BE EF	03 06	00 9E D3	01 00 00	20 02 00
		VIDEO	BE EF	03 06	00 6E D3	01 00 00	20 01 00
		USB TYPE A	BE EF	03	06 00	5E D1	01 00	00 20	06 00
		LAN	BE EF	03	06 00	CE D5	01 00	00 20	0B 00
		USB TYPE B	BE EF	03	06 00	FE D7	01 00	00 20	0C 00
	Get		BE EF	03	06 00	CD D2	02 00	00 20	00 00
Error Status	Get		BE EF	03 06	00 D9 D8	02 00 20	60 00 00
			[Example return]00 00 01 00 02 00 03 00[Normal] [Cover error] [Fan error] [Lamp error]04 00 05 00 07 00 08 00 0C 00[Temp error] [Air flow error] [Cold error] [Filter error] [Lens Door error]
MAGNIFY	Get		BE EF	03 06	00 7C D2	02 00 07	30 00 00
	Increment BE EF		03 06 00	1A D2	04 00 07	30 00 00
	Decrement		BE EF	03 06	00 CB	D3 05 00	07 30 00	00
FREEZE	Set	NORMAL	BE EF	03 06	00 83 D2	01 00 02	30 00 00
		FREEZE	BE EF	03 06	00 13 D3	01 00 02	30 01 00
	Get		BE EF	03 06	00 B0 D2	02 00 02	30 00 00
PICTURE MODE	Set	NORMAL	BE EF	03 06	00 23 F6	01 00 BA	30 00 00
		CINEMA	BE EF	03 06	00 B3 F7	01 00 BA	30 01 00
		DYNAMIC	BE EF	03 06	00 E3 F4	01 00 BA	30 04 00
		BOARD(BLACK)	BE EF	03 06	00 E3 EF	01 00 BA	30 20 00
		BOARD(GREEN)	BE EF	03 06	00 73 EE	01 00 BA	30 21 00
		WHITEBOARD	BE EF	03 06	00 83 EE	01 00 BA	30 22 00
		DAYTIME	BE EF	03 06	00 E3 C7	01 00 BA	30 40 00
	Get		BE EF	03 06	00 10 F6	02 00 BA	30 00 00
			[Example return]00 00 01 00 04 00 10 00[Normal] [Cinema] [Dynamic] [Custom]20 00 21 00 22 00 40 00[BOARD(BLACK)][BOARD(GREEN)][WHITEBOARD][DAY TIME]
BRIGHTNESS	Get		BE EF	03 06	00 89 D2	02 00 03	20 00 00
	Increment BE EF		03 06 00	EF D2	04 00 03	20	00 00
	Decrement		BE EF	03 06	00 3E D3	05 00 03	20 00 00
BRIGHTNESS Reset	Execute BE EF		03 06 00	58 D3	06 00 00	70 00 00
CONTRAST	Get		BE EF	03 06	00 FD D3	02 00 04	20 00 00
	Increment BE EF		03 06 00	9B D3	04 00 04	20 00 00
	Decrement		BE EF	03 06	00 4A D2	05 00 04	20 00 00
CONTRAST Reset		Execute BE EF		03 06 00	A4 D2	06 00 01	70 00 00
GAMMA	Set	1 DEFAULT BE	EF 03 06	00 07	E9 01 00	A1 30 20	00
		1 CUSTOM BE	EF 03 06	00 07	FD 01 00	A1 30 10	00
		2 DEFAULT BE	EF 03 06	00 97	E8 01 00	A1 30 21	00
		2 CUSTOM BE	EF 03 06	00 97	FC 01 00	A1 30 11	00
		3 DEFAULT BE	EF 03 06	00 67	E8 01 00	A1 30 22	00
		3 CUSTOM BE	EF 03 06	00 67	FC 01 00	A1 30 12	00
		4 DEFAULT BE	EF 03 06	00 F7	E9 01 00	A1 30 23	00
		4 CUSTOM BE	EF 03 06	00 F7	FD 01 00	A1 30 13	00
		5 DEFAULT BE	EF 03 06	00 C7	EB 01 00	A1 30 24	00
		5 CUSTOM BE	EF 03 06	00 C7	FF 01 00	A1 30 14	00
		6 DEFAULT BE	EF 03 06	00 57	EA 01 00	A1 30 25	00
		6 CUSTOM BE	EF 03 06	00 57	FE 01 00	A1 30 15	00
	Get BE EF 03		06 00 F4	F0 02	00 A1 30	00 00
User Gamma Pattern	Set	Off BE EF	03 06 00	FB FA	01 00 80	30 00 00
		9 steps gray scale	BE EF 03	06 00	6B FB 01	00 80 30	01 00
		15 steps gray scale	BE EF	03 06	00 9B FB	01 00 80	30 02 00
		Ramp	BE EF	03 06	00 0B FA	01 00 80	30 03 00
	Get BE EF 03		06 00 C8	FA	02 00 80	30 00 00
User Gamma Point 1		Get BE EF		03 06 00	08 FE	02 00 90	30 00 00
		Increment		BE EF	03	06 00	6E FE	04 00	90 30	00 00
		Decrement		BE EF	03	06 00	BF FF	05 00	90 30	00 00
User Gamma Point 1 Reset		Execute BE EF		03 06 00	58 C2	06 00 50	70 00 00
User Gamma Point 2		Get BE EF		03 06 00	F4 FF	02 00 91	30 00 00
		Increment		BE EF	03 06	00 92 FF	04 00 91	30 00 00
		Decrement		BE EF	03 06	00 43 FE	05 00 91	30 00 00
User Gamma Point 2 Reset		Execute BE EF		03 06 00	A4 C3	06 00 51	70 00 00
User Gamma Point 3		Get BE EF		03 06 00	B0 FF	02 00 92	30 00 00
		Increment		BE EF	03	06 00	D6 FF	04 00	92 30	00 00
		Decrement		BE EF	03 06	00 07 FE	05 00 92	30 00 00
User Gamma Point 3 Reset		Execute BE EF		03 06 00	E0 C3	06 00 52	70 00 00
User Gamma Point 4		Get BE EF		03 06 00	4C FE	02 00 93	30 00 00
		Increment		BE EF	03 06	00 2A FE	04 00 93	30 00 00
		Decrement		BE EF	03	06 00	FB FF	05 00	93 30	00 00
User Gamma Point 4 Reset		Execute BE EF		03 06 00	1C	C2 06 00	53 70 00	00
User Gamma Point 5		Get BE EF		03 06 00	38 FF	02 00 94	30 00 00
		Increment		BE EF	03 06	00 5E FF	04 00 94	30 00 00
		Decrement		BE EF	03 06	00 8F FE	05 00 94	30 00 00
User Gamma Point 5 Reset		Execute BE EF		03 06 00	68 C3	06 00 54	70 00 00
User Gamma Point 6		Get BE EF		03 06 00	C4 FE	02 00 95	30 00 00
		Increment		BE EF	03	06 00	A2 FE	04 00	95 30	00 00
		Decrement		BE EF	03 06	00 73 FF	05 00 95	30 00 00
User Gamma Point 6 Reset		Execute BE EF		03 06 00	94 C2	06 00 55	70 00 00

RS-232C Communication / Network command table (continued)

Names Operation Type Header									Command Data
									CRC A	Action Type	Setting code
User Gamma Point 7	Get BE EF 03		06 00 80	FE 02	00 96	30	00 00
	Increment BE EF		03 06 00	E6 FE	04 00 96	30	00 00
	Decrement BE EF		03 06 00	37 FF	05 00 96	30	00 00
User Gamma Point 7 Reset	Execute BE EF		03 06 00	D0 C2	06 00 56	70	00 00
User Gamma Point 8	Get BE EF 03		06 00 7C	FF 02	00 97	30	00 00
	Increment BE EF		03 06 00	1A FF	04 00 97	30	00 00
	Decrement BE EF		03 06 00	CB FE	05 00 97	30	00 00
User Gamma Point 8 Reset	Execute BE EF		03 06 00	2C C3	06 00 57	70	00 00
COLOR TEMP	Set	1 HIGH BE EF	03 06 00	0B F5	01 00 B0	30	03 00
		1 CUSTOM	BE EF	03 06	00 CB F8	01	00 B0	30 13 00
		2 MID BE EF	03 06 00	9B F4	01 00 B0	30	02 00
		2 CUSTOM	BE EF	03 06	00 5B F9	01	00 B0	30 12 00
		3 LOW	BE EF	03 06	00 6B F4	01	00 B0	30 01 00
		3 CUSTOM	BE EF	03 06	00 AB F9	01	00 B0	30 11 00
		4 Hi-BRIGHT-1	BE EF	03 06	00 3B F2	01	00 B0	30 08 00
		4 CUSTOM	BE EF	03 06	00 FB FF	01	00 B0	30 18 00
		5 Hi-BRIGHT-2	BE EF	03 06	00 AB F3	01	00 B0	30 09 00
		5 CUSTOM	BE EF	03 06	00 6B FE	01	00 B0	30 19 00
		6 Hi-BRIGHT-3	BE EF	03 06	00 5B F3	01	00 B0	30 0A 00
		6 CUSTOM	BE EF	03	06 00	9B FE	01 00	B0 30	1A 00
	Get BE EF 03		06 00 C8	F5 02	00 B0	30	00 00
COLOR TEMP GAIN R	Get BE EF 03		06 00 34	F4 02	00 B1	30	00 00
	Increment BE EF		03 06 00	52 F4	04 00 B1	30	00 00
	Decrement BE EF		03 06 00	83 F5	05 00 B1	30	00 00
COLOR TEMP GAIN R Reset	Execute BE EF		03 06 00	10 C6	06 00 46	70	00 00
COLOR TEMP GAIN G	Get BE EF 03		06 00 70	F4 02	00 B2	30	00 00
	Increment BE EF		03 06 00	16 F4	04 00 B2	30	00 00
	Decrement BE EF		03 06 00	C7 F5	05 00 B2	30	00 00
COLOR TEMP GAIN G Reset	Execute BE EF		03 06 00	EC C7	06 00 47	70	00 00
COLOR TEMP GAIN B	Get BE EF 03		06 00 8C	F5 02	00 B3	30	00 00
	Increment BE EF		03 06 00	EA F5	04 00 B3	30	00 00
	Decrement BE EF		03 06 00	3B F4	05 00 B3	30	00 00
COLOR TEMP GAIN B Reset	Execute BE EF		03 06 00	F8 C4	06 00	48	70 00 00
COLOR TEMP OFFSET R	Get BE EF 03		06 00 04	F5 02	00 B5	30	00 00
	Increment BE EF		03 06 00	62 F5	04 00 B5	30	00 00
	Decrement BE EF		03 06 00	B3 F4	05 00 B5	30	00 00
COLOR TEMP OFFSET R Reset	Execute BE EF		03 06 00	40 C5	06 00 4A	70	00 00
COLOR TEMP OFFSET G	Get BE EF 03		06 00 40	F5 02	00 B6	30	00 00
	Increment BE EF		03 06 00	26 F5	04 00 B6	30	00 00
	Decrement BE EF		03 06 00	F7 F4	05 00 B6	30	00 00
COLOR TEMP OFFSET G Reset	Execute BE EF		03 06 00	BC C4	06 00 4B	70	00 00
COLOR TEMP OFFSET B	Get BE EF 03		06 00 BC	F4 02	00 B7	$0 00 00
	Increment BE EF		03 06 00	DA F4	04 00 B7	30 00 00
	Decrement BE EF		03 06 00	0B F5	05 00 B7	30 00 00
COLOR TEMP OFFSET B Reset	Execute BE EF		03 06 00	C8 C5	06 00 40	70 00 00
COLOR	Get BE EF 03		06 00 B5	72 02	00 02 22	00 00
	Increment BE EF		03 06 00	D3	72 04 00	02 22 00	00
	Decrement BE EF		03 06 00	02 73	05 00 02	22 00 00
COLOR Reset	Execute BE EF		03 06 00	80	D0 06	00 0A 70	00 00
TINT	Get BE EF 03		06 00 49	73 02	00 03 22	00 00
	Increment BE EF		03 06 00	2F 73	04 00 03	22 00 00
	Decrement BE EF		03 06 00	FE 72	05	00 03 22	00 00
TINT Reset	Execute BE EF		03 06 00	7C D1	06 00 0B	70 00 00
SHARPNESS	Get BE EF 03		06 00 F1	72 02	00 01 22	00 00
	Increment BE EF		03 06 00	97 72	04 00 01	22 00 00
	Decrement BE EF		03 06 00	46 73	05 00 01	22 00 00
SHARPNESS Reset	Execute BE EF		03 06 00	C4 D0	06 00 09	70 00 00
ACTIVE IRIS	Set	OFF	BE EF	03 06	00 0B	22 01 00	04 33 00	00
		THEATER	BE EF	03 06	00 CB 2F	01 00 04	33	10 00
		PRESENTATION	BE EF	03	06 00	5B 2E	01 00	04 33	11 00
	Get BE EF 03		06 00 38	22 02	00 04 38	00	00
MY MEMORY Load	Set	1	BE EF	03 06	00 0E D7	01 00 14	20	00 00
		2	BE EF	03 06	00 9E D6	01 00 14	20	01 00
		3	BE EF	03 06	00 6E D6	01 00 14	20	02 00
		4	BE EF	03 06	00 FE D7	01 00 14	20	03 00
MY MEMORY Save	Set	1	BE EF	03 06	00 F2 D6	01 00 15	20	00 00
		2	BE EF	03	06 00	62 D7	01 00	15 20	01 00
		3	BE EF	03	06 00	92 D7	01 00	15 20	02 00
		4	BE EF	03	06 00	02 D6	01 00	15 20	03 00
ASPECT	Set	4:3 BE EF	03 06 00	9E D0	01 00 08	20	00 00
		16:9	BE EF	03 06	00 0E D1	01 00 08	20 01 00
		NATIVE	BE EF	03	06 00	5E D7	01 00	08 20	08 00
		14:9	BE EF	03 06	00 CE D6	01 00 08	20 09 00
		16:10	BE EF	03 06	00 3E D6	01 00 08	20 0A 00
		NORMAL	BE EF	03 06	00 5E DD	01 00 08	20	10 00
	Get BE EF 03		06 00 AD	D0 02	00 08 20	00	00
OVER SCAN	Get BE EF 03		06 00 91	70 02	00 09 22	00	00
	Increment BE EF		03 06 00	F7 70	04 00 09	22	00 00
	Decrement BE EF		03 06 00	26 71	05 00 09	22	00 00
OVER SCAN Reset	Execute BE EF		03 06 00	EC D9	06 00 27	70 00 00
V POSITION	Get BE EF 03		06 00	0D 83	02 00 00	21	00 00
	Increment BE EF		03 06 00	6B	83 04 00	00 21	00 00
	Decrement BE EF		03 06 00	BA	82 05 00	00 21	00 00
V POSITION Reset	Execute BE EF		03 06 00	E0 D2	06 00 02	70	00 00
H POSITION	Get BE EF 03		06 00 F1	82 02	00 01 21	00 00
	Increment BE EF		03 06 00	97 82	04 00 01	21 00 00
	Decrement BE EF		03 06 00	46 83	05 00 01	21 00 00
H POSITION Reset	Execute BE EF		03 06 00	1C D3	06 00 03	70 00 00
H PHASE	Get BE EF 03		06 00 49	83 02	00 03 21	00 00
	Increment BE EF		03 06 00	2F 83	04 00 03	21 00 00
	Decrement BE EF		03 06 00	FE 82	05 00 03	21 00 00
H SIZE	Get BE EF 03		06 00 B5	82 02	00 02 21	00 00
	Increment BE EF		03 06 00	D3 82	04 00 02	21 00 00
	Decrement BE EF		03 06 00	02 83	05 00 02	21 00 00
H SIZE Reset	Execute BE EF		03 06 00	68 D2	06 00 04	70 00 00
AUTO ADJUST EXECUTE	Execute BE EF		03 06 00	91 D0	06 00 0A	20 00 00
PROGRESSIVE	Set	OFF BE EF	03 06 00	4A 72	01 00 07	22 00 00
		TV	BE EF 03	06 00	DA 73	01 00 07	22 01 00
		FILM BE EF	03 06 00	2A 73	01 00 07	22 02 00
	Get BE EF 03		06 00 79	72 02	00 07 22	00 00
VIDEO NR	Set	LOW BE EF	03 06 00	26 72	01 00 06	22 01 00
		MID	BE EF 03	06 00	D6 72	01 00 06	22 02 00
		HIGH	BE EF 03	06 00	46 73	01 00 06	22 03 00
	Get BE EF 03		06 00 85	73 02	00 06 22	00 00
COLOR SPACE	Set	AUTO	BE EF 03	06 00	0E 72	01 00 04	22 00 00
		RGB BE EF	03 06 00	9E 73	01 00 04	22 01 00
		SMPTE240	BE EF 03	06 00	6E 73	01 00 04	22 02 00
		REC709	BE EF 03	06 00	FE 72	01 00 04	22 03 00
		REC601	BE EF 03	06 00	CE 70	01 00 04	22 04 00
	Get BE EF 03		06 00 3D	72 02	00 04 22	00 00
S-VIDEO FORMAT	Set	AUTO	BE EF 03	06 00	E6 70	01 00 12	22 0A 00
		NTSC BE EF	03 06 00	86 74	01 00 12	22 04 00
		PAL	BE EF 03	06 00	16 75	01 00 12	22 05 00
		SECAM	BE EF 03	06 00	16 70	01 00 12	22 09 00
		NTSC4.43	BE EF 03	06 00	26 77	01 00 12	22 02 00
		M-PAL	BE EF 03	06 00	86 71	01 00 12	22 08 00
		N-PAL	BE EF 03	06 00	76 74	01 00 12	22 07 00
	Get BE EF 03		06 00 75	76 02	00 12 22	00 00
C-VIDEO FORMAT	Set	AUTO	BE EF	03	06 00	A2 70	01 00	11 22	0A 00
		NTSC BE EF	03 06 00	C2 74	01 00 11	22 04 00
		PAL	BE EF	03	06 00	52 75	01 00	11 22	05 00
		SECAM	BE EF 03	06 00	52 70	01 00 11	22 09 00
		NTSC4.43	BE EF 03	06 00	62 77	01 00 11	22 02 00
		M-PAL	BE EF	03	06 00	C2 71	01 00	11 22	08 00
		N-PAL	BE EF	03	06 00	32 74	01 00	11 22	07 00
	Get BE EF 03		06 00 31	76 02	00 11 22	00 00
HDMI FORMAT	Set	AUTO	BE EF	03	06 00	BA 77	01 00	13 22	00 00
		VIDEO	BE EF	03	06 00	2A 76	01 00	13 22	01 00
		COMPUTER	BE EF	03	06 00	DA 76	01 00	13 22	02 00
	Get		BE EF	03	06 00	89 77	02 00	13 22	00 00
HDMI RANGE	Set	AUTO BE EF	03 06 00	86 D8	01 00 22	20 00 00
		NORMAL BE EF	03 06 00	16 D9	01 00 22	20 01 00
		ENHANCED BE	EF 03 06	00 E6	D9 01 00	22 20 02 00
	Get BE EF 03		06 00 B5	D8 02	00 22 20	00 00
COMPUTER IN1	Set	AUTO	BE EF	03	06 00	CE D6	01 00	10 20	03 00
		SYNC ON G OFF	BE EF	03	06 00	5E D7	01 00	10 20	02 00
	Get		BE EF	03	06 00	0D D6	02 00	10 20	00 00
COMPUTER IN2	Set	AUTO	BE EF	03	06 00	32 D7	01 00	11 20	03 00
		SYNC ON G OFF	BE EF	03	06 00	A2 D6	01 00	11 20	02 00
	Get		BE EF	03	06 00	F1 D7	02 00	11 20	00 00
FRAME LOCK - COMPUTER IN1	Set	OFF	BE EF	03	06 00	3B C2	01 00	50 30	00 00
		ON	BE EF	03	06 00	AB C3	01 00	50 30	01 00
	Get		BE EF	03	06 00	08 C2	02 00	50 30	00 00
FRAME LOCK - COMPUTER IN2	Set	OFF	BE EF	03	06 00	0B C3	01 00	54 30	00 00
		ON	BE EF	03	06 00	9B C2	01 00	54 30	01 00
	Get		BE EF	03	06 00	38 C3	02 00	54 30	00 00
FRAME LOCK - HDMI	Set	OFF	BE EF	03 06 00	7F C2	01 00 53 30	00 00
		ON	BE EF	03 06 00	EF C3	01 00	53 30 01 00
	Get BE EF 03		06 00 4C	C2 02	00 53	30 00 00
D-ZOOM	Get		BE EF	03	06 00	D0 D0	02 00	0A 30	00 00
	Increment		BE EF	03	06 00	B6 D0	04 00	0A 30	00 00
	Decrement		BE EF	03	06 00	67 D1	05 00	0A 30	00 00
D-ZOOM Reset	Execute		BE EF	03	06 00	98 C9	06 00	70 70	00 00
D-SHIFT V	Get		BE EF	03	06 00	2C D1	02 00	0B 30	00 00
	Increment		BE EF	03	06 00	4A D1	04 00	0B 30	00 00
	Decrement		BE EF	03	06 00	9B D0	05 00	0B 30	00 00
D-SHIFT V Reset	Execute		BE EF	03	06 00	A8 C8	06 00	74 70	00 00
D-SHIFT H	Get		BE EF	03	06 00	58 D0	02 00	0C 30	00 00
	Increment		BE EF	03	06 00	3E D0	04 00	0C 30	00 00
	Decrement		BE EF	03	06 00	EF D1	05 00	0C 30	00 00
D-SHIFT H Reset	Execute		BE EF	03	06 00	54 C9	06 00	75 70	00 00
PICTURE POSITION	Set	TOP	BE EF	03	06 00	02 D0	01 00	09 20	02 00
		MIDDLE	BE EF	03	06 00	62 D1	01 00	09 20	00 00
		BOTTOM	BE EF	03	06 00	F2 D0	01 00	09 20	01 00
	Get		BE EF	03	06 00	51 D1	02 00	09 20	00 00
KEYSTONE V	Get		BE EF	03	06 00	B9 D3	02 00	07 20	00 00
	Increment		BE EF	03	06 00	DF D3	04 00	07 20	00 00
	Decrement		BE EF	03	06 00	OE D2	05 00	07 20	00 00
KEYSTONE V Reset	Execute		BE EF	03	06 00	08 D0	06 00	0C 70	00 00
KEYSTONE H	Get		BE EF	03	06 00	E9 D0	02 00	0B 20	00 00
	Increment		BE EF	03	06 00	8F D0	04 00	0B 20	00 00
	Decrement		BE EF	03	06 00	5E D1	05 00	0B 20	00 00
KEYSTONE H Reset	Execute		BE EF	03	06 00	98 D8	06 00	20 70	00 00
PERFECT FIT	Set	Disable	BE EF	03	06 00	FE 88	01 00	20 21	00 00
		Enable	BE EF	03	06 00	6E 89	01 00	20 21	01 00
	Get		BE EF	03	06 00	CD 88	02 00	20 21 00	00
PERFECT FIT Left Top -H	Get BE EF 03	06 00 31	89 02	00 21 21	00 00
	Increment BE EF	03 06 00	57 89	04 00 21	21 00 00
	Decrement BE EF	03 06 00	86 88	05 00 21	21 00 00
PERFECT FIT Left Top -V	Get BE EF 03	06 00 75	89 02	00 22 21	00 00
	Increment BE EF	03 06 00	13 89	04 00 22	21 00 00
	Decrement BE EF	03 06 00	C2 88	05 00 22	21 00 00
PERFECT FIT Right Top -H	Get BE EF 03	06 00 89	88 02	00 23 21	00 00
	Increment BE EF	03 06 00	EF 88	04 00 23	21 00 00
	Decrement BE EF	03 06 00	3E 89	05 00 23	21 00 00
PERFECT FIT Right Top -V	Get BE EF 03	06 00 FD	89 02	00 24 21	00 00
	Increment BE EF	03 06 00	9B 89	04 00 24	21 00 00
	Decrement BE EF	03 06 00	4A 88	05 00 24	21 00 00
PERFECT FIT Left Bottom -H	Get BE EF 03	06 00 01	88 02	00 25 21	00 00
	Increment BE EF	03 06 00	67 88	04 00 25	21 00 00
	Decrement BE EF	03 06 00	B6 89	05 00 25	21 00 00
PERFECT FIT Left Bottom -V	Get BE EF 03	06 00 45	88 02	00 26 21	00 00
	Increment BE EF	03 06 00	23 88	04 00 26	21 00 00
	Decrement BE EF	03 06 00	F2 89	05 00 26	21 00 00
PERFECT FIT Right Bottom -H	Get BE EF 03	06 00 B9	89 02	00 27 21	00 00
	Increment BE EF	03 06 00	DF 89	04 00 27	21 00 00
	Decrement BE EF	03 06 00	OE 88	05 00 27	21 00 00
PERFECT FIT Right Bottom -V	Get BE EF 03	06 00 AD	8A 02	00 28 21	00 00
	Increment BE EF	03 06 00	CB 8A	04 00 28	21 00 00
	Decrement BE EF	03 06 00	1A 88	05 00 28	21 00 00
PERFECT FIT All Corners Reset	Execute BE EF	03 06 00	D5 8A	06 00 29	21 00 00
PERFECT FIT Left Side Distortion	Get BE EF 03	06 00 31	97 02	00 41 21	00 00
	Increment BE EF	03 06 00	57 97	04 00 41	21 00 00
	Decrement BE EF	03 06 00	86 96	05 00 41	21 00 00
PERFECT FIT Right Side Distortion	Get BE EF 03	06 00 75	97 02	00 42 21	00 00
	Increment BE EF	03 06 00	13 97	04 00 42	21 00 00
	Decrement BE EF	03 06 00	C2 96	05 00 42	21 00 00
PERFECT FIT Distortion Position V	Get BE EF 03	06 00 89	96 02	00 43 21	00 00
	Increment BE EF	03 06 00	EF 96	04 00 43	21 00 00
	Decrement BE EF	03 06 00	3E 97	05 00 43	21 00 00
PERFECT FIT Top Side Distortion	Get BE EF 03	06 00 FD	97 02	00 44 21	00 00
	Increment BE EF	03 06 00	9B 97	04 00 44	21 00 00
	Decrement BE EF	03 06 00	4A 96	05 00 44	21 00 00
PERFECT FIT Bottom Side Distortion	Get BE EF 03	06 00 01	96 02	00 45 21	00 00
	Increment BE EF	03 06 00	67 96	04 00 45	21 00 00
	Decrement BE EF	03 06 00	B6 97	05 00 45	21 00 00
PERFECT FIT Distortion Position H	Get BE EF 03	06 00 45	96 02	00 46 21	00 00
	Increment BE EF	03 06 00	23 96	04 00 46	21 00 00
	Decrement BE EF	03 06 00	F2 97	05 00 46	21 00 00
PERFECT FIT All Sides Reset	Execute BE EF	03 06 00	3D 96	06 00 47	21 00 00
AUTO ECO MODE	Set	OFF BE EF	03		06 00	FB 27	01 00 10	33	00 00
		ON	BE EF	03	06 00	6B 26	01 00	10 33	01 00
	Get		BE EF	03	06 00	C8 27	02 00	10 33	00 00
ECO MODE	Set	BRIGHT BE EF 03 06	00 3B	23 01 00	00 33 00	00
		NORMAL BE EF 03 06	00 AB	22 01 00	00 33 01	00
	Get BE EF 03	06 00 08	23 02	00 00 3	3 00 00
MIRROR	Set	NORMAL BE EF 03 06	00 C7	D2 01 00	01 30 00	00
		H:INVERT BE EF 03 06	00 57	D3 01 00	01 30 01	00
		V:INVERT BE EF 03 06	00 A7	D3 01 00	01 30 02	00
		H&V:INVERT BE EF 03 06	00 37 D2	01 00 01	30 03 00
	Get BE EF 03	06 00 F4	D2 02	00 01 30	00 00
STANDBY MODE	Set	NORMAL BE EF 03 06	00 D6	D2 01 00	01 60 00	00
		SAVING BE EF 03 06	00 46 D3	01 00 01	60 01 00
	Get BE EF 03	06 00 E5	D2 02	00 01 60	00 00
MONITOR OUT - COMPUTER IN1	Set	COMPUTER IN1 BE EF 03	06 00	3E F4 01	00 B0 20	00	00
		OFF	BE EF 03 06	00 CE B5	01 00 B0	20	FF 00
	Get BE EF 03	06 00 0D	F4 02	00 B0 20	00	00
MONITOR OUT - COMPUTER IN2	Set	COMPUTER IN2 BE EF 03	06 00	CE F7 01	00 B4 20	04	00
		OFF	BE EF 03 06	00 FE B4	01 00 B4	20	FF 00
	Get BE EF 03	06 00 3D	F5 02	00 B4 20	00	00
MONITOR OUT - S-VIDEO	Set	COMPUTER IN1 BE EF 03	06 00	86 F5 01	00 B2 20	00	00
		COMPUTER IN2 BE EF 03	06 00	46 F7 01	00 B2 20	04	00
		OFF	BE EF 03 06	00 76 B4	01 00 B2	20	FF 00
	Get BE EF 03	06 00 B5	F5 02	00 B2 20	00	00
MONITOR OUT - VIDEO	Set	COMPUTER IN1 BE EF 03	06 00	C2 F5 01	00 B1 20	00	00
		COMPUTER IN2 BE EF 03	06 00	02 F7 01	00 B1 20	04	00
		OFF	BE EF 03 06	00 32 B4	01 00 B1	20	FF 00
	Get BE EF 03	06 00 F1	F5 02	00 B1 20	00	00
MONITOR OUT - HDMI	Set	COMPUTER IN1	BE EF	03	06 00	7A F4	01 00	B3 20
		COMPUTER IN2	BE EF	03	06 00	BA F6	01 00	B3 20
		OFF	BE EF	03	06 00	8A B5	01 00	B3 20
	Get		BE EF	03	06 00	49 F4	02 00	B3 20
MONITOR OUT - LAN	Set	COMPUTER IN1	BE EF	03	06 00	1A F6	01 00	BB 20
		COMPUTER IN2	BE EF	03	06 00	DA F4	01 00	BB 20
		OFF	BE EF	03	06 00	EAB7	01 00	BB 20
	Get		BE EF	03	06 00	29 F6	02 00	BB 20
MONITOR OUT - USB TYPE A	Set	COMPUTER IN1	BE EF	03	06 00	B6 F4	01 00	B6 20
		COMPUTER IN2	BE EF	03	06 00	76 F6	01 00	B6 20
		OFF	BE EF	03	06 00	46 B5	01 00	B6 20
	Get		BE EF	03	06 00	85 F4	02 00	B6 20
MONITOR OUT - USB TYPE B	Set	COMPUTER IN1	BE EF	03	06 00	6E F7	01 00	BC 20
		COMPUTER IN2	BE EF	03	06 00	AE F5	01 00	BC 20
		OFF	BE EF	03	06 00	9E B6	01 00	BC 20
	Get		BE EF	03	06 00	5D F7	02 00	BC 20
MONITOR OUT - STANDBY	Set	COMPUTER IN1 BE EF 03	06 00	2A F7 01	00 BF 20	00	00
		COMPUTER IN2 BE EF 03	06 00	EA F5 01	00 BF 20	04	00
		OFF	BE EF	03	06 00	DA B6	01 00	BF 20
	Get BE EF 03		F7 02	00 BF 20	00	00
VOLUME - COMPUTER IN1	Get BE EF 03		CD CC	02 00	60 20 00	00
	Increment		BE EF	03	06 00	AB CC	04 00	60 20
	Decrement		BE EF	03	06 00	7A CD	05 00	60 20
VOLUME - COMPUTER IN2	Get		BE EF	03	06 00	FD CD	02 00	64 20
	Increment		BE EF	03 06	00 9B CD	04 00 64	20 00 00
	Decrement		BE EF	03	06 00	4A CC	05 00	64 20
VOLUME - S-VIDEO	Get BE EF 03	06 00 75	CD 02	00 62	20 00 00
	Increment BE EF	03 06 00	13 CD	04 00 62	20 00 00
	Decrement BE EF	03 06 00	C2 CC	05 00 62	20 00 00
VOLUME - VIDEO	Get BE EF 03	06 00 31	CD 02	00 61	20 00 00
	Increment BE EF	03 06 00	57 CD	04 00 61	20 00 00
	Decrement BE EF	03 06 00	86 CC	05 00 61	20 00 00
VOLUME - HDMI	Get	BE EF	03	06 00	89 CC	02 00	63 20	00 00
	Increment	BE EF	03	06 00	EF CC	04 00	63 20	00 00
	Decrement	BE EF	03	06 00	3E CD	05 00	63 20	00 00
VOLUME - LAN	Get	BE EF	03	06 00	E9 CE	02 00	6B 20	00 00
	Increment	BE EF	03	06 00	8F CE	04 00	6B 20	00 00
	Decrement	BE EF	03	06 00	5E CF	05 00	6B 20	00 00
VOLUME - USB TYPE A	Get	BE EF	03	06 00	45 CC	02 00	66 20	00 00
	Increment	BE EF	03	06 00	23 CC	04 00	66 20	00 00
	Decrement	BE EF	03	06 00	F2 CD	05 00	66 20	00 00
VOLUME - USB TYPE B	Get	BE EF	03	06 00	9D CF	02 00	6C 20	00 00
	Increment	BE EF	03	06 00	FB CF	04 00	6C 20	00 00
	Decrement	BE EF	03	06 00	2A CE	05 00	6C 20	00 00
VOLUME - STANDBY	Get BE EF 03	06 00 D9	CF 02	00 6F	20 00 00
	Increment BE EF	03 06 00	BF CF	04 00 6F	20 00 00
	Decrement BE EF	03 06 00	6E CE	05 00 6F	20 00 00
MUTE	Set	OFF	BE EF	03	06 00	46 D3	01 00	02 20	00 00
		ON	BE EF	03 06	00 D6 D2	01 00 02	20 01 00
	Get BE EF 03		06 00	75 D3	02 00	02 20 00	00
SPEAKER	Set	ON	BE EF	03	06 00	FE D4	01 00	1C 20	01 00
		OFF	BE EF	03	06 00	6E D5	01 00	1C 20	00 00
	Get BE EF 03		06 00 5D	D5 02	00 1C 20	00 00
AUDIO SOURCE - COMPUTER IN1	Set	AUDIO IN1	BE EF	03 06	00 6E DC	01 00 30	20 01 00
		AUDIO IN2	BE EF	03 06	00 9E DC	01 00 30	20 02 00
		AUDIO IN3	BE EF	03 06	00 0E DD	01 00 30	20 03 00
		OFF	BE EF	03 06	00 FE DD	01 00 30	20 00 00
	Get BE EF 03		06 00	CD DD	02 00	30 20 00	00
AUDIO SOURCE - COMPUTER IN2	Set	AUDIO IN1	BE EF	03 06	00 5E DD	01 00 34	20 01 00
		AUDIO IN2	BE EF	03 06	00 AE DD	01 00	34 20 02	00
		AUDIO IN3	BE EF	03 06	00 3E DC	01 00 34	20 03 00
		OFF	BE EF	03	06 00	CE DC	01 00	34 20	00 00
	Get BE EF 03		06 00	FD DC	02 00	34 20 00	00
AUDIO SOURCE LAN	Set	OFF	BE EF	03	06 00	DA DF	01 00	3B 20	00 00
		AUDIO IN1	BE EF	03	06 00	4A DE	01 00	3B 20	01 00
		AUDIO IN2	BE EF	03	06 00	BA DE	01 00	3B 20	02 00
		AUDIO IN3	BE EF	03	06 00	2A DF	01 00	3B 20	03 00
	Get		BE EF	03	06 00	E9 DF	02 00	3B 20	00 00
AUDIO SOURCE - USB TYPE A	Set	OFF	BE EF	03	06 00	76 DD	01 00	36 20	00 00
		AUDIO IN1	BE EF	03	06 00	E6 DC	01 00	36 20	01 00
		AUDIO IN2	BE EF	03	06 00	16 DC	01 00	36 20	02 00
		AUDIO IN3	BE EF	03	06 00	86 DD	01 00	36 20	03 00
	Get		BE EF	03	06 00	45 DD	02 00	36 20	00 00
AUDIO SOURCE USB TYPE B	Set	OFF BE EF 03 06 00 AE DE 01 00 3C 20 00 00
		AUDIO IN1 BE EF 03 06 00 3E DF 01 00 3C 20 01 00
		AUDIO IN2 BE EF 03 06 00 CE DF 01 00 3C 20 02 00
		AUDIO IN3 BE EF 03 06 00 5E DE 01 00 3C 20 03 00
	Get BE EF 03 06 00 9D DE 02 00 3C 20 00 00
AUDIO SOURCE - HDMI	Set	OFF BE EF 03 06 00 BA DD 01 00 33 20 00 00
		AUDIO IN1 BE EF 03 06 00 2A DC 01 00 33 20 01 00
		AUDIO IN2 BE EF 03 06 00 DA DC 01 00 33 20 02 00
		AUDIO IN3 BE EF 03 06 00 4A DD 01 00 33 20 03 00
		HDMI	BE EF 03 06 00 7A C4 01 00 33 20 20 00
	Get BE EF 03 06 00 89 DD 02 00 33 20 00 00
AUDIO SOURCE - S-VIDEO	Set	AUDIO IN1	BE EF	03	06 00	D6 DD	01 00	32 20	01 00
		AUDIO IN2	BE EF	03	06 00	26 DD	01 00	32 20	02 00
		AUDIO IN3	BE EF	03	06 00	B6 DC	01 00	32 20	03 00
		OFF	BE EF	03	06 00	46 DC	01 00	32 20	00 00
	Get		BE EF	03	06 00	75 DC	02 00	32 20	00 00
AUDIO SOURCE - VIDEO	Set	AUDIO IN1	BE EF	03	06 00	92 DD	01 00	31 20	01 00
		AUDIO IN2	BE EF	03	06 00	62 DD	01 00	31 20	02 00
		AUDIO IN3	BE EF	03	06 00	F2 DC	01 00	31 20	03 00
		OFF	BE EF	03	06 00	02 DC	01 00	31 20	00 00
	Get		BE EF	03	06 00	31 DC	02 00	31 20	00 00
AUDIO SOURCE STANDBY	Set	AUDIO IN1	BE EF	03	06 00	7A DF	01 00	3F 20	01 00
		AUDIO IN2	BE EF	03	06 00	8A DF	01 00	3F 20	02 00
		AUDIO IN3	BE EF	03	06 00	1A DE	01 00	3F 20	03 00
		OFF	BE EF	03	06 00	EA DE	01 00	3F 20	00 00
	Get		BE EF	03	06 00	D9 DE	02 00	3F 20	00 00
HDMI AUDIO	Set	1	BE EF 03 06 00 AE C6 01 00 40 20 01 00
		2	BE EF 03 06 00 5E C6 01 00 40 20 02 00
	Get BE EF 03 06 00 0D C7 02 00 40 20 00 00
MIC LEVEL	Set	LOW	BE EF 03 06 00 02 F1 01 00 A1 20 00 00
		HIGH	BE EF 03 06 00 92 F0 01 00 A1 20 01 00
	Get BE EF 03 06 00 31 F1 02 00 A1 20 00 00
MIC VOLUME	Get BE EF 03 06 00 75 F1 02 00 A2 20 00 00
	Increment		BE EF 03 06 00 13 F1 04 00 A2 20 00 00
	Decrement		BE EF 03 06 00 C2 F0 05 00 A2 20 00 00
LANGUAGE	Set	ENGLISH	BE EF	03	06 00	F7 D3	01 00	05 30	00 00
		FRANÇAIS	BE EF	03	06 00	67 D2	01 00	05 30	01 00
		DEUTSCH	BE EF	03	06 00	97 D2	01 00	05 30	02 00
		ESPAÑOL	BE EF	03	06 00	07 D3	01 00	05 30	03 00
		ITALIANO	BE EF	03	06 00	37 D1	01 00	05 30	04 00
		NORSK	BE EF	03	06 00	A7 D0	01 00	05 30	05 00
		NEDERLANDS	BE EF	03	06 00	57 D0	01 00	05 30	06 00
		PORTUGUÉS	BE EF	03	06 00	C7 D1	01 00	05 30	07 00
		日本語	BE EF	03	06 00	37 D4	01 00	05 30	08 00
		简体中文	BE EF	03	06 00	A7 D5	01 00	05 30	09 00
		繁體中文	BE EF	03	06 00	37 DE	01 00	05 30	10 00
		한글	BE EF	03	06 00	57 D5	01 00	05 30	0A 00
		SVENSKA	BE EF	03	06 00	C7 D4	01 00	05 30	0B 00
		РУССКИЙ	BE EF	03	06 00	F7 D6	01 00	05 30	0C 00
		SUOMI	BE EF	03	06 00	67 D7	01 00	05 30	0D 00
	NOTE) Not all of the languages in this table are supported.

RS-232C Communication / Network command table (continued)

Names Operation Type Header								Command Data
								CRC Action Type	Setting code
LANGUAGE	Set	POLSKI BE EF 03 06 00 97 D7 01 00 05 30 0E	00
		TÜRKÇE BE EF 03 06 00 07 D6 01 00 05 30 0F	00
		DANSK BE EF 03 06 00 A7 DF 01 00 05 30 11	00
		ČESKY BE EF 03 06 00 57 DF 01 00 05 30 12	00
		MAGYAR BE EF 03 06 00 C7 DE 01 00 05 30 13	00
		ROMÂNÃ BE EF 03 06 00 F7 DC 01 00 05 30 14	00
		SLOVENSKI BE EF 03 06 00 67 DD 01 00 05 30 15	00
		HRVATSKI BE EF 03 06 00 00 97 DD 01 00 05 30 16	00
		ΕΛΛΗΝΙΚΑ BE EF 03 06 00 00 07 DC 01 00 05 30 17	00
		LIETUVIU BE EF 03 06 00 00 07 D9 F7 D9 01 00 05 30 18	00
		EESTI BE EF 03 06 00 67 D8 01 00 05 30 19	00
		LATVIEŚU BE EF 03 06 00 00 07 D9 01 00 05 30 1B	00
		اللغة العربية BE EF 03 06 00 37 DB 01 00 05 30 1C	00
		فارسی BE EF 03 06 00 A7 DA 01 00 05 30 1D	00
		PORTUGUÊS BRA BE EF 03 06 00 57 DA 01 00 05 30 1E	00
	Get		BE EF 03 06 00 C4 D3 02 00 05 30 00	00	00
	NOTE) Not all of the languages in this table are supported.
MENU POSITION H	Get		BE EF 03 06 00 04 D7 02 00 15 30 00	00
	Increment		BE EF 03 06 00 62 D7 04 00 15 30 00	00
	Decrement		BE EF 03 06 00 B3 D6 05 00	15 30	00	00
MENU POSITION H Reset	Execute BE EF		03 06 00 DC C6 06 00 48 70 00	00
MENU POSITION V	Get		BE EF 03 06 00 40 D7 02 00 16 30 00	00
	Increment		BE EF 03 06 00 26 D7 04 00 16 30 00	00
	Decrement		BE EF 03 06 00 F7 D6 05 00	16 30	00	00
MENU POSITION V Reset	Execute BE EF		03 06 00 A8 C7 06 00 44 70 00	00
BLANK	Set	MyScreen	BE EF 03 06 00 FB CA 01 00	00	20	00
		ORIGINAL	BE EF 03 06 00 00 FB E2 01 00 00 30	00	30	40	00
		BLUE	BE EF 03 06 00 CB D3 01 00	00	30	00	00
		WHITE	BE EF 03 06 00 00 6B D0 01 00 00 30 05	00	30	05	00
		BLACK	BE EF 03 06 00 00 9B D0 01 00 00 30 06	00	30	06	00
	Get		BE EF 03 06 00 08 D3 02 00	00	30	00	00
BLANK On/Off	Set	OFF	BE EF 03 06 00 FB D8 01 00	20	00	00
		ON	BE EF 03 06 00 00 6B D9 01 00 20 30 01	00	20	30	01	00
	Get		BE EF 03 06 00 C8 D8 02 00	20	30	00	00
START UP	Set	MyScreen	BE EF 03 06 00 00 CB CB 01 00 04 30 20	00	30	20	00
		ORIGINAL	BE EF 03 06 00 00 B D2 01 00 04 30 00	00	30	20	00
		OFF	BE EF 03 06 00 00 9B D3 01 00 04 30 01	00	30	20	00
	Get		BE EF 03 06 00 38 D2 02 00	04	30	00	00
MyScreen Lock	Set	OFF	BE EF 03 06 00 3B EF 01 00 C0 30	00	30	00	00
		ON	BE EF 03 06 00 AB EE 01 00 C0 30	01	30	01	00
	Get		BE EF 03 06 00 08 EF 02 00 C0 30	00	30	00	00
MESSAGE	Set	OFF	BE EF 03 06 00 06	00	8F D6	01	00	17	30	00	00
		ON	BE EF 03 06 00 1F D7	01	00	17	30	01	00
	Get		BE EF 03 06 00 BC D6 02 00	17	30	00	00
Names Operation Type Header									Command Data
									CRC Action Type	Setting code
TEMPLATE	Set	TEST PATTERN BE EF 03 06 00 43 D9 01 00 22 30 00 00
		DOT-LINE1 BE EF 03 06 00 D3 D8 01 00 22 30 01 00
		DOT-LINE2 BE EF 03 06 00 23 D8 01 00 22 30 02 00
		DOT-LINE3 BE EF 03 06 00 B3 D9 01 00 22 30 03 00
		DOT-LINE4 BE EF 03 06 00 83 DB 01 00 22 30 04 00
		CIRCLE 1 BE EF 03 06 00 13 DA 01 00 22 30 05 00
		CIRCLE 2 BE EF 03 06 00 E3 DA 01 00 22 30 06 00
		MAP 1 BE EF 03 06 00 06 00 83 D4 01 00 22 30 10 00
		MAP 2 BE EF 03 06 00 06 00 13 D5 01 00 22 30 11 00
	Get		BE EF 03 06 00 70 D9 02 00 22 30 00 00
TEMPLATE On/Off	Set	OFF	BE EF 03 06 00 BF D8 01 00 23 30 00 00
		ON	BE EF 03 06 00 2F D9 01 00 23 30 01 00
	Get		BE EF 03 06 00 8C D8 02 00 23 30 00 00
C. C. - DISPLAY	Set	OFF	BE EF 03 06 00 FA 62 01 00 00 37 00 00
		ON	BE EF 03 06 00 6A 63 01 00 00 37 01 00
		AUTO	BE EF 03 06 00 9A 63 01 00 00 37 02 00
	Get		BE EF 03 06 00 C9 62 02 00 00 37 00 00
C. C. - MODE	Set	CAPTIONS BE EF 03 06 00 06 63 01 00 01 37 00 00
		TEXT	BE EF 03 06 00 96 62 01 00 01 37 01 00
	Get		BE EF 03 06 00 35 63 02 00 01 37 00 00
C. C. - CHANNEL	Set	1	BE EF 03 06 00 D2 62 01 00 02 37 01 00
		2	BE EF 03 06 00 22 62 01 00 02 37 02 00
		3	BE EF 03 06 00 B2 63 01 00 02 37 03 00
		4	BE EF 03 06 00 82 61 01 00 02 37 04 00
	Get		BE EF 03 06 00 71 63 02 00 02 37 00 00
AUTO SEARCH	Set	OFF	BE EF 03 06 00 B6 D6 01 00 16 20 00 00
		ON	BE EF 03 06 00 26 D7 01 00 16 20 01 00
	Get		BE EF 03 06 00 85 D6 02 00 16 20 00 00
DIRECT POWER ON	Set	OFF	BE EF 03 06 00 3B 89 01 00 20 31 00 00
		ON	BE EF 03 06 00 AB 88 01 00 20 31 01 00
	Get		BE EF 03 06 00 88 89 02 00 20 31 00 00
AUTO POWER OFF	Get		BE EF 03 06 00 86 86 02 00 10 31 00 00
	Increment		BE EF 03 06 00 6E 86 04 00 10 31 00 00
	Decrement		BE EF 03 06 00 BF 87 05 00 10 31 00 00
USB TYPE B	Set	MOUSE	BE EF 03 06 00 60 00 FF 23 01 00 50 26 00 00
		USB DISPLAY	BE EF 03 06 00 60 00 6F 22 01 00 50 26 01 00
	Get		BE EF 03 06 00 60 00 CC 23 02 00 50 26 00 00
LAMP TIME	Get		BE EF 03 06 00 C2 FF 02 00 90 10 00 00
LAMP TIME Reset	Execute BE EF 03 06 00 58 DC 06 00 30 70 00 00
FILTER TIME	Get		BE EF 03 06 00 C2 F0 02 00 A0 10 00 00
FILTER TIME Reset	Execute BE EF 03 06 00 98 C6 06 00 40 70 00 00
MY BUTTON-1	Set	COMPUTER IN1 BE	EF 03	06 00	3A 33 01	00 00 36	00 00
		COMPUTER IN2 BE	EF 03	06 00	FA 31 01	00 00 36	04 00
		LAN BE EF	03 06 00	0A 34 01	00 00 36	0B 00
		USB TYPE A BE	EF 03 06	00 9A	30 01 00	00 36 06	00
		USB TYPE B BE	EF 03 06	00 3A	36 01 00	00 36 0C	00
		HDMI	BE EF 03	06 00	00 CA 33 01	00 00 36	03 00
		S-VIDEO	BE EF 03	06 00	00 5A 32	01 00 00	36 02 00
		VIDEO	BE EF	03	06 00	AA 32	01 00	00 36	01 00
		SLIDESHOW BE	EF 03	06 00	9A 2E	01 00 00	36 22 00
		MY IMAGE	BE EF 03	06 00	00 5A 3D	01 00 00	36 16 00
		MESSENGER BE	EF 03	06 00	AA 29 01	00 00 36	25 00
		INFORMATION BE	EF 03	06 00	FA 3E	01 00	00 36 10	00
		MY MEMORY	BE EF	03	06 00	9A 3F	01 00	00 36	12 00
		ACTIVE IRIS	BE EF	03 06	00 AA 3D	01 00 00	36 15 00
		PICTURE MODE	BE EF	03	06 00	0A 3E	01 00	00 36	13 00
		FILTER RESET BE	EF 03	06 00	3A 3C	01 00	00 36 14	00
		AV MUTE	BE EF	03	06 00	AA 38	01 00	00 36	19 00
		TEMPLATE BE	EF 03 06	00	CA 39	01 00 00	36 1B 00
		D-ZOOM	BE EF	03	06 00	FA 3B	01 00	00 36	1C 00
		D-SHIFT	BE EF	03	06 00	6A 3A	01 00	00 36	1D 00
		RESOLUTION	BE EF 03	06 00	9A 3A	01 00 00	36 1E 00
		MIC VOLUME	BE EF 03	06 00	9A 24 01	00 00 36	36 00
		ECO MODE	BE EF 03	06 00	0A 25 01	00 00 36	37 00
	Get		BE EF 03	06 00	09 33 02	00 00	36 00 00
MY BUTTON-2	Set	COMPUTER IN1 BE	EF 03	06 00	C6 32	01 00	01 36 00	00
		COMPUTER IN2 BE	EF 03	06 00	06 30 01	00 01 36	04 00
		LAN BE EF	03 06 00	F6 35 01	1 00 01 36	0B 00
		USB TYPE A	BE EF 03	06 00	66 31 01	00 01 36	06 00
		USB TYPE B BE	EF 03 06	00	C6 37	01 00 01	36 0C 00
		HDMI	BE EF 03	06 00	36 32 01	00 01 36	03 00
		S-VIDEO	BE EF 03	06 00	A6	33 01 00	01 36 02	00
		VIDEO	BE EF 03	06 00	56 33	01 00 01	36 01 00
		SLIDESHOW BE	EF 03	06 00	66 2A	01 00 01	36 22 00
		MY IMAGE	BE EF 03	06 00	A6 3C	01 00 01	36 16 00
		MESSENGER BE	EF 03	06 00	56 28 01	00 01 36	25 00
		INFORMATION	BE EF 03	06 00	06 3F	01 00 01	36 10 00
		MY MEMORY	BE EF 03	06 00	66 3E	01 00 01	36 12 00
		ACTIVE IRIS	BE EF	03	06 00	56 3C	01 00	01 36	15 00
		PICTURE MODE	BE EF 03	06 00	F6	3F 01 00	01 36 13	00
		FILTER RESET BE	EF 03	06 00	C6 3D	01 00 01	36 14 00
		AV MUTE	BE EF 03	06 00	56 39	01 00 01	36 19 00
		TEMPLATE	BE EF	03	06 00	36 38	01 00	01 36	1B 00
		D-ZOOM	BE EF	03	06 00	06 3A	01 00	01 36	1C 00
		D-SHIFT	BE EF	03	06 00	96 3B	01 00	01 36	1D 00
		RESOLUTION	BE EF	03	06 00	66 3B	01 00	01 36	1E 00
		MIC VOLUME	BE EF 03	06 00	66 25 01	1 00 01	36 36 00
		ECO MODE	BE EF 03	06 00	F6 24 01	1 00 01	36 37 00
	Get		BE EF 03	06 00	F5 32 02	00 01	36 00 00
MY SOURCE	Set	COMPUTER IN1 BE EF 03 06 00 FA 38 01 00 20 36 00 00
		COMPUTER IN2 BE EF 03 06 00 3A 3A 01 00 20 36 04 00
		LAN BE EF 03 06 00 CA 3F 01 00 20 36 0B 00
		USB TYPE A	BE EF 03 06 00 5A 3B 01 00 20 36 06 00
		USB TYPE B	BE EF 03 06 00 FA 3D 01 00 20 36 0C 00
		HDMI	BE EF 03 06 00 0A 38 01 00 20 36 03 00
		S-VIDEO	BE EF 03 06 00 9A 39 01 00 20 36 02 00
		VIDEO	BE EF 03 06 00 6A 39 01 00 20 36 01 00
	Get		BE EF 03 06 00 C9 38 02 00 20 36 00 00
Magnify Position H	Get		BE EF	03	06 00	C8 D7	02 00	10 30	00 00
	Increment		BE EF	03	06 00	AE D7	04 00	10 30	00 00
	Decrement		BE EF 03 06 00 7F D6 05 00 10 30 00 00
Magnify Position V	Get		BE EF	03	06 00	34 D6	02 00	11 30	00 00
	Increment		BE EF	03	06 00	52 D6	04 00	11 30	00 00
	Decrement		BE EF	03	06 00	83 D7	05 00	11 30	00 00
REMOTE FREQ. NORMAL	Set	OFF	BE EF 03 06 00 FF 3D 01 00 30 26 00 00
		ON	BE EF 03 06 00 6F 3C 01 00 30 26 01 00
	Get		BE EF 03 06 00 CC 3D 02 00 30 26 00 00
REMOTE FREQ. HIGH	Set	OFF	BE EF	03	06 00	03 3C	01 00	31 26	00 00
		ON	BE EF 03 06 00 93 3D 01 00 31 26 01 00
	Get		BE EF 03 06 00 30 3C 02 00 31 26 00 00
MY IMAGE	Set	OFF	BE EF	03	06 00	3A C3	01 00	00 35	00 00
		IMAGE-1	BE EF	03	06 00	AA C2	01 00	00 35	01 00
		IMAGE-2	BE EF 03 06 00 5A C2 01 00 00 35 02 00
		IMAGE-3	BE EF	03	06 00	CA C3	01 00	00 35	03 00
		IMAGE-4	BE EF 03 06 00 FA C1 01 00 00 35 04 00
	Get		BE EF	03	06 00	09 C3	02 00	00 35	00 00
MY IMAGE IMAGE-1 Delete	Execute		BE EF	03	06 00	71 C3	06 00	01 35	00 00
MY IMAGE IMAGE-2 Delete	Execute		BE EF	03	06 00	35 C3	06 00	02 35	00 00
MY IMAGE IMAGE-3 Delete	Execute		BE EF	03	06 00	C9 C2	06 00	03 35	00 00
MY IMAGE IMAGE-4 Delete	Execute		BE EF	03	06 00	BD C3	06 00	04 35	00 00

PJLink command

Commands	Control Description Parameter or Response
POWR Power Control	Power Control	0 = Standby
		1 = Power On
POWR ? Power Status inquiry	Power Status inquiry	0 = Standby
		1 = Power On
		2 = Cool Down
INPT Input Source selection	Source selection	11 = COMPUTER IN 1
		12 = COMPUTER IN 2
		22 = S-VIDEO
		23 = VIDEO
		31 = HDMI
		41 = USB TYPE A
		51 = LAN
		52 = USB TYPE B
INPT ? Input Source inquiry	Source inquiry	11 = COMPUTER IN 1
		12 = COMPUTER IN 2
		22 = S-VIDEO
		23 = VIDEO
		31 = HDMI
		41 = USB TYPE A
		51 = LAN
		52 = USB TYPE B
AVMT AV	Mute	10 = BLANK off
		11 = BLANK on
		20 = Mute off
		21 = Mute on
		30 = AV Mute off
		31 = AV Mute on
AVMT ? AV	Mute inquiry	10 = BLANK off
		11 = BLANK on
		20 = Mute off
		21 = Mute on
		30 = AV Mute off
		31 = AV Mute on
ERST ? Error Status inquiry		1st byte: Refers to Fan error; one of 0 to 2
		2nd byte: Refers to Lamp error; one of 0 to 2
		3rd byte: Refers to Temptrature error; one of 0 to 2
		4th byte: Refers to Cover error; one of 0 to 2
		5th byte: Refers to Filter error; one of 0 to 2
		6th byte: Refers to Other error; one of 0 to 2
		The meaning of 0 to 2 is as given below
		0 = Error is not detected; 1 = Warning; 2 = Error
LAMP ? Lamp Status inquiry		1st number (digits 1 to 5): Lamp Time
		2nd number : 0 = Lamp off, 1 = Lamp on
INST ? Input Source List inquiry 11 12		22 23 31 41 51 52
NAME ? Projector Name inquiry		Responds with the name set in "PROJECTOR NAME" of "NETWORK"
INF1 ?	Manufacturer's Name inquiry	HITACHI
INF2 ? Model Name inquiry ED-A220N
INFO ? Other Information inquiry		Responds with the factory information and so on
CLSS ? Class Information inquiry 1

NOTE • The password used in PJLink™ is the same as the password set in the Web Brouwser Comtrol. To use PJLink™ without authentication, do not set any password in Web Browser Control.

- For specifications of PJLink™, see the web site of the Japan Business Machine and Information System Industries Association.

Thank you for purchasing this projector.

Please read through this manual before using this product, in order to use safely and utilize well the product.

⚠ WARNING ▶ Before using this product, be sure to read all manuals for this product. See the “Using the CD manual” (20) to read the manuals in the CD. After reading them, store them in a safe place for future reference.

▶Heed all the warnings and cautions in the manuals or on the product.
▶ Follow all the instructions in the manuals or on the product.

NOTE • In this manual, unless any comments are accompanied, “the manuals” means all the documents provided with this product, and “the product” means this projector and all the accessories came with the projector.

Contents

[Non-Text]

First of all.... 2

Entries and graphical symbols explanation .....2

Important safety instruction ....2

Regulatory notices.... 3

About Electro-Magnetic Interference ....3

About Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment...4

Contents of package.... 4

Arrangement...... 5

Connecting with your devices...... 6

Connecting power supply 8

Using the cable cover.... 9

Preparing for the remote control..... 10

[Non-Text]

Turning on the power.... 11

Adjusting the projector's elevator ..... 12

Operation.... 12

Turning off the power.... 14

Replacing the lamp.... 15

Cleaning and replacing the air filter .. 17

Replacing the internal clock battery.. 18

Caring for the mirror and lens...... 19

Using the CD manual 20

Specifications 21

Troubleshooting

- Warranty and after-service ...... 22

First of all

Entries and graphical symbols explanation

The following entries and graphical symbols are used for the manuals and the product as follows, for safety purpose. Please know their meanings beforehand, and heed them.

⚠ WARNING This entry warns of a risk of serious personal injury or even death.

⚠️CAUTION This entry warns of a risk of personal injury or physical damage.

NOTICE This entry notices of fear of causing trouble.

Important safety instruction

The followings are important instructions for safely using the product. Be sure to follow them always when handling the product. The manufacturer assumes no responsibility for any damage caused by mishandling that is beyond normal usage defined in these manuals of this projector.

⚠ WARNING ▶ Never use the product in or after an abnormality (ex. giving off smoke, smelling strange, took a liquid or an object inside, broken, etc.) If an abnormality should occur, unplug the projector urgently.

▶ Situate the product away from children and pets.
▶Do not use the product when there is fear of a thunderbolt.
▶ Unplug the projector from the power outlet if the projector is not used for the time being.
▶ Do not open or remove any portion of the product, unless the manuals direct it. For internal maintenance, leave it to your dealer or their service personnel.
▶ Use only the accessories specified or recommended by the manufacturer.
▶ Do not modify the projector or accessories.
▶ Do not let any things or any liquids enter to the inside of the product.
▶ Do not wet the product.
▶ Do not place the projector where any oils, such as cooking or machine oil, are used. Oil may harm the product, resulting in malfunction, or falling from the mounted position.
▶ Do not apply a shock or pressure to this product.

- Do not place the product on an unstable place such as the uneven surface or the leaned table.

- Do not place the product unstably. Place the projector so that it does not protrude from the surface where the projector is placed on.

- Remove all the attachments including the power cord and cables, from the projector when carrying the projector.

▶ Never look into the projection lens or mirror while the projection lamp lights, since the projection lamp ray may cause a trouble on your eyes.

▶Do not approach the lamp cover and the exhaust vents, while the projection lamp is on. Also after the lamp goes out, do not approach them for a while, since too hot.

Regulatory notices

About Electro-Magnetic Interference

This is a Class A product. In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures.

This product may cause interference if used in residential areas. Such use must be avoided unless the user takes special measures to reduce electromagnetic emissions to prevent interference to the reception of radio and television broadcasts.

In Canada

This Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.

In the US and places where the FCC regulations are applicable

This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules.

These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to case harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense.

INSTRUCTIONS TO USERS: Some cables have to be used with the core set. Use the accessory cable or a designated type cable for the connection. For cables that have a core only at one end, connect the core to the projector.

CAUTION: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

Regulatory notices (continued)

About Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment

The mark is in compliance with the Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment Directive 2002/96/EC (WEEE).

The mark indicates the requirement NOT to dispose the equipment including any spent or discarded batteries or accumulators as unsorted municipal waste, but use the return and collection systems available. If the batteries or accumulators included with this equipment, display the chemical symbol Hg, Cd, or Pb, then it means that the battery has a heavy metal content of more than 0.0005% Mercury or more than, 0.002% Cadmium, or more than 0.004% Lead.

Contents of package

Your projector should come with the items shown below. Check that all the items are included. Require of your dealer immediately if any items are missing.

(1) Remote control with the two AA batteries
(2) Power cord
(3) Computer cable
(4) Parts of cable cover
(5) User's manuals (Book x1, CD x1)
(6) Security label
(7) Application CD
(8) Wall mount unit and User's manual

(1)

(5)

(6)

(2)

(7)

(3)

(8)

Technical line drawing of a mechanical device with internal components and mounting base (no text or symbols)

(4)

⚠ WARNING ▶ Do not attempt to install the projector yourself. Have your dealer or service center handle all installation work. Note that manufacturer will accept no liability whatsoever for accidents or injuries resulting from an incorrect installation or improper use.

NOTE • Keep the original packing materials for future reshipment. Be sure to use the original packing materials when moving the projector. Use special caution for the lens.

Arrangement

Refer to the illustrations and tables below to determine screen size and projection distance.

The values shown in the table are calculated for a full size screen: 1024 x 768

① Screen size (diagonal)

(b) Projection distance ( ±8% )

c1, c2 Screen height (±8%)

- On a horizontal surface

a c2 c1 b

- Mounted on the wall or ceiling

a c1 b c2

Screen size (diagonal)		Projection distance		c1 Screen height		c2 Screen height
type(inch)	m m	inch m inch	m inch
60 1.5	0.096	3.8 0.28	1 11.1 1	196 47.1
70 1.8	0.161	6.3 0.31	7 12.5 1	384 54.5
80 2.0	0.225	8.9 0.35	2 13.9 1	571 61.9
90 2.3	0.289	11.4 0.3	87 15.2	1.759 69.2
100 2.5	0.353	13.9 0.4	23 16.6	1.947 76.6

• If the projector is used at an altitude of about 1600 m or higher, set FAN SPEED of the SERVICE item in the OPTION menu to HIGH. Otherwise, set it to NORMAL. If the projector is used with a wrong setting, it may cause damage to the projector itself or the parts inside.
• Keep a space of 30 cm or more between the sides of the projector and other objects such as walls. Do not place or attach anything that would block the lens or vent holes.

• For the case of installation in special conditions such as on the wall or ceiling, the specified mounting accessories (21) and service may be required. Before installing the projector, consult your dealer about your installation.

• The screen position may shift after installation if the projector is mounted on locations such as the wall or ceiling, due to the flexibility of the plastic projector body. If readjustment is necessary, consult with your dealer or service personnel.

• The projected image position and/or focus may change during warm-up (approx. 30 minutes after the lamp is turned on) or when the ambient conditions change. Readjust the image position and/or focus as necessary.
• Since the projector features an ultra short throw, be aware that it is required to select a screen carefully to have better performance.
• A soft screen such as a pull-down screen may cause serious distortion of a projected image. A hard screen such as a board screen is recommended for use with this projector.
• A high-gain screen such as a bead screen that has narrow viewing angle is not suitable for this projector. A low-gain screen (around 1.0) such as a matte screen that has wide viewing angle is recommended for use with this projector.
• A screen with a weave pattern may cause moiré on the projected image, which is not a failure of the projector. A screen that has less moiré effects is recommended for use with this projector.

⚠ WARNING ▶ Install the projector in a stable horizontal position.

▶ Place the projector in a cool place, and ensure that there is sufficient ventilation. Do not place the projector where the air from an air conditioner or similar unit will blow on it directly.
▶ Do not place the projector anyplace where it may get wet.
▶ Use only the mounting accessories the manufacturer specified, and leave installing and removing the projector with the mounting accessories to the service personnel.
▶ Read and keep the user's manual of the mounting accessories used.
⚠️CAUTION ▶Avoid placing the projector in smoky, humid or dusty place.
Position the projector to prevent light from directly hitting the projector's remote sensor.

Arrangement (continued)

NOTE • The projector may make a rattling sound when tilted, moved or shaken, since a flap to control the air flow inside of the projector has moved. Be aware that this is not a failure or malfunction.

Connecting with your devices

Be sure to read the manuals for devices before connecting them to the projector. Make sure that all the devices are suitable to be connected with this product, and prepare the cables required to connect. Please refer to the following illustrations to connect them.

For details, please see "User's Manual" - "Operating Guide" and "Network Guide". (20, 22)

• When AUTO is selected for the COMPUTER IN1 or COMPUTER IN2 port in COMPUTER IN of the INPUT menu, that port will accept component video signals.
  • To use network functions of the projector, connect the LAN port with the computer's LAN port, or with an access point that is connected to the computer with wireless LAN, using a LAN cable.

graph TD
    A["VCR/DVD/Blu-ray Disc player"] -->|USB TYPE A DC5V 0.5A| B["Computer"]
    A -->|USB TYPE B H| C["Access point"]
    C --> D["Computer"]
    A --> E["CONTROL"]
    A --> F["MONITOR OUT"]
    A --> G["MIC"]
    A --> H["AUDIO IN3"]
    A --> I["S-VIDEO"]
    A --> J["VIDEO"]
    A --> K["RS-232C"]
    A --> L["Audio OUT"]
    A --> M["Audio OUT"]
    A --> N["Audio OUT"]
    A --> O["Audio OUT"]
    A --> P["Audio OUT"]
    A --> Q["Audio OUT"]
    A --> R["Audio OUT"]
    A --> S["Audio OUT"]
    A --> T["Audio OUT"]
    A --> U["Audio OUT"]
    A --> V["Audio OUT"]
    A --> W["Audio OUT"]
    A --> X["Audio OUT"]
    A --> Y["Audio OUT"]
    A --> Z["Audio OUT"]
    A --> AA["Audio OUT"]
    A --> AB["Audio OUT"]
    A --> AC["Audio OUT"]
    A --> AD["Audio OUT"]
    A --> AE["Audio OUT"]
    A --> AF["Audio OUT"]
    A --> AG["Audio OUT"]
    A --> AH["Audio OUT"]
    A --> AI["Audio OUT"]
    A --> AJ["Audio OUT"]
    A --> AK["Audio OUT"]

• If you insert a USB storage device, such as a USB memory, into the USB TYPE A port and select the port as the input source, you can view images stored in the device.
• You can connect a dynamic microphone to the MIC port with a 3.5 mm mini-plug. In that case, the built-in speaker outputs the sound from the microphone, even while the sound from the projector is output.

(continued on next page)

Connecting with your devices (continued)

Monitor RGB IN Microphone system Speakers (with an amplifier) USB storage device USB TYPE B HDMI COMPUTER IN1 COMPUTER IN2 USB TYPE A DC5V 0.5A CONTROL MO UT MIC AUDIO IN3A AUDIO IN4C S-VIDEO AUDIO IN2 VIDEO

⚠ WARNING ▶ Use only the appropriate accessories. Otherwise it could cause a fire or damage to the device and the projector.

• Use only the accessories specified or recommended by the projector's manufacturer. Consult your dealer when the required accessory did not come with the product or the accessory is damaged. It may be regulated under some standard.
• For a cable with a core at only one end, connect the end with the core to the projector. That may be required by EMI regulations.
• Neither disassemble nor modify the projector and the accessories.
• Do not use the damaged accessory. Be careful not to damage the accessories. Route a cable so that it is neither stepped on nor pinched out.

⚠️CAUTION ▶Do not turn on or off the projector while connected to a device in operation, unless that is directed in the manual of the device.

▶ Be careful not to mistakenly connect a connector to a wrong port.
▶ Before connecting the projector to a network, be sure to obtain the consent of the administrator of the network.
▶ Do not connect the LAN port to any network that might have the excessive voltage.
▶ Before removing the USB storage device from the port of the projector, be sure to use the REMOVE USB function on the thumbnail screen to secure your data.
NOTICE ▶ Use the cables with straight plugs, not L-shaped ones, as the input ports of the projector are recessed.

NOTE • If a loud feedback noise is produced from the speaker, move the microphone away from the speaker.
- This projector doesn't support plug-in power for the microphone.
- The COMPUTER IN1/2 port can support a component signal also. The specific adapter or the specific cable is required for a component video input to the projector.

Connecting power supply

1. Put the connector of the power cord into the AC IN (AC inlet) of the projector.
2. Firmly plug the power cord's plug into the outlet. In a couple of seconds after the power supply connection, the POWER indicator will light up in steady orange.

Please remember that when the DIRECT POWER ON function activated, the connection of the power supply make the projector turn on.

Illustration of a printer with a magnified view showing a person's face and pointing at a cable (no text or symbols present)

AC IN
Power cord

⚠ WARNING ▶ Please use extra caution when connecting the power cord, as incorrect or faulty connections may result in fire and/or electrical shock.

• Only use the power cord that came with the projector. If it is damaged, consult your dealer to get a new one.
• Only plug the power cord into an outlet whose voltage is matched to the power cord. The power outlet should be close to the projector and easily accessible. Remove the power cord for complete separation.
• Never modify the power cord.

NOTICE ▶This product is also designed for IT power systems with a phase-to-phase voltage of 220 to 240 V.

Using the cable cover

Utilize the cable cover as the guard and blind for the connecting parts.

1. Connect the signal cables and the power cord to the projector first.

2. Combine parts as shown in figure, and assemble the cable cover.

Technical diagram showing exploded and assembled views of a vehicle chassis with numbered components

1. Insert the three knobs on the cable cover into the three holes on the projector as shown in the figure. Pass the cables through the holes on the bottom of the cable cover.

1 2 3 knobs 1 3 2

△CAUTION ▶ Be careful not to pinch the cables in the cable cover, to prevent damage to the cables.

▶ Use the cable cover that is supplied with the projector. Do not attempt any modifications to the cable cover.

Preparing for the remote control

Please insert the batteries into the remote control before using it. If the remote control starts to malfunction, try to replace the batteries. If you will not use the remote control for long period, remove the batteries from the remote control and store them in a safe place.

1. Holding the hook part of the battery cover, remove it.

2. Align and insert the two AA batteries (HITACHI MAXELL, Part No.LR6 or R6P) according to their plus and minus terminals as indicated in the remote control.

3. Replace the battery cover in the direction of the arrow and snap it back into place.

Illustration showing three-step instructions for using a handheld device, labeled 1, 2, and 3.

NOTE

• Try changing the batteries when the remote control malfunctions.
• This remote control works with the remote sensors on the projector using infrared light (Class 1 LED). The active sensor senses the remote control signal assigned within 60 degrees to right and left, and within 3 meters. For details, see the Operating Guide in the CD.
• Prevent the remote sensors from being hit by a strong ray. It may cause malfunction of the projector and remote control.

Remote sensor

Line drawing of a portable electronic device with ventilation slots and a cable (no text or symbols)

30° 30° 3m (approx.)

⚠ WARNING ▶ Always handle the batteries with care and use them only as directed. Improper use may result in battery explosion, cracking or leakage, which could result in fire, injury and/or pollution of the surrounding environment.
- Be sure to use only the batteries specified. Do not use batteries of different types at the same time. Do not mix a new battery with used one.
- Make sure the plus and minus terminals are correctly aligned when loading a battery.
- Keep a battery away from children and pets.
- Do not recharge, short circuit, solder or disassemble a battery.
- Do not place a battery in a fire or water. Keep batteries in a dark, cool and dry place.
- If you observe battery leakage, wipe out the leakage and then replace a battery. If the leakage adheres to your body or clothes, rinse well with water immediately.
- Obey the local laws on disposing the battery.

Turning on the power

1. Make sure that the power cord is firmly and correctly connected to the projector and the outlet.
2. Make sure that the POWER indicator is steady orange.
3. Confirm that there is nothing that the lens door hits while opening. Press the STANDBY/ON button on the projector or the remote control. The lens door opens, the projection lamp lights up, and the POWER indicator begins to blink green. When the

power is completely on, the indicator will stop blinking and light in steady green.

STANDBY/ON button POWER indicator MENU INPUT STANDBY/ON POWER TEMP LAMP FOSA FOSA ENGLISH

⚠ WARNING ▶ Never look into the projection lens or mirror while the projection lamp lights, since the projection lamp ray may cause a trouble on your eyes.

▶ Be careful not to pinch your finger with the lens door, to prevent an injury.
▶ Do not place the projector vertically with the lens door open as shown in the figure on the right. It could cause malfunction or injury.
▶ Do not stand under the projector mounted on the wall or ceiling, when its lens door is opening or closing. Moreover, do not look at the mirror when the lens door is opening or closing.
▶ Never touch a lens door or mirror. If the mirror is broken, the projected image will be distorted. Close the lens door, and contact your dealer.

Diagram of a device with internal components and a prohibition symbol (no text or labels)

NOTE • Please power on the projector prior to the connected devices.

- The projector has the DIRECT POWER ON function, which can make the projector automatically turn on. For more information, please see the "Operating Guide" in the CD.

Adjusting the projector's elevator

The projector has Front foot for inclinations and Rear foot for horizontals. Spacers on the each elevator foot are installed at the time of shipment, and projector is in a condition to be able to just project. If necessary, detach the spacer, and the elevator feet can be manually twisted to make more precise adjustments.

⚠ WARNING ▶ Keep the spacers away from children and pets. Be careful not to let them swallow the spacers. If swallowed consult a physician immediately for emergency treatment.

NOTE • The adjustment angle can be adjusted up to plus or minus 1^ each of Front and Rear foot.
• After the foot is adjusted, it is possible to return it to the state of the shipment with a spacer. Install Large on the Front foot and Small on the Rear foot of the spacer. If change the setting place of the projector, it will recommend keep and reuse the spacers.

Operation

INPUT button FOCUS - button FOCUS + button

COMPUTER button VIDEO button

Displaying and switching the image

Press the INPUT button on the projector. Each time you press the button, the projector switches its input port in turn. You can also use the remote control to select an input signal. Press the VIDEO button for selecting an input signal from the HDMI, S-VIDEO or VIDEO port, or the COMPUTER button for selecting an input signal from the COMPUTER IN1, COMPUTER IN2, LAN, USB TYPE A or USB TYPE B port.

Focusing

Use the FOCUS + and FOCUS – buttons on the projector or remote control to adjust the screen focus.

Selecting an aspect ratio

Each time you press the ASPECT button on the remote control, it switches the aspect ratio of the image, in turn.

Zooming

Use the D-ZOOM + and D-ZOOM – buttons on the remote control to adjust the screen size.

MODE1 MODE2 MODE3 MODE4 MODE5 MODE6 MODE7 MODE8 MODE9 MODE10 MODE11 MODE12 MODE13 MODE14 MODE15 MODE16 MODE17 MODE18 MODE19 MODE20 MODE21 MODE22 MODE23 MODE24 MODE25 MODE26 MODE27 MODE28 MODE29 MODE30 MODE31 MODE32 MODE33 MODE34 MODE35 MODE36 MODE37 MODE38 MODE39 MODE40 MODE41 MODE42 MODE43 MODE44 MODE45 MODE46 MODE47 MODE48 MODE49 MODE50 MODE51 MODE52 MODE53 MODE54 MODE55 MODE56 MODE57 MODE58 MODE59 MODE60 MODE61 MODE62 MODE63 MODE64 MODE65 MODE66 MODE67 MODE68 MODE69 MODE70 MODE71 MODE72 MODE73 MODE74 MODE75 MODE76 MODE77 MODE78 MODE79 MODE80

ASPECT button

VOLUME+/- button

KEYSTONE button

MUTE button

D-ZOOM + button

D-ZOOM - button

FOCUS + button

FOCUS - button

POSITION button

Adjusting the picture position

After pressing the POSITION button on the remote control, use the ▲, ▼, ◀ and ▶ buttons. Press the POSITION button again to finish this operation.

Correcting distortion

Press the KEYSTONE button on the remote control. A dialog will appear on the screen to aid you in correcting the distortion.

Use the ▲/▼ cursor buttons to select, MANUAL or PERFECT FIT operation, and press the ▶ button to perform the following.

MANUAL displays a dialog for keystone correction.

PERFECT FIT displays a dialog for adjusting the shape of the projected image in each of the corners and sides.

Use the cursor buttons according to the dialog, checking the image.

Press the KEYSTONE button again to finish this operation.

Adjusting the volume

Use the VOLUME +/- buttons to adjust the volume.

Muting the sound

Press the MUTE button on the remote control. To restore the sound, press the MUTE or VOLUME+/- button.

⚠️CAUTION ▶If you wish to have a blank screen while the projector's lamp is on, use the BLANK function (see the Operating Guide).

Any other method of blocking the projection light, such as attaching something to the lens or placing something in front of the lens, may cause the damage to the projector.

NOTE • The ASPECT button does not work when no proper signal is inputted.

- For details, see the Operating Guide in the CD.

Turning off the power

1. Press the STANDBY/ON button on the projector or the remote control.

The message “Power off?” will appear on the screen for about 5 seconds.

1. Confirm that there is nothing that the lens door hits while closing. Press the STANDBY/ON button again while the message appears.

The projector lamp will go off, and the POWER indicator will begin blinking in orange. The lens door will close right after the lamp goes off.

STANDBY/ON button POWER indicator MENU INPUT STANDBY/ON POWER TEMP LAMP

However, to maintain better picture quality, the lens door will close after the lamp has been cooled down when the projector is installed upside down such as in ceiling mount installation. Then the POWER indicator will stop blinking and light in steady orange when the lamp cooling is complete.

Do not turn the projector on for about 10 minutes or more after turning it off. Also, do not turn the projector off shortly after turning it on. Such operations might cause the lamp to malfunction or shorten the lifetime of some parts including the lamp.

⚠ WARNING ▶ Be careful not to pinch your finger with the lens door, to prevent an injury.

▶ Do not touch around the lamp cover and the exhaust vents during use or just after use, since it is too hot.
▶ Remove the power cord for complete separation. The power outlet should be close to the projector and easily accessible.

NOTE • Please power off the projector after any connected devices are powered off.

- This projector has the AUTO POWER OFF function that can make the projector turn off automatically. For more information, please see the “Operating Guide” in the CD.

Replacing the lamp

A lamp has finite product life. Using the lamp for long periods of time could cause the pictures darker or the color tone poor. Note that each lamp has a different lifetime, and some may burst or burn out soon after you start using them.

Preparation of a new lamp and early replacement are recommended. To prepare a new lamp, make contact with your dealer and tell the lamp type number.

1. Turn the projector off, and unplug the power cord. Allow the projector to cool for at least 45 minutes.
2. Prepare a new lamp. If the projector is mounted on a wall or ceiling, or if the lamp has broken, also ask the dealer to replace the lamp.

In case of replacement by yourself, follow the following procedure.

1. Loosen the screw (marked by arrow) of the lamp cover and then slide and lift the lamp cover to the side to remove it.

2. Loosen the 2 screws (marked by arrow) of the lamp, and slowly pick up the lamp by the handle. Never loosen any other screws.

3. Insert the new lamp, and retighten firmly the 2 screws of the lamp that are loosened in the previous process to lock it in place.

4. While putting the interlocking parts of the lamp cover and the projector together, slide the lamp cover back in place. Then firmly fasten the screw of the lamp cover.

5. Turn the projector on and reset the lamp time using the LAMP TIME item in the OPTION menu.

(1) Press the MENU button to display a menu.
(2) Point at the ADVANCED MENU in the menu using the ▼/▲ button, then press the ▶ button.
(3) Point at the OPTION in the left column of the menu using the ▼/▲button, then press the ▶ button.

(4) Point at the LAMP TIME using the ▼/▲ button, then press the ▶ button. A dialog will appear.

(5) Press the ▶ button to select "OK" on the dialog. It performs resetting the lamp time.

lamp cover Handle

⚠️ CAUTION ▶ Do not touch any inner space of the projector, while the lamp is taken out.

NOTE • Please reset the lamp time only when you have replaced the lamp, for a suitable indication about the lamp.

Replacing the lamp (continued)

HIGH VOLTAGE

HIGH TEMPERATURE HIGH PRESSURE

⚠ WARNING ▶ The projector uses a high-pressure mercury glass lamp. The lamp can break with a loud bang, or burn out, if jolted or scratched, handled while hot, or worn over time. Note that each lamp has a different lifetime, and some may burst or burn out soon after you start using them. In addition, if the bulb bursts, it is possible for shards of glass to fly into the lamp housing, and for gas containing mercury and dust containing fine particles of glass to escape from the projector's vent holes.
▶ About disposal of a lamp: This product contains a mercury lamp; do not put it in a trash. Dispose of it in accordance with environmental laws.

- For lamp recycling, go to www.lamprecycle.org (in the US).

- For product disposal, consult your local government agency or www.eiae.org (in the US) or www.epsc.ca (in Canada).

For more information, ask your dealer.

Disconnect the plug from the power outlet

• If the lamp should break (it will make a loud bang when it does), unplug the power cord from the outlet, and make sure to request a replacement lamp from your local dealer. Note that shards of glass could damage the projector's internals, or cause injury during handling, so please do not try to clean the projector or replace the lamp yourself.
• If the lamp should break (it will make a loud bang when it does), ventilate the room well, and make sure not to inhale the gas or fine particles that come out from the projector's vent holes, and not to get them into your eyes or mouth.
• Before replacing the lamp, turn the projector off and unplug the power cord, then wait at least 45 minutes for the lamp to cool sufficiently. Handling the lamp while hot can cause burns, as well as damaging the lamp.

• Never unscrew except the appointed (marked by an arrow) screws.
• Do not open the lamp cover while the projector is mounted on a wall or ceiling. This is dangerous, since if the lamp's bulb has broken, the shards will fall out when the cover is opened. In addition, working in high places is dangerous, so ask your local dealer to have the lamp replaced even if the bulb is not broken.
• Do not use the projector with the lamp cover removed. At the lamp replacing, make sure that the screws are screwed in firmly. Loose screws could result in damage or injury.

• Use only the lamp of the specified type. Use of a lamp that does not meet the lamp specifications for this model could cause a fire, damage or shorten the life of this product.
• If the lamp breaks soon after the first time it is used, it is possible that there are electrical problems elsewhere besides the lamp. If this happens, consult your local dealer or a service representative.
• Handle with care: jolting or scratching could cause the lamp bulb to burst during use.
• Using the lamp for long periods of time, could cause it dark, not to light up or to burst. When the pictures appear dark, or when the color tone is poor, please replace the lamp as soon as possible. Do not use old (used) lamps; this is a cause of breakage.

Cleaning and replacing the air filter

The air filter has two kinds of filters inside. Please check and clean the air filter periodically. When the indicators or a message prompts you to clean the air filter, comply with it as soon as possible. If the filters are damaged or heavily soiled, replace them with the new ones. To prepare the new filters, make contact with your dealer and tell the following type number.

Type number : UX37191 (Filter set)

When you replace the lamp, please replace the air filter. An air filter of specified type will come together with a replacement lamp for this projector.

1. Turn the projector off, and unplug the power cord. Allow the projector to sufficiently cool down.
2. Use a vacuum cleaner on and around the filter cover.
3. Slide the filter unit upward to take it off from the projector.
4. Use a vacuum cleaner for the filter vent of the projector.
5. Take the fine meshed filter out while holding the filter cover. It is recommended to leave the coarse meshed filter in the filter cover as it is.
6. Use a vacuum cleaner on both sides of the fine meshed filter while holding it so it will not be sucked in. Use a vacuum cleaner for the inside of the filter cover to clean up the coarse meshed filter. If the filters are damaged or heavily soiled, replace them with new ones.
7. Put the fine meshed filter on the coarse meshed one, turning its stitched side up.

8. Put the filter unit back into the projector.

9. Turn the projector on and reset the filter time using the FILTER TIME item in the EASY MENU.

(1) Press the MENU button to display a menu.
(2) Point at the FILTER TIME using the ▼/▲ button, then press the ▶ button. A dialog will appear.

(3) Press the ▶ button to select "OK" on the dialog. It performs resetting the filter time.

3. Filter cover

Filter unit Intake vent

7. Filter cover Filter (coarse meshed) Filter (fine meshed)

Stitched side

⚠ WARNING ▶ Before taking care of the air filter, make sure the power cable is not plugged in, then allow the projector to cool sufficiently.

▶ Use only the air filter of the specified type. Do not use the projector without the air filter or the filter cover. It could result in a fire or malfunction to the projector.
▶ Clean the air filter periodically. If the air filter becomes clogged by dust or the like, internal temperatures rise and could cause a fire, a burn or malfunction to the projector.

NOTE • Please reset the filter time only when you have cleaned or replaced the air filter, for a suitable indication about the air filter.

- The projector may display the message such as the “CHECK THE AIR FLOW” or turn off the projector, to prevent the internal heat level rising.

Replacing the internal clock battery

This projector has internal clock that uses a battery. When the clock of the network function does not work correctly, please try solution by replacement of the battery:

HITACHI MAXELL, part number CR2032 or CR2032H.

Battery Cover

1. Turn the projector off, and unplug the power cord. Allow the projector to cool sufficiently.
2. After making sure that the projector has cooled adequately, slowly turn over the projector, so that the bottom is facing.
3. Turn the battery cover fully in the direction indicated "OPEN" using a coin or the like, and pick the cover up to remove it.
4. Pry up the battery using a flathead screwdriver or the like to take it out. While prying it up, put a finger lightly on the battery since it may pop out of the holder.
5. Replace the battery with a new HITACHI MAXELL, Part No. CR2032 or CR2032H. Slide the battery in under the plastic claw, and push it into the holder until it clicks.
6. Replace the battery cover in place, then turn it in the direction indicated "CLOSE" using such as coins, to fix.

90° 90°

NOTE • The internal clock will be initialized by removing the battery. For setting the clock, see “Network Guide”. (20, 22)

⚠ WARNING ▶ Be careful of handling a battery, as a battery can cause explosion, cracking or leakage, which could result in a fire, an injury, and environment pollution.

• Use only the specified and perfect battery. Do not use a battery with damage, such as a scratch, a dent, rust or leakage.
• When replacing the battery, replace it with a new battery.
• When a battery leaked, wipe the leakage out well with a waste cloth. If the leakage adhered to your body, immediately rinse it well with water. When a battery leaked in the battery holder, replace the batteries after wiping the leakage out.
• Make sure the plus and minus terminals are correctly aligned when loading a battery.
• Do not work on a battery; for example recharging or soldering.
• Keep a battery in a dark, cool and dry place. Never expose a battery to a fire or water.
• Keep a battery away from children and pets. Be careful for them not to swallow a battery. If swallowed consult a physician immediately for emergency treatment.
• Obey the local laws on disposing a battery.

Caring for the mirror and lens

If the projection mirror or lens is flawed, soiled or fogged, it could cause deterioration of display quality. Please take care of the mirror and lens, being cautious of handling.

1. Turn the projector off and unplug the power cord from the power outlet. And cool the projector down by leaving it for a while as it is.
2. The lens door can be opened manually. Please hold both side of the lens door and slowly open it until it is locked with clicking sound.
3. Wipe softly the mirror and lens with a damped soft cleaning cloth for lens on the market, being careful not to give any damage on the mirror and lens. For around edge of the mirror and lens where might be difficult to be wiped out, please use an air blower for cameras on the market to clean up.
4. To close the lens door properly, please take the following procedure. (1) Insert the power cord with the lens door opened. (2) The power indicator will light in orange, and the lens door closes automatically. Do not touch the lens door when the door is closing. Do not allow anything to obstruct the lens door.

Illustration of hands holding a sheet of paper inside a device (no text or symbols visible)

ENGLISH

Illustration of hands cleaning a paper airplane into a box (no text or symbols visible)

10.5x Blower

Illustration of a hand using a power adapter to press an electronic device (no text or symbols visible)

Cleaning cloth

NOTE

• When the lens door is closed manually, it may not shut properly.
• The lens door may not close when the LENS DOOR LOCK function of the SERVICE item in the OPTION menu is set to ON. For more information, please see the "Operating Guide" on the CD.

⚠ WARNING ▶ Before caring for the projection mirror and lens, turn the projector off and unplug the power cord, then cool the projector sufficiently.

▶ Do not use a vacuum cleaner to clean the projection mirror or lens, since it might give some damage.
▶ Do not use cleaners or chemicals other than those specified in this manual. Pay special attention to the mirror and lens as these materials could cause serious damage to either.

⚠️CAUTION ▶Be careful not to pinch your finger with the lens door, to prevent an injury.

Using the CD manual

The other manuals for this product are written into the included CD-ROM titled "User's Manual (detailed)". Before using the CD-ROM, please read the following to ensure the proper use.

■ System requirements

The system for using the CD-ROM requires the following.

Windows®: OS:Microsoft ^ Windows ^ 98, Windows ^ 98SE, Windows NT ^ 4.0, Windows ^ Me, Windows ^ 2000/Windows ^ XP or later CPU:Pentium ^ processor 133MHz / Memory:32MB or more

Macintosh®: OS:Mac OS 10.2 or later CPU:PowerPC® / Memory:32MB or more

CD-ROM drive: 4x CD-ROM drive

Display: 256 color / 640x480 dots resolution

Applications: Microsoft ^® Internet Explorer ^® 4.0 and Adobe ^® Acrobat ^® Reader ^® 4.0 or later

How to use the CD

1. Insert CD into PC's CD-ROM drive.

Windows®: In a while, Web browser automatically starts. Start up window comes up.

Macintosh®: (1) Double-click on the "Projectors" icon appeared on the desktop screen.

(2) When “main.html” file is clicked, Web browser will start and Initial window will appear.

1. Click the model name of your projector first, and then click language you want from the displayed list. The User's manual (detailed) will open.

⚠️CAUTION ▶ Only use the CD-ROM in a computer CD drive. The CD-ROM is designed for PC use only. NEVER INSERT THE CD-ROM INTO A NON-COMPUTER CD PLAYER! Inserting the CD-ROM into an incompatible CD drive may produce a loud noise, which in turn MAY RESULT IN EAR AND SPEAKER DAMAGE!

- After using CD-ROM, please put it into CD case and keep it. Please keep the CD neither in direct sunlight nor in a high temperature and high humidity environment.

NOTE • The information in the CD-ROM is subject to change without notice.

- No responsibility is taken for any obstacle and defect to hardware and software of your PC as a result of the use of the CD-ROM.

- All or Any part of the information in the CD-ROM must not be copied, reproduced or republished without notice to our company.

Specifications

Item Specification
Product name Liquid crystal projector
Liquid Crystal Panel 786	432 pixels (1024 horizontal x 768 vertical)
Lamp	210W UHP
Speaker 10W
Power supply AC 100-120V/	3.1A, AC 220-240V/1.6A
Power consumption AC	100-120V:310 W, AC 220-240V:300W
Temperature range 5 ~ 35°C (Operating)
Size	345 (W) x 85 (H) x 303 (D) mm* Not including protruding parts. Please refer to the following figure.
Weight (mass)	approx. 3.8 kg
Ports	Computer input portHDMI input portCOMPUTER IN1HDMI ...... HDMI connector ×1...... D-sub 15 pin mini x1Audio input/output portCOMPUTER IN2AUDIO IN1 ...... Stereo mini x1...... D-sub 15 pin mini x1AUDIO IN2 ...... Stereo mini x1Computer output portAUDIO IN3 (R, L) ...... RCA x2MONITOR OUTAUDIO OUT (R, L) ...... RCA x2...... D-sub 15 pin mini x1OthersVideo input portUSB TYPE A ......USB-Ax1S-VIDEO ......mini DIN 4 pin x1USB TYPE B ......USB-Bx1VIDEO ......RCA x1CONTROL ...... D-sub 9 pin x1LAN ...... RJ45 x1MIC ......Mono mini x1
Optional parts	Lamp: DT01181Filter set: UX37191Mounting accessory: HAS-AW100 (Bracket for ceiling mount)HAS-203L (Fixing adaptor for low ceilings)HAS-P100 (Fixing adaptor for high ceilings)Laser remote control: RC-R008* For more information, please consult your dealer.

[unit: mm]

Troubleshooting - Warranty and after-service

If an abnormal operation (such as smoke, strange odor or excessive sound) should occur, stop using the projector immediately.

Otherwise if a problem occurs with the projector, first refer to “Troubleshooting” of “Operating Guide” and “Network Guide”, and run through the suggested checks. If this does not resolve the problem, please consult your dealer or service company. They will tell you what warranty condition is applied.

Please check the following web address where you may find the latest information for this projector.

Product information and Manuals : http://www.hitachi-america.us/digitalmedia

Production information : http://www.hitachidigitalmedia.com

Direct link to manual download : http://www.hitachiserviceeu.com/support/guides/userguides.htm

NOTE • The information in this manual is subject to change without notice.

• The manufacturer assumes no responsibility for any errors that may appear in this manual.
• The reproduction, transfer or copy of all or any part of this document is not permitted without express written consent.

Trademark acknowledgment

• Mac ^ , Macintosh ^ and Mac OS ^ are registered trademarks of Apple Inc.
• Pentium ^ is a registered trademark of Intel Corp.
• Adobe ^ and Acrobat ^ , Reader ^ are registered trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
• Microsoft ^ , Internet explorer ^ , Windows ^ , Windows NT ^ and Windows Vista ^ are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S. and/or other countries.
• PowerPC ^ is a registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation.
• HDMI, the HDMI logo and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC in the United States and other countries.
• Blu-ray Disc™ and Blu-ray™ are trademarks of Blu-ray Disc Association.
  All other trademarks are the properties of their respective owners.

End User License Agreement for the Projector Software

• Software in the projector consists of the plural number of independent software modules and there exist our copyright or/and third party copyrights for each of such software modules.
• Be sure to read “End User License Agreement for the Projector Software” which is separated document. (in the CD)

NOTE • The information in this manual is subject to change without notice. • The manufacturer assumes no responsibility for any errors that may appear in this manual. • The reproduction, transfer or copy of all or any part of this document is not permitted without express written consent.

Digital Media Division

900 Hitachi way, Chula Vista

CA 91914-3556 USA CANADA

Tel: [phone]

Fax: [phone]

http://www.hitachi-america.us/digitalmedia

Hitachi Europe Ltd., Consumer Affairs Department

PO Box 3007

Maidenhead

Berkshire SL6 8ZE UNITED KINGDOM

Tel: [phone]

Email: [e-mail]

Hitachi Europe S.A.S., Digital Media Group

Email: [e-mail]

Hitachi Europe S.A.

Gran Via Carles III, 86 Planta 5 ^a

http://www.hitachi.com.au

Hitachi (Hong Kong), Ltd.

18/F., Ever Gain Centre, 28 On Muk Street.,

Shatin, N.T. HONG KONG

Tel: [phone]

Fax: [phone]

http://www.hitachi-hk.com.hk

Hitachi Sales (Malaysia) Sdn. Bhd.

Lot 12, Jalan Kamajuan, Bangi Industrial Estate, 43650 Bandar Baru Bangi, Selangor Darul Ehsan

MALAYSIA

Tel: [phone]

Fax: [phone]

http://www.hitachiconsumer.com.my

Hitachi Home Electronics Asia (S) Pte. Ltd.

438A Alexandra Road #01-01/02/03

Alexandra Technopark, 119967 SINGAPORE

Tel: [phone]

Fax: [phone]

http://www.hitachiconsumer.com.sg

Hitachi Sales Corp. of Taiwan

2nd Floor, No.65, Nanking East Road, Section 3,

Taipei 104 TAIWAN

Tel: [phone]

Fax: [phone]

http://www.hsct.com.tw

Hitachi Sales (Thailand), Ltd.

994, 996 Soi Thonglor, Sukhumvit 55 Rd.,

Klongtonnua, Vadhana, Bangkok 10110

THAILAND

Tel: [phone]

Fax: [phone]

http://www.hitachi-th.com

Hitachi Consumer Electronics Co., Ltd.

292 Yoshida-cho, Totsuka-ku

Yokohama 244-0817 JAPAN

Tel: [phone]

Fax: [phone]